JP6643904B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In the pachislot machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and a stepping motor is driven to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the drive of the stepping motor is controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In such a gaming machine, various effects are generally performed in accordance with the progress of the game. There is disclosed a gaming machine capable of appropriately oscillating the screen display while preventing an increase in data capacity by arranging and overlapping different image data on the same layer.

JP-A-2015-144940

  By the way, in the effect in the gaming machine, it is required to switch the effect in accordance with the progress of the game such as when the rotation of the reel is started or when the reel is stopped, but in Patent Document 1, the effect is switched in accordance with the progress of the game. Is not disclosed at all, and further ingenuity is required.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately switching effects in accordance with the progress of a game.

Game machine according to the present invention, the display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 11) that displays an effect as, the progress of the game before switching effect from a given among multiple effect switchable to the effect after switching in accordance with the An effect selecting means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for selecting an effect to be displayed in a game; and a display control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the display means based on the effect selected by the effect selecting means. Detecting means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for detecting a request for switching the effect being displayed on the display means (for example, a start command or a reel stop command) in accordance with the progress of the game ; When the effect is selected by the effect selecting means, the effect switching layer is switched by switching the effect execution layer to a layer different from the layer performing the pre-switch effect. Rendition of switched, or includes rendering setup means for setting either of the effect of the effect switched to perform an effect in the same layer and a layer for executing a pre-switching effect (e.g., the sub-control circuit 101) and, the, The display control means, when the detection means detects a switching request, if the effect selection means has selected the layer switching type effect, the effect after switching from one layer to perform the effect before switching By switching to another layer to be executed, the effect to be displayed on the display means is switched, and when the effect switching type effect is selected by the effect selecting means, the effect to be executed in the same layer is not switched. by switching from the performance in the effect after switching, switching an effect to be displayed in the display unit, the presentation setting unit sets to the plurality of presentation Contents, characterized in that vary depending on the continuation condition of the game.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a first effect for switching an effect according to the progress of a game by switching a layer in which an effect is being executed, and a second effect for switching an effect according to the progress of a game in the same layer. , And selects an effect to be displayed from a plurality of effects including the first effect and the second effect. Here, when the effect is switched by switching the layers as in the first effect, although it is possible to suppress the occurrence of flickering of the image before and after the effect is switched, since the effect must be performed in each layer, Processing load increases. On the other hand, when switching the effects performed on the same layer as in the second effect, the processing load can be reduced, but flickering of the image may occur before and after switching the effects.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, a preferable switching method is set in advance for each effect in accordance with the connection between the effects before and after the switching and the processing load of each effect. Thus, for example, a method of switching layers can be set for an effect (first effect) in which a flicker easily occurs before and after the switching and gives an uncomfortable feeling to the player. For an effect that is not bothersome (second effect), a method of switching the effect on the same layer can be set. As a result, according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the flicker at the time of switching the effect, to reduce the processing load, and to cause the processing to drop according to the effect switching. As a result, the effect can be appropriately switched in accordance with the progress of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the game time increases, the effect setting means changes the setting content for the effect set as the effect switching type effect among the plurality of effects to the layer switching type effect. It is characterized by changing .

  In a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine or a pachinko machine, a player may be prompted to operate a button such as a chance button, and the effect may be switched when the button operation is performed. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect to be switched can be made different depending on whether the button operation is performed or not, so that the game characteristics are diversified and the interest of the game is improved. Also in this case, since a preferable switching method is set for each effect, the effect can be appropriately switched in accordance with the progress of the game.

  According to the present invention, effects can be appropriately switched in accordance with the progress of a game.

It is a figure showing the functional flow of the pachislo concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a whole perspective view showing the external structure of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is an outline figure of a display provided with the above-mentioned pachislo. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the said pachislot. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control circuit of the said pachislo. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the sub control circuit of the said pachislo. FIG. 3 is an exploded view of a rotating accessory of the pachislot. It is a perspective view of the rotating accessory in the state where the centerpiece member of the above-mentioned pachislot was located in a neutral position. It is a perspective view of the rotating accessory in the state where the eyeball member of the above-mentioned pachislot rotated rightward. It is the perspective view which looked at the centerpiece member, the left eye corner member, and the right eye corner member of the pachislo from the back. It is a top view of the rotating accessory in a state where the centerpiece member of the pachislot is located at the neutral position. It is a top view of the rotating accessory in the state where the eyeball member of the pachislot started rotating rightward from the neutral position. It is a top view of the rotating accessory in a state where the centerpiece member of the pachislot is located at the maximum movement position on the right side. It is a bottom view of the rotating accessory in the state where the centerpiece member of the above-mentioned pachislot was located in a neutral position. It is a bottom view of the rotating accessory in the state where the eyeball member of the pachislot started rotating rightward from the neutral position. It is a bottom view of the rotating accessory in a state where the eyeball member of the pachislot is located at the maximum movement position on the right side. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state controlled by the main control circuit of the said pachislo. It is a figure which shows the transition condition of the game state controlled by the main control circuit of the said pachislo. It is a figure showing the symbol arrangement table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the internal lottery table memorized by the main ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing the internal lottery table memorized by the main ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing the internal lottery table memorized by the main ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing the internal lottery table memorized by the main ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing the internal lottery table memorized by the main ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure for explaining an outline of an internal winning combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure for explaining an outline of an internal winning combination in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a diagram showing an internal winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the carryover combination storage area provided in the main RAM of the said pachislot. It is a figure showing the display combination storage area provided in the main RAM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure which shows the game state flag storage area provided in the main RAM of the said pachislo. It is a figure which shows the operation stop button storage area provided in the main RAM of the said pachi-slot. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a pressing order storage area provided in a main RAM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol code storage area provided in the main RAM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state controlled by the sub control circuit of the said pachislo. It is a figure showing a part of correspondence of the type of a winning combination managed by the main control circuit of the above-mentioned pachislot, and the abbreviation of the winning combination managed by the sub control circuit. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the said pachislot liquid crystal display device. It is a figure showing the outline of the management method of the production ball in the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a schematic diagram of the shift lottery between the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the ART lottery table at the time of start memorized by sub ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing the ART lottery table at the time of start memorized by sub ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing the ART lottery table at the time of start memorized by sub ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure showing the mode shift lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the mode shift lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the mode shift lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the mode shift lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the mode shift lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the apocalypse operation lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislo. It is a figure which shows the apocalypse MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislo. It is a figure which shows the apocalypse MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislo. 9 is a MAP data correspondence table showing MAP data defined in the apocalypse MAP. It is a figure which shows the effect ball lottery table at the time of the apocalypse operation memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislo. It is a figure which shows the outline of the promotion method of the effect ball used during a normal game state and a high probability game state. It is a figure which shows the accessory movable lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure showing an effect ball promotion lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART random determination table at the time of reel stop stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislo. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game during the high probability game state of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the avoidance point lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the game in CZ of the said pachislot. It is a figure showing the CZ_MAP lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. 9 is a CZ_MAP correspondence table showing CZ modes defined in CZ_MAP. It is a figure showing the invalid point lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a figure which shows the CZ effect ball lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART random determination table in CZ stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure showing a part of correspondence of the type of a winning combination managed by the main control circuit of the above-mentioned pachislot, and the abbreviation of the winning combination managed by the sub control circuit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the game in BB of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART random determination table at the time of the start during BB memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislo. It is a figure which shows the BB mode up lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislo. It is a figure which shows the BB mode up lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislo. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table at the time of completion | finish during BB memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the game during ART of the said pachislot. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the game during ART of the said pachislot. It is a figure showing the ART state lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the boss MAP lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a boss MAP data correspondence table showing boss MAP data defined in boss MAP. It is a figure which shows the rendering ball lottery table during the enemy determination ART stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the rendering ball lottery table during the enemy determination ART stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the effect ball upgrade lottery table during the enemy determination ART stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the enemy-determined ART middle ally power addition lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislo. It is a figure which shows the enemy determination ART boss power lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a boss status correspondence table showing the status of the opponent in the battle ART. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a battle MAP data correspondence table showing battle MAP data specified in battle MAP. It is a figure which shows the effect ball lottery table during battle ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the damage random determination table during a battle ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the damage random determination table during a battle ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure showing the ART state lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure showing the ART state lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of the said pachislo. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery process of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus end check processing of the said pachislo. It is a flow chart which shows the bonus operation check processing of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption processing of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the power supply process of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp control task of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the display method of the non-effect image during panel display. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control task of the sub CPU of the said pachislo. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory control task of the sub CPU of the said pachi-slot. It is a flowchart which shows the mother task of the sub CPU of the said pachislo. It is a flowchart which shows the main task of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the main board | substrate communication task of the sub CPU of the said pachislo. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the animation task of the sub CPU of the said pachislo. It is a flowchart which shows the effect content determination processing of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start command reception of the sub CPU of the said pachislo. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ / ART lottery process at the time of the normal start of the sub CPU of the said pachislo. It is a flowchart which shows the apocalypse operation processing of the sub CPU of the said pachislo. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability game state transition process of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the high-probability effect registration processing of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flow chart which shows ART lottery processing at the time of CZ start of the sub CPU of the above-mentioned pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows ART random determination processing during BB of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process during ART of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the enemy decision ART of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process during battle ART of the sub CPU of the said pachislo. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the winning operation command reception of the sub CPU of the said pachislo. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ / ART lottery process at the time of normal termination of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability shift determination processing of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability completion | finish determination processing of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ lottery result management processing of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the bonus end command reception of the sub CPU of the said pachislo. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the rewriting method of the effect ball used during enemy decision ART. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot of another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ART random determination process during BB of the sub CPU of a pachislot of another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving a winning operation command of the sub CPU of a pachislo of another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the BB production effect control processing of the sub CPU of a pachislo of another embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a pachislo showing an embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, medals are used as game media for performing a game. As the game medium, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can be applied in addition to medals. In the present embodiment, an assist time (hereinafter, referred to as “AT”), which is a function of navigating the formation of a specific small role by a ramp or the like, and a function in which the replay probability becomes higher than normal during a specific number of plays. A pachi-slot provided with an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) function in which the RT operates simultaneously is described.

  In the following description, the side (direction) from the pachislot 1 toward the player is referred to as the front side of the pachislot 1, the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side, and the right and left sides of the pachislot 1 are viewed from the player. (Right direction) and left side (left direction). Further, a direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-rear direction, and a direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. A direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as a vertical direction.

[Function flow of pachislot]
As shown in FIG. 1, when the player inserts a medal and operates the start lever 16, the pachislot 1 is set to one value (eg, 0 to 65535) of random numbers in a predetermined numerical range. Hereinafter, a random value is extracted.

  The internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 93 described later) performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. In other words, the internal winning combination determining means detects the start operation of the unit game with respect to the start lever 16 by the start switch 64 (see FIG. 4) (establishment of a predetermined start condition) at a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations. Determine the internal winning combination.

  By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols permitted to be displayed along a winning line described later is determined. In addition, as the types of symbol combinations, there are provided ones in which a privilege such as a medal payout, a replay operation (replay) operation, a bonus operation, or the like is given to a player, and other types related to so-called "losing". Have been.

  Subsequently, after the rotation of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed, when the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means (main CPU 93 described later) causes the internal winning combination to occur. Based on the timing at which the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are pressed, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  Here, in the pachi-slot 1, basically, the control of stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within the specified time is called the "number of sliding pieces", and the maximum number of symbols is four symbols (the maximum number of sliding symbols). ).

  When the internal winning combination that permits the display of the symbol combination related to the winning is determined, the reel combination control unit uses the specified time to change the symbol combination along the winning line as an active line. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so as to be displayed as much as possible.

  On the other hand, for combinations of symbols for which display is not permitted by the internal winning combination, reels are set within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so as not to be displayed along the pay line by using the specified time. Stop rotation of 3L, 3C, 3R.

  When the rotations of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are all stopped in this way, the winning determination means (main CPU 93 described later) determines whether the combination of the symbols displayed along the winning line is related to the winning. It determines whether or not.

  That is, the winning determination means determines whether a winning combination has been achieved or not based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the winning line based on the stop of the symbol change by the reel stop control means. Then, when it is determined that the game is related to a winning, a privilege such as payout of a medal is given to the player. A series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot 1.

  In this embodiment, the reel stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) performed first when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating is the first stop operation, the first stop operation, and the first stop operation. The stop operation performed next to the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed subsequent to the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

  Further, in the pachislot machine, in the above-described series of flows, display of an image performed by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device, output of light performed by various lamps, output of sound performed by a speaker, driving of a rotating accessory, Or various effects are performed using these combinations.

  When the start lever is operated, an effect random number value (hereinafter, effect random number value) is extracted separately from the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determination means determines, by lottery, the effect content to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. This effect content determining means is carried by a sub-control circuit described later.

  When the effect contents are determined, the effect executing means executes the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reels is started, when the rotation of each reel is stopped, and when there is a winning. As described above, in the pachislot machine, by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination, the player has an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, a combination of symbols to be aimed). To increase the interest of the player.

[Pachislot structure]
Next, the structure of the pachislot according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 3 is a schematic view of the display device 10 of the pachislot 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a as a housing for housing reels, circuit boards, and the like, and a front door 2b attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable. Handles 2c are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (FIG. 2 shows only one side handle 2c). The handle 2 c is a concave portion to which a hand is put when carrying the pachislot 1.

  Inside the cabinet 2a, a plurality (three in this embodiment) of reels 3L, 3C, 3R in which a plurality (for example, 21) symbols are displayed at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction (FIG. 3). See). Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a reel 3R, respectively. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has a cylindrical reel body and a light-transmissive sheet material mounted on a peripheral surface of the reel body. The above-mentioned plural (for example, 21) symbols are drawn on the surface of the above-mentioned sheet material.

  The front door 2b includes a door body 9 and a display device 10 for displaying a predetermined effect. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a using a hinge (not shown) so as to be openable and closable. The hinge is provided at the left end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachislot 1.

  The front door 2b has a display window 4 through which the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R can be visually recognized. The display window 4 includes three left display windows 4L, a middle display window 4C, and a right display window 4R corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. These display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are provided at positions overlapping with the arrangement areas of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R when viewed from the front (the player side), and are in front of the three reels (the player side). ). Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the display window 4 via the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

  In the present embodiment, the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are arranged continuously among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display windows is stopped. The size is set so that three symbols can be displayed. That is, the upper, middle, and lower regions are provided for each reel in the frames of the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R, and one symbol is displayed in each region. In the present embodiment, a line connecting the upper region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the lower region of the right reel 3R is defined as a winning line for determining whether or not a winning has occurred.

<Overview of Display Device 10>
Subsequently, the display device 10 includes, as shown in FIG. 3, a liquid crystal display device 11 and a panel device 400 provided on the front surface (on the player side) of the liquid crystal display device 11. In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 11 and the panel device 400 are linked to each other, so that the display device 10 displays an image relating to a game effect and information about the game.

  The liquid crystal display device 11 performs an effect by displaying an image, and also, when an error occurs in the game console information (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a menu screen) such as customization of the pachislot 1 and the game history, or the pachislot 1, for example. An error screen for notifying the contents of the error to the store clerk can be displayed. Note that an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 along with execution of an effect may be referred to as an “effect image”. It may be called a “non-directed image”.

  The panel device 400 is a so-called Illuminary (registered trademark) panel device, and includes a transparent light guide plate 401 and an LED (Light Emitting Diode) 403 arranged on a side of the light guide plate 401. The light guide plate 401 is a transmissive panel such as an acrylic material having transparency. As shown in FIG. 3B, the light guide plate 401 is formed with a plurality of concave portions (reflective concave portions 402a) each having a reflective surface for reflecting light along the plate surface to the player side. The latent image 402 shown in FIG. 3A is formed by the concave portion 402a.

  The LED 403 is arranged on the side of the light guide plate 401 and emits light along the surface of the light guide plate 401. As such an LED 403, an LED array in which a large number of LEDs are linearly provided is preferably used. As shown in FIG. 3B, the light emitted along the plate surface of the light guide plate 401 due to the light emission of the LED 403 is reflected to the front surface (the player side) by the reflective concave portion 402a, and is formed by the reflective concave portion 402a. Latent image 402 becomes visible to the player.

  In such a display device 10, as shown in FIG. 3A, when the LED 403 does not emit light, the latent image 402 cannot be visually recognized by the player, and the player guides the light guide plate 401 to a transparent state. It will be recognized as a board. As a result, in the display device 10, an effect is performed according to the content displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  On the other hand, when the LED 403 emits light, the plurality of reflection concave portions 402a reflect light toward the player, so that the latent image 402 is visualized as shown in FIG. Becomes visible. In such a case, the display device 10 performs an effect using the panel device 400 or an effect in which the panel device 400 and the liquid crystal display device 11 are linked.

  In the present embodiment, the latent image 402 indicating the character “CHANCE !!” is drawn on the light guide plate 401. However, the latent image 402 is not limited to such a character, and other characters may be used. Alternatively, an image such as a face of the character, not limited to the character, may be drawn.

  Returning to FIG. 2, a protective glass 6 is provided on the front side of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display device 10 described above. This prevents the player from directly touching the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display device 10 (the liquid crystal display device 11 and the panel device 400).

  Further, a decorative member 7 is attached to an upper portion on the front side of the door body 9 so as to surround the protective glass 6. The decorative member 7 constitutes a part of the exterior of the pachislot 1 and includes an upper exterior member 7a, a pair of side exterior members 7b, and a lower exterior member 7c. In particular, the upper exterior member 7a is disposed above the liquid crystal display device 11 and in front of a rotating accessory 200 described later.

  A pedestal portion 12 is formed at the center of the door body 9. The pedestal unit 12 includes various devices (medal slot 13, MAX bet button 14, 1 bet button 15, start lever 16, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, select button 18, select button 18, 19) is provided.

  The medal insertion slot 13 is provided for receiving medals dropped into the pachislot 1 from outside by a player. That is, the medal insertion slot 13 is for a medal to be inserted by the player. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 13 are used for one game with a predetermined number (for example, three) as an upper limit, and a portion exceeding the predetermined number is deposited in the pachislot 1. (So-called credit function).

  The MAX bet button 14 and the 1-bet button 15 are provided for determining the number of medals stored in the pachislot 1 to be used in one game. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a settlement button. The settlement button is provided for drawing out (discharging) medals stored in the pachislot 1 to the outside. The start lever 16 is for starting the rotation of all the reels (3L, 3C, 3R) according to the operation of the player.

  The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and are used to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels according to the operation of the player. .

  The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are used when performing an operation related to information displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, for example, when performing a selection operation on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. Used for Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  The selection button 18 and the determination button 19 are used when performing various operations on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 (for example, calling a menu screen or operating on the menu screen). The pedestal section 12 is provided with a 7-segment display 28 composed of 7-segment LEDs. The 7-segment display 28 digitally displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts) and the number of medals deposited in the pachislot 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits). indicate.

  At the lower part of the door body 9, a medal payout slot 21, a medal tray 22, speakers 23L and 23R are provided. The medal payout opening 21 guides medals discharged by driving a hopper device 43 described below to the outside. The medal tray 22 stores medals discharged from the medal payout exit 21. The speakers 23L and 23R output sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the effect.

  A waist panel 29 is provided between the pedestal section 12 and the medal tray 22, and the waist panel 29 displays various types of information such as the model name of the pachislot 1 and the role configuration.

<Electrical configuration of pachislot machine>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachislot 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electric configuration of the pachislo 1.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the pachislot 1 has a main control board 41 provided in the cabinet 2a and a sub control board 42 provided in the front door 2b. The main control board 41 is electrically connected to a reel relay terminal board 51, a setting key type switch 52, a cabinet side relay board 53, a door relay terminal board 54, and a power supply board 44b of the power supply device 44. ing.

  The reel relay terminal plate 51 is provided inside the reel body of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 51 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 41 to the stepping motor.

  The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting of the pachislot 1 or when confirming the setting of the pachislot 1. The cabinet-side relay board 53 is electrically connected to an external centralized terminal plate 56, a hopper device 43, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 57.

  The cabinet-side relay board 53 relays signals output from the main control board 41 to the external centralized terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57. That is, the external centralized terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are connected to the main control board 41 via the cabinet side relay board 53.

  The external centralized terminal board 56 is attached to the cabinet 2a, and is provided for outputting signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot 1.

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 penetrates a medal auxiliary storage not shown. The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage is full of medals. A power switch 44 a is connected to a power board 44 b of the power device 44.

  When the power switch 44a is ON, the power of the pachislot 1 is turned on, and the power supply 44 supplies necessary power to the pachislot 1. When the power switch 44a is OFF, the power of the pachislot 1 is turned off, and the supply of power from the power supply device 44 to the pachislot 1 is stopped. On the door relay terminal board 54, a medal sensor 46, a door opening / closing monitoring switch 61, a BET switch 62, a settlement switch 63, a start switch 64, a stop switch board 65, a game operation display board 66, a selection switch 67, a decision switch 68 and a sub switch The relay board 69 is connected.

  That is, the medal sensor 46, the door open / close monitoring switch 61, the BET switch 62, the settlement switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66, the selection switch 67, the decision switch 68, and the sub relay board 69 It is connected to the main control board 41 via a relay terminal plate 54.

  The medal sensor 46 detects that the medal has passed through a selector (not shown), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The door opening / closing monitor switch 61 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot 1. The BET switch 62 detects that the MAX bet button 14 and the 1-bet button 15 (see FIG. 2) have been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection results to the main control board 41.

  The settlement switch 63 detects that a settlement button (not shown) has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The start switch 64 detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

  The stop switch board 65 is a board that constitutes a circuit for stopping a rotating reel and a circuit for displaying a stoppable reel by using an LED or the like. The stop switch board 65 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 66 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 28 when accepting insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatable, and when performing a replay. It is a substrate for making it. The 7-segment display 28 and the LED 70 are connected to the game operation display board 66. The LED 70 illuminates, for example, a mark indicating the start of a game, a mark for performing a replay, and the like.

  The selection switch 67 detects that the selection button 18 has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The decision switch 68 detects that the decision button 19 has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. Then, the main control board 41 outputs the detection result output from the selection switch 67 or the decision switch 68 to the sub control board 42 as necessary.

  The sub relay board 69 relays a wiring connecting the sub control board 42 and the main control board 41. The sub-relay board 69 relays wiring connecting the sub-control board 42 and a plurality of boards arranged around the sub-control board 42. That is, the sub relay board 69 is electrically connected to the sub control board 42, the sound I / O board 71, the LED board 72, the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74, and the rotating accessory control board 78. I have.

  The sub control board 42 is connected to the main control board 41 via the door relay terminal plate 54 and the sub relay board 69. The sub control board 42 is electrically connected to the sound I / O board 71, the LED board 72, the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74, and the rotating accessory control board 78 via the sub relay board 69. ing.

  The sound I / O board 71 outputs sound to the speakers 23L and 23R. The LED board 72 causes the LED group 25, which is a specific example of the light source, to emit light in accordance with the effect performed under the control of the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 6), and displays a blinking pattern. The LED board 72 controls the LED group 25 that illuminates the waist panel 29 and the decorative member 7 and the LED provided on the rotating accessory 200.

  The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74 stores a history of opening / closing of the front door 2b. When the front door 2b is opened, the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74 outputs a signal for displaying an error on the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 42 (sub control circuit 101).

  The rotating accessory control board 78 drives the rotating accessory 200 in accordance with the effect performed under the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 6). The rotating accessory 200 is driven and controlled by the rotating accessory control board 78 to rotate the eyeball member 205 described later. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 and the rotating accessory control board 78 constitute an accessory control means, and the center member 205 is rotated by the rotating accessory according to the effect executed under the control of the sub-control circuit 101. The drive is controlled by the control board 78.

  A ROM control board 76, a liquid crystal relay board 77, and a panel control board 79 are connected to the sub control board 42. The ROM cartridge substrate 76 is a substrate for managing images (video), sound, light (LED group 25), data for driving the rotary accessory 200, and communication for the effect. The liquid crystal relay board 77 is a board that relays wiring that connects the sub-control board 42 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

  The panel control board 79 is a board that relays wiring for connecting the sub-control board 42 and the LEDs 403 included in the panel device 400, and executes a plurality of types of illumination display using the panel device 400. The panel control board 79 is provided with a drive circuit for inputting data serving as a basis of a light emission mode from the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 6) of the sub control board 42. By outputting an LED control signal to the LED 403, An image corresponding to the latent image 402 is displayed on the panel device 400 in various modes.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 constituted by the main control board 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachislo 1. As shown in FIG. 5, a main control circuit 91 as a main control section has a microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 41 as a main component, and controls the progress of a game.

  The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95. The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (command signals) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

  A clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99 are connected to the main CPU 93. The clock pulse generating circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  After detecting the reel index, the main CPU 93 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motor of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Thereby, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angles of the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated).

  The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one rotation. This reel index is provided, for example, at a predetermined position on each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a light sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. It is detected by a reel position detection unit (not shown) having a detection piece interposed therebetween.

  Here, the management of the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Each time a pulse counter outputs a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) necessary for rotation of one symbol, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is detected based on the position where the reel index is detected.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces is basically set to four symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the symbol of the left reel 3L at the middle of the display window 4 and each symbol within the range up to the symbol four symbols ahead can be stopped at the middle of the display window 4. Pattern.

<Sub-control circuit>
Next, the sub control circuit 101 constituted by the sub control board 42 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot 1.

  As shown in FIG. 6, a sub control circuit 101 as a sub control unit is electrically connected to a main control circuit 91, and determines and executes the effect contents based on a command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91. And the like, and controls peripheral devices such as the liquid crystal display device 11, the rotating accessory 200, various LEDs, and the speakers 23L and 23R.

  The sub-control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106. The sub CPU 102 controls output of video, sound, and light, and driving of the rotary accessory 200 in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76 in response to a command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

  The ROM cartridge substrate 76 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area. A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area.

  For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91 and an effect registration task for extracting effect random number values and determining and registering effect contents (effect data). Is included. Further, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined effect contents, a role control task for controlling the rotating role 200, a lamp control task for controlling light output by a light source of an LED, A voice control task for controlling output of sound from the speakers 23L and 23R is included.

  The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation. In addition, a storage area for storing sound data relating to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a light on / off pattern, and the like are included.

  The sub RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect contents and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub RAM 103 includes a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as a work area and a backup SRAM (Static RAM). When the power is turned on, various data stored in the SRAM are copied to the DRAM, so that a sub control circuit is provided. Various information used in step 101 is restored to the contents at the time of power-off.

  The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create a video according to the animation data specified by the effect contents, and display the created video on the liquid crystal display device 11. The sub CPU 102 drives the rotating accessory 200 based on the accessory movable data specified by the effect contents.

  In addition, the sub CPU 102 causes the speakers 23L and 23R to output sounds such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect contents. The sub CPU 102 controls turning on and off of the LED according to the lamp data specified by the effect contents.

<Structure of rotating accessory>
Next, the rotating accessory 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 7 to 16. Note that the rotating accessory 200 of the present embodiment constitutes a movable accessory of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the rotating accessory 200 is provided on the front side of the pachislot 1 with respect to the display device 10. The rotating accessory 200 includes a cover member 198 that can be opened and closed up and down. The cover member 198 constitutes a movable part of the present invention. In addition, a transparent lens 199 (not shown) is provided in front of the cover member 198 so that the rotating accessory 200 is not directly touched by a player.

  When the cover member 198 is opened, as shown in FIG. 8, the main body 203 of the rotating accessory 200 is exposed. When the cover member 198 is closed, the centerpiece body 203 of the rotating accessory 200 becomes invisible to the player. Note that the rotating role 200 is a role (gimmick) imitating an eye, the cover member 198 corresponds to an eyelid, and the center body 203 corresponds to a center. The cover member 198 is vertically opened and closed by an actuator such as a motor (not shown).

  7 to 9, the rotating accessory 200 includes an upper base 202, an eyeball body 203, and a lower base 204.

  An eyeball body 203 is provided at an eyeball member 205 extending in the left-right direction of the pachislot 1, a left eye corner member 206 provided at one end of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction, and an eyeball member 205 provided at the other end of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction. Right eye corner member 207 provided. Note that the rotation direction and the left-right direction of the eyeball member 205 are the rotation direction and the left-right direction viewed from the player.

  The eyeball member 205 is formed in a hemispherical shape having an arc surface 205A along the extending direction, and an image 205a imitating an eyeball is formed on the arc surface 205A. The eyeball member 205 is rotatable in the left-right direction along the arc surface 205A. The eyeball member 205 is formed of a lens.

  When the left eye corner member 206 and the right eye corner member 207 are disengaged from the eyeball member 205, respectively, the eyeball member 205 and the left eye corner member 206 and the right eye corner member 207 are arranged in a superimposed position. Further, the left and right outer corner members 206 and 207 are provided so as to overlap behind the eyeball member 205 when viewed from the player side. Specifically, the rear ends of the left and right eye corner members 206 and 207 are located behind the rear end of the eyeball member 205 in the width direction.

  The front ends of the left eye corner member 206 and the right eye corner member 207 are installed in front of the eye member 205 so as to cover both end sides in the extending direction of the eye member 205, and are rotatable relative to the eye member 205. Has become. Engagement projections 206A and 207A are formed on the back surfaces of the left and right outer corner members 206 and 207, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, an engagement protrusion 205 </ b> B is formed at one end (left end) in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205. The engagement projection 205B can be engaged with an engagement projection 206A formed on the back surface of the left outer corner member 206.

An engagement protrusion 205C is formed at the other end (right end) of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction. The engagement protrusion 205C can be engaged with an engagement protrusion 207A formed on the back surface of the right outer corner member 207.

  The engagement protrusion 206A of the left eye corner member 206 is positioned inside the extending direction of the eyeball member 205 with respect to the engagement protrusion 205B of the eyeball member 205. Thus, when the eyeball member 205 rotates rightward, which is one side of the rotation direction, the engagement protrusion 205B engages with the engagement protrusion 206A. Thereafter, when the eyeball member 205 further rotates rightward, the left eye corner member 206 moves rightward together with the eyeball member 205.

The engagement protrusion 207A of the right outer corner member 207 is located inside the extending direction of the eyeball member 205 with respect to the engagement protrusion 205C of the eyeball member 205. Thus, when the eyeball member 205 rotates leftward, which is the other side of the rotation direction, the engagement protrusion 205C engages with the engagement protrusion 207A. Thereafter, when the eyeball member 205 further rotates leftward, the right eye corner member 207 moves leftward together with the eyeball member 205.

  As shown in FIG. 10, a projecting plate 208 is provided on the back surface of the centerpiece member 205, and the projecting plate 208 projects rearward from the backside of the centerpiece member 205. On the upper surface of the protruding plate 208, three bosses 208A (only the central boss 208A is shown in FIG. 10) are erected.

  A bush 209A is rotatably attached to the boss 208A with respect to the boss 208A. The bush 209A is secured to the boss 208A by a screw 209C via a washer 209B.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the upper base 202 includes a base body 210 extending in the left-right direction, and a semicircular portion 211 protruding forward from the base body 210. A guide groove 210A extending in the left-right direction is formed in the base body 210, and a rack member 212 is inserted into the guide groove 210A movably in the left-right direction.

  A rack tooth 212A is formed at the right end of the rack member 212, and the relay gear 213 meshes with the rack tooth 212A. The relay gear 213 is rotatably supported by the base body 210, and the relay gear 213 meshes with the output gear 214 </ b> A of the motor 214. The motor 214 is driven by the rotating accessory control board 78.

  The motor 214 is supported by the base body 210 and rotates the output gear 214A. When the output gear 214A rotates forward and backward, the rack member 212 reciprocates in the left-right direction via the relay gear 213.

  A guide piece 212B is provided on the rack member 212, and the guide piece 212B protrudes forward from the rack member 212. An elongated hole 212b extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the guide piece 212B. A bush 209A attached to the boss 208A located at the center of the three bosses 208A formed on the upper surface of the protruding plate 208 is slidably fitted in the elongated hole 212b.

  The semicircular portion 211 has a guide groove 211A that is curved in the same direction as the rotation direction of the eyeball member 205, in other words, the direction along the arc surface 205A. The three bushes 209A described above are slidably fitted in the guide grooves 211A. The central bush 209A of the three bushes 209A is further fitted into the elongated hole 212b through the guide groove 211A.

  Thereby, when the rack member 212 moves in the left-right direction, the center bush 209A moves along the guide groove 211A while moving in the long hole 212b in the front-rear direction, so that the eyeball member 205 moves in the left-right direction. Rotate.

  Engagement pieces 206 </ b> B and 207 </ b> B are formed on the upper left and right outer corner members 206 and 207, respectively. As shown in FIGS. 7 and 11 to 13, guide grooves 210B and 210C are formed in the base body 210, and the guide grooves 210B and 210C extend in the same direction as the rotation direction of the eyeball member 205. I have. The engagement pieces 206B and 207B are engaged with the guide grooves 210B and 210C, respectively, and the left and right outer corner members 206 and 207 are guided by the guide grooves 210B and 210C, and rotate in the left and right direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 14 to 16, guide grooves 204 </ b> A and 204 </ b> B are formed in the lower base 204, and the guide grooves 204 </ b> A and 204 </ b> B extend in the same direction as the rotation direction of the eyeball member 205. are doing.

  A pair of bushes 215A, 215B are rotatably provided below the left outer corner member 206, and the bushes 215A, 215B are slidably fitted in the guide grooves 204A. A pair of bushes 215C and 215D are rotatably provided below the right outer corner member 207, and the bushes 215C and 215D are slidably fitted in the guide grooves 204B.

  Thereby, the engagement pieces 206B and 207B are guided by the guide grooves 210B and 210C of the upper base 202, and the bushes 215A, 215B, 215C and 215D are guided by the guide grooves 204A and 204B of the lower base 204. The left outer corner member 206 and the right outer corner member 207 are stably moved in the rotation direction of the eyeball member 205.

  7 and 8, a left outer corner member 216 and a right outer corner member 217 are fixed to the lower base 204. The left and right eye corner members 216 and 217 are located in front of the movable left and right eye corner members 206 and 207, and the left and right eye corner members 206 and the right eye corner member 207 are in a state where the eyeball member 205 is located at the neutral position. Is partially covered from the front. The state in which the eyeball member 205 is located at the neutral position is a state in which the image 205a imitating the eyeball of the eyeball member 205 faces the front as shown in FIGS. 8, 11, and 14.

  When the eyeball member 205 is located at the neutral position, the left eye corner member 216 covers the left half of the left eye corner member 206. On the other hand, the right half of the left outer corner member 206 is not covered with the left outer corner member 216 and is visible from the front. The right eye corner member 217 covers the right half of the right eye corner member 207. On the other hand, the left half of the right eye corner member 207 is not covered by the right eye corner member 217, and is visible from the front.

  7 and 14, one end of a wire 218 is attached to a bush 215A of the left outer corner member 206, and the other end of the wire 218 is attached to one end of a coil spring 219. The other end of the coil spring 219 is attached to the lower base 204, and the coil spring 219 urges the left outer corner member 206 in the left direction, which is the other direction of rotation of the eyeball member 205.

  A pulley 220 is provided between the coil spring 219 and the left outer corner member 206, and the pulley 220 slidably contacts the wire 218, and the coil spring 219 is moved laterally with respect to one end of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction. The wire 218 is bent so as to be positioned on the left side).

  One end of a wire 221 is attached to the bush 215C of the right outer corner member 207, and the other end of the wire 221 is attached to one end of a coil spring 222. The other end of the coil spring 222 is attached to the lower base 204, and the coil spring 222 urges the right eye corner member 207 in the right direction, which is one direction in which the eyeball member 205 rotates.

  A pulley 223 is provided between the coil spring 222 and the right outer corner member 207. The pulley 223 is in sliding contact with the wire 221, and the coil spring 222 is positioned laterally with respect to one end of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction. The wire 221 is bent so as to be positioned on the right side.

  Here, the rotating accessory 200 is provided with an LED board (not shown) provided with a plurality of LEDs (not shown), and the LED board is provided behind the eyeball member 205. The centerpiece member 205 is illuminated from behind by the LED, and the light illuminated on the centerpiece member 205 is applied to the front of the pachislot 1 through the lens 199.

  In the rotating accessory 200 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, when the output gear 214 </ b> A rotates counterclockwise by the motor 214 from the state where the eyeball member 205 is located at the neutral position, via the relay gear 213. The rack member 212 moves rightward. At this time, as shown in FIG. 12, the central bush 209A (see FIG. 7) fitted into the elongated hole 212b is pressed rightward by the guide piece 212B.

  Since the three bushes 209A are slidably fitted in the guide grooves 211A formed in the semicircular portion 211, when the center bush 209A is pressed rightward by the guide pieces 212B, the eyeball member 205 is displaced. And rotates rightward along the guide groove 211A via the three bushes 209A.

  The guide groove 211A is curved in the same direction as the rotation direction of the eyeball member 205, and the three bushes 209A move rightward along the curved guide groove 211A. The central bush 209A is slidably fitted in the elongated hole 212b of the guide piece 212B of the rack member 212. Since the elongated hole 212b extends along the front-rear direction of the pachislot 1, three bushes 209A are provided. When the bush 209A moves rightward along the guide groove 211A, the center bush 209A slides back and forth along the elongated hole 212b, so that the eyeball member 205 rotates smoothly along the guide groove 211A. .

  When the eyeball member 205 moves rightward, the engagement protrusion 206A of the left eye corner member 206 is engaged with the engagement protrusion 205B formed at one end of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction (FIGS. 12 and 13). Reference), behind the centerpiece member 205, the left eye corner member 206 moves rightward together with the centerpiece member 205 while overlapping with one end of the centerpiece member 205 in the extending direction.

  When the left outer corner member 206 moves rightward, the wire 218 pulls the coil spring 219 from the moment the engagement protrusion 205B engages with the engagement protrusion 206A (the state of FIG. 15), as shown in FIG. The coil spring 219 expands and urges the left outer corner member 206 to the left.

  Since the engagement protrusion 206A of the left eye corner member 206 is located inside the extending direction of the eye member 205 with respect to the engagement projection 205B of the eye member 205, the left eye corner member 206 moves rightward together with the eye member 205. Even if it moves, the left eye corner member 206 is not pulled back by the coil spring 219 to the left. In this way, the centerpiece member 205 moves rightward. 9, 13, and 14 show a state in which the eyeball member 205 has moved to the maximum rightward movement position.

  When the output gear 214A rotates clockwise by the motor 214 from the state where the eyeball member 205 has moved to the maximum movement position in the right direction, the rack member 212 moves leftward via the relay gear 213. At this time, the center bush 209A (see FIG. 7) is pressed leftward by the guide piece 212B.

  When the center bush 209A is pressed leftward by the guide piece 212B, the eyeball member 205 rotates leftward along the guide groove 211A via the three bushes 209A. When the eyeball member 205 rotates leftward toward the neutral position, the left eye corner member 206 is moved leftward together with the eyeball member 205 by being pulled by the coil spring 219. When the eyeball member 205 rotates from the maximum rightward movement position to the neutral position, the left eye corner member 206 returns to the initial position. 13 (FIG. 16), FIG. 12 (FIG. 15), and FIG. 11 (FIG. 14) show the state in which the eyeball member 205 moves from the right to the neutral position.

  When the output gear 214A is rotated clockwise by the motor 214 from the state where the eyeball member 205 is at the neutral position, the rack member 212 moves leftward via the relay gear 213. At this time, the central bush 209A (see FIG. 7) fitted into the elongated hole 212b is pressed leftward by the guide piece 212B.

  When the center bush 209A is pressed leftward by the guide piece 212B, the eyeball member 205 rotates leftward along the guide groove 211A via the three bushes 209A.

  When the three bushes 209A move leftward along the guide groove 211A, the center bush 209A slides forward and backward along the elongated hole 212b, so that the centerpiece member 205 smoothly moves along the guide groove 211A. Rotate.

  When the eye member 205 moves in the left direction, the engaging protrusion 207A of the right eye corner member 207 engages with the engaging protrusion 205C formed at the other end of the eye member 205 in the extending direction, so that the eye member The rear right eye corner member 207 moves leftward together with the eyeball member 205 while overlapping the other end of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction.

  When the right outer corner member 207 moves in the left direction, the wire 221 pulls the coil spring 222 so that the coil spring 222 expands and urges the right outer corner member 207 rightward. Since the engagement protrusion 207A of the right eye corner member 207 is located inside the extending direction of the eye member 205 with respect to the engagement projection 205C of the eye member 205, the right eye corner member 207 moves leftward together with the eye member 205. Even if it moves, the right outer corner member 207 is not pulled back by the coil spring 222 to the right. In this way, the centerpiece member 205 moves to the left.

  When the output gear 214A rotates counterclockwise by the motor 214 from the state where the eyeball member 205 has moved to the maximum movement position in the left direction, the rack member 212 moves rightward via the relay gear 213. At this time, the center bush 209A (see FIG. 7) is pressed rightward by the guide piece 212B.

  When the central bush 209A is pressed rightward by the guide piece 212B, the eyeball member 205 rotates rightward along the guide groove 211A via the three bushes 209A. When the eyeball member 205 rotates rightward toward the neutral position, the right eye corner member 207 is moved rightward together with the eyeball member 205 by being pulled by the coil spring 219. When the eyeball member 205 rotates from the leftmost maximum movement position to the neutral position, the right eye corner member 207 returns to the initial position.

  In this way, by rotating the center member 205 between the right and left directions via the neutral position, it is possible to perform an effect as if the center member moves in the left-right direction.

[Main-side game state transition flow]
Next, a game state controlled by the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) of the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment and a transition flow thereof will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 manages the gaming state based on the presence / absence of winning / operation of a bonus, the type of an internal winning combination related to replay, and the winning probability. As shown in FIG. 17, the main control circuit 91 distinguishes a bonus non-winning state, an inter-flag state, and a bonus state based on whether a bonus (BB) has been won / operated. Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus is not won and the bonus is not activated, and the state between the flags is a state in which the bonus is won and the bonus is not activated. Is a state in which the bonus is activated.

  In addition, the main control circuit 91 provides six types of states from the RT0 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state in which the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay and the winning probability thereof are different from each other. Note that the RT0 gaming state and the RT2 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that a combination relating to replay is determined as an internal winning combination has a low probability. In the RT3 gaming state and the RT5 gaming state, the combination relating to replay is an internal winning combination. Is a game state in which the probability determined as is the medium probability. In addition, the RT4 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that a combination relating to replay is determined as an internal winning combination has a high probability, and is the most advantageous gaming state among bonus non-winning states.

  The main control circuit 91 determines a non-winning state, an inter-flag state, and a bonus state, which are distinguished based on the presence / absence of winning / operation of a bonus, and an RT0 game, which is distinguished based on the type of an internal winning combination related to replay and its winning probability. From the state to the RT5 gaming state, the main pachislot 1 gaming state is managed. More specifically, the main control circuit 91 determines the gaming state in the pachislot 1 as a bonus non-winning state RT0 gaming state, a bonus non-winning state RT1 gaming state, a bonus non-winning state RT2 gaming state, and a bonus non-winning state. RT3 gaming state, RT4 gaming state in bonus non-winning state, RT5 gaming state in flag state, RT0 gaming state in bonus state, RT2 gaming state in bonus state, RT4 gaming state in bonus state, and RB gaming state in bonus state Are managed.

  Whether or not a bonus is won is managed based on data stored in an internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 59 described later) provided in the main RAM 95. For example, if data 1 is stored in bit 2 of the internal winning combination storing area 4, it means that a bonus has been won. In addition, whether or not the bonus is activated and the RT gaming state are managed based on data stored in a gaming state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 95 (see FIG. 62 described later). For example, when data 1 is stored in bit 3 and bit 5 of the gaming state flag storage area, it means that the bonus (BB gaming state) is activated and the game is in the RT4 gaming state.

  RT0 gaming state in a bonus non-winning state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and data of all bits of the gaming state flag storing area are 0) Is one of the basic gaming states in the bonus non-winning state. As shown in FIG. 17, from the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, and the inter-flag state. There is a possibility of transition to the RT5 gaming state.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the RT0 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, when the symbol combination relating to (1) Bell spilled eyes or RT1 transition lip is displayed, the bonus is not won. To the RT1 gaming state. Note that the spilled bell is a combination of symbols displayed when an incorrect answer is determined in the pressing order determined for each type of the pressing order bell when a pressing order bell described later is determined as an internal winning combination. The RT1 transition lip is a combination of symbols displayed when an incorrect answer is determined in the pressing order determined for each type of the pressing order lip when the pressing order lip described later is determined as the internal winning combination.

  Further, in the RT0 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, when a symbol combination relating to (2) RT4 transition lip is displayed, the game shifts to the RT4 gaming state in which the bonus is not won. Note that the RT4 transition lip is a combination of symbols displayed when the correct answer is determined in the pressing order determined for each type of the pressing order lip when the later-described pressing order lip is determined as the internal winning combination, or described later. This is a combination of symbols displayed when “F_Chance Slip 2” or “F_Chance Slip 2” is determined as the internal winning combination.

  Further, in the RT0 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, when a symbol combination relating to (3) RT3 transition lip is displayed, the game shifts to the RT3 gaming state in which the bonus is not won. The RT3 transition lip is a combination of symbols displayed when “F_chance lip 1” or “F_cherry lip” described later is determined as an internal winning combination.

  Further, in the RT0 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, if the combination relating to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the game shifts to the RT5 gaming state in the flag state. The role related to BB is any of “F_black / black / black”, “F_red / red / red”, “F_white / white / white”, “F_red / red / white”, and “F_white / white / red”. When the combination of these BBs is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination is carried over as an internal winning combination until the combination of the corresponding symbols is displayed (that is, until the operation of the BB starts), so-called carryover. It is a role.

  Subsequently, the RT1 gaming state in which the bonus is not won (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storage area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storage area 5 are 0, and data of bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area is 0) 1) is one of the basic gaming states during the bonus non-winning state. As shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility that a transition from a non-bonus winning state RT1 gaming state to a bonus non-winning state RT0 gaming state and an inter-flag state RT5 gaming state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the RT1 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, (4) when the number of fixed games (five games in the present embodiment) elapses, the RT0 gaming in which the bonus is not won. Transition to the state. Further, in the RT1 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, if the combination related to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the game shifts to the RT5 gaming state in the flag state.

  Further, the RT2 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and data of bit 1 of the gaming state flag storing area is 0) 1) is a gaming state in which the state may shift after the operation of the BB is completed. In the present embodiment, at the end of the bonus, the game shifts to the bonus non-winning state while the RT gaming state in the bonus state is maintained. Therefore, the RT2 gaming state in the non-bonus winning state shifts when the bonus state ends in the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state. Also, as shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility that a transition from a non-bonus winning state RT2 gaming state to a bonus non-winning state RT1 gaming state and an inter-flag state RT5 gaming state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the RT2 gaming state in the non-bonus winning state, when (1) a combination of symbols related to the bell spilling is displayed, the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state is displayed. Move to Also, in the RT2 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, if the combination related to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the game shifts to the RT5 gaming state in the flag state.

  Further, the RT3 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and data of bit 2 of the gaming state flag storing area is 0) 1) is a gaming state in which the combination relating to replay is more likely to be determined as an internal winning combination than the RT0 gaming state, which is the basic gaming state of the pachislot 1. As shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility that a transition from the non-bonus winning state RT3 gaming state to a bonus non-winning state RT0 gaming state and an inter-flag state RT5 gaming state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the RT3 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, (4) when the fixed game number (five games in the present embodiment) elapses, the RT0 gaming in the bonus non-winning state is performed. Transition to the state. Further, in the RT3 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, if the combination related to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the game shifts to the RT5 gaming state in the flag state.

  Also, the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and data of bit 3 of the gaming state flag storing area is 0) 1) is an advantageous state in which a combination related to replay is most likely to be determined as an internal winning combination, and a game can be played without reducing medals. As shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility that a transition from the non-bonus winning state RT4 gaming state to a bonus non-winning state RT1 gaming state and an inter-flag state RT5 gaming state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, in the non-bonus winning state of the RT4 gaming state, when (1) a combination of symbols related to the bell spilled eyes or the RT1 transition lip is displayed, the bonus non-winning state is displayed. To the RT1 gaming state. Also, in the RT4 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, if the combination related to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the game shifts to the RT5 gaming state in the flag state.

  Further, the RT5 gaming state of the flag-to-flag state (any one of the bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and the bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 is 1 and the bit 4 of the gaming state storing area 4) The data 1) is a so-called BB flag in which a hand associated with BB is carried over as an internal winning combination, and is a game in which a combination of symbols according to the BB carried over as an internal winning combination is displayed. State. As shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility that a transition from the RT5 gaming state in the flag state to the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the RT5 gaming state between the flags, (6) a combination of symbols corresponding to the BB being carried over is displayed, and when the BB is activated, the RT0 in the bonus state is displayed. Transition to the gaming state.

  The RT0 gaming state of the bonus state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and data of bit 5 of the gaming state flag storing area is 1) When BB is activated, it is a game state where the player stays first. During the bonus state, the game starts from the RT0 gaming state of the bonus state and shifts to another gaming state. As shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility that a transition from the bonus state RT0 gaming state to a bonus non-winning state RT0 gaming state and a bonus state RT4 gaming state.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the bonus RT0 gaming state, when the operation of (10) BB is completed, a transition is made to the bonus non-winning RT0 gaming state (before and after the bonus ends). The RT gaming state is maintained). The operation of the BB ends when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state exceeds 59.

  In the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, if the combination related to (7) JACIN is determined as the internal winning combination, the game shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state. The role related to JACIN is any of “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3” described later. Here, as shown in FIG. 37 described later, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, there is a high probability that the combination relating to JACIN is determined as the internal winning combination (about 52%), so that basically the BB operation is not performed. Before the end, the combination related to JACIN is determined as an internal winning combination, and the game shifts to the bonus state RT4 gaming state. When the combination related to JACIN is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination as the internal winning combination is displayed until the combination of the corresponding symbols is displayed (that is, until the start of the RB operation). This is the so-called carryover role that is carried over.

  In the RT4 gaming state of the bonus state (the data of bits 1 to 3 in the internal winning combination storing area 5 is 0 and the data of bits 3 and 5 in the gaming state flag storing area are 1), the combination related to JACIN is performed. This is between so-called RB flags in the bonus state that are carried over as internal winning combinations. As shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility that a transition from the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state to the RT4 gaming state in the non-bonus winning state and the RB gaming state in the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the bonus RT4 gaming state, when the operation of (10) BB is completed, the game shifts to the bonus non-winning RT4 gaming state (before and after the bonus ends). The RT gaming state is maintained). In the bonus RT4 gaming state, (8) a combination of symbols corresponding to the carried JACIN is displayed, and when the RB is activated, the game shifts to the bonus RB gaming state.

  Also, the RB gaming state of the bonus state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bits 0 to 3 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and bits 5 and 6 of the gaming state flag storing area are 0). The data 1) is a gaming state to which the game shifts when the RB operation starts during the bonus state. Note that, as shown in FIG. 33 to be described later, in the RB gaming state in the bonus state, the probability that “losing” is determined as an internal winning combination is high (about 65%), which is basically disadvantageous. In the pachislot 1 in the form, during the bonus state, the game is played while the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state is maintained without displaying a combination of symbols according to the carried JACIN.

  As shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility that a transition from the RB gaming state in the bonus state to the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, when the operation of (10) BB is completed in the RB gaming state in the bonus state, the state shifts to the RT2 gaming state in the non-bonus winning state. In the RB gaming state in the bonus state, when the operation of (9) RB ends, the game shifts to the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state. In the RB operation, a symbol combination other than “losing” is displayed eight times in the RB gaming state in the bonus state (eight wins), and 12 games are performed in the RB gaming state in the bonus state. Or that the operation of the BB ends, the operation ends.

  In addition, the RT2 gaming state of the bonus state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bits 0 to 3 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and bit 1 and bit 5 of the gaming state flag storing area are set). The data of 1) is a gaming state which shifts after the RB gaming state in the bonus state. As shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility that a transition from the bonus state RT2 gaming state to a bonus non-winning state RT2 gaming state and a bonus state RT4 gaming state. More specifically, in the bonus RT2 gaming state, when the operation of (10) BB is completed, a transition is made to the non-bonus winning RT2 gaming state (the RT gaming state is maintained before and after the bonus ends). Also, in the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state, if the combination relating to (7) JACIN is determined as the internal winning combination, the game shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes the RT control means and, based on the determined internal winning combination, the RT gaming state between the RT0 gaming state and the RT5 gaming state in accordance with each transition condition. Migrate.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Symbol arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 19 represents, by data, an arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the center reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 21 symbol positions “0” to “20” and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

  The symbol positions "0" to "20" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction on each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions "0" to "20" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  The types of symbols are “white 7”, “red 7”, “BAR”, “lip 1”, “lip 2”, “lip 3”, “cherry 1”, “cherry 2”, “watermelon”, and “watermelon”. Bell ".

  The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 19 allocates a symbol located in the middle of the display window 4 when the reel index is detected (a symbol passing through the middle of the display window 4) to the symbol position "0" and the reel 3L. , 3C, and 3R, in the order in which the symbols move in the rotation direction, symbol positions "0" to "20" are assigned to each of the 21 symbols.

  Thus, by using the middle of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of the symbol located in the middle of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Symbol code table>
As shown in FIG. 19, each symbol arranged on each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table, and is distinguished by 1-byte (8-bit) data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 19 indicates codes for specifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  The symbols used in the pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment are “white 7”, “red 7”, “BAR”, “lip 1”, “lip 2”, “lip 3”, “cherry 1”, There are 10 types, "Cherry 2", "Watermelon" and "Bell".

  In the symbol code table, “00000001” is assigned as data to the “white 7” symbol (symbol code 1). “00000010” is assigned as data to the “red 7” symbol (symbol code 2). “0000011” is assigned as data to the “BAR” symbol (symbol code 3).

  Similarly, for each of the "Lip 1", "Lip 2", "Lip 3", "Cherry 1", "Cherry 2", "Watermelon" and "Bell" symbols (symbol codes 4 to 10), “00000100” to “000001010” are assigned as data.

<Symbol combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table includes a symbol combination (combination) determined in advance according to the type of privilege, data to be stored in the main RAM 95 when the symbol combination is displayed, and when the symbol combination is displayed. (The number of medals to be paid out).

  In the present embodiment, when the combination of the symbols displayed on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R along the pay line matches the symbol combination (combination) specified in the symbol combination table. Is determined. Then, when it is determined that a winning is achieved, a bonus such as payout of a medal, operation of a re-game, or operation of a bonus game is given to the player. If the combination of the symbols displayed along the winning line does not match any of the combinations of the symbols defined in the symbol combination table, the result is a so-called “losing”. That is, in the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to “losing” is not defined in the symbol combination table, thereby defining the combination of symbols of “losing”. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the "losing" item may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define the "losing".

  In the data column in the symbol combination table, information for identifying the symbol combination displayed along the pay line is defined. Specifically, in the data column, a “storage area (data for specifying a display combination storage area (see FIG. 61) described later)” in which data of a corresponding symbol combination is stored, and The "data (data for designating a bit corresponding to a combination of symbols in one-byte data)" to be stored is defined. In the present embodiment, the combination of each symbol is determined by using 45 1-byte storage areas. For example, “R_RT transition point A_01” illustrated in FIG. 20 is determined by storing 1 in bit 0 of the display combination storage area 1.

  The combination defined in the symbol combination table means a symbol combination of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the pay line when each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. For each combination, a combination name is defined according to the role of the combination and the type of the symbol constituting the combination.

  The payout number specified in the symbol combination table specifies the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding symbol combination (combination) is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 30, when the combination “C_CD bell” is displayed, ten medals will be paid out.

  In the present embodiment, combinations of a large number of symbols shown in FIGS. 20 to 32 are classified into a plurality of types according to their roles. The role type field in the symbol combination table defines the role of each symbol combination. More specifically, in this embodiment, a large number of symbol combinations are classified into six types of “RT transition eye”, “BB”, “JACIN”, “re-game”, “RT transition re-game”, and “winning”.

  The role type “RT transition point” is a symbol combination (combination) in which the RT game state transitions when displayed, and corresponds to “R_RT transition point A_01” to “R_RT transition point F_08” shown in FIG. . These "RT transition eyes" are combinations of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect in the pushing order determined for each type of the pushing order bell, and are the above-mentioned "bell spilling eyes". That is, if the pressing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination and the answer is incorrect in the pressing order, there is a possibility that any of the symbol combinations corresponding to the combination type “RT transition” is displayed. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the role type “RT transition eye” is displayed, there is a possibility of transition to the RT1 gaming state.

  The role type “BB” is a symbol combination (combination) in which the BB is activated when displayed, and corresponds to “C_BB1” to “C_BB5_02” shown in FIG. When the symbol combination corresponding to the role type “BB” is displayed, the operation of the BB starts and the game shifts to the RT0 gaming state.

  The role type "JACIN" is a symbol combination (combination) in which the RB is activated when displayed, and corresponds to "C_JACIN1" to "C_JACIN3" shown in FIG. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the role type “JACIN” is displayed, the operation of the RB starts, and after the operation of the RB is completed, the state shifts to the RT2 game state.

  The role type “re-game” is a symbol combination (combination) in which the re-game is performed when displayed, and corresponds to “C_CU white” to “C_KY lip_09” shown in FIG. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the role type “re-game” is displayed, the re-game is performed. Note that when the combination of symbols corresponding to the role type “re-game” is displayed, the RT game state is not shifted.

  The role type “RT shift replay” is a combination (combination) of symbols that, when displayed, may cause a shift in the RT game state along with the operation of the replay, and may be referred to as a “C_CU lip” shown in FIGS. — 01 ”to“ C_Sui FKF — 18 ”. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the role type “RT shift replay” is displayed, the replay operation is performed, and there is a possibility that the game may shift to various RT gaming states according to the combination of symbols.

  For example, when “C_CU lip — 01” to “C_CU lip — 03” shown in FIG. 22 are displayed, there is a possibility of transition to the RT1 gaming state. These “C_CU lip — 01” to “C_CU lip — 03” are combinations of symbols that are likely to be displayed when there is an incorrect answer in the push order determined for each type of push order rip, and are described in “RT1 Migration lip ". That is, if the push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination and the answer is incorrect, any one of “C_CU lip — 01” to “C_CU lip — 03” will be displayed.

  Further, when “C_C Lip 01” to “C_Bell FKC_12” shown in FIGS. 22 to 24 are displayed, there is a possibility that the game mode shifts to the RT4 gaming state. These “C_C lip 01” to “C_bell FKC_12” are the above-mentioned “RT4 transition lip”. More specifically, the above-described pressing order lip is determined as the internal winning combination, and when the pressing order is correct, any one of “C_CU lip — 01” to “C_CU lip — 03” is displayed. When the above-mentioned “F_Chance Lip 2” or “F_Slip Chance Lip 2” is determined as the internal winning combination, any one of “C_C Lip 01” to “C_Bell FKC_12” is displayed regardless of the pressing order. Will be.

  Also, when “C_CD Chelip A_01” to “C_Sui FKF_18” shown in FIGS. 25 to 28 are displayed, there is a possibility that the game may shift to the RT3 gaming state. These “C_CD Chelip A_01” to “C_Sui FKF_18” are the aforementioned “RT3 transition lip”. More specifically, when the above-mentioned “F_slip chance lip 1” or “F_cherry lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, one of “C_CD chelip A_01” to “C_sui FKF_18” regardless of the pressing order. Will be displayed.

  The role type “winning” is a combination of symbols in which medals are paid out when displayed, and corresponds to “C_CD watermelon” to “C_B bell BB_04” shown in FIGS. 29 to 32. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the role type "winning" is displayed, the number of medals specified in the number-of-payouts column of the symbol combination table is paid out. When the symbol combination corresponding to the role type “winning” is displayed, the transition of the RT gaming state is not performed.

  “C_CD bell” illustrated in FIG. 30 is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct in the pressing order determined for each type of the pressing order bell described above. In addition, among the combinations of symbols corresponding to the role type "winning", the combination of symbols of the payout number "3" is displayed when the answer is incorrect in the pushing order determined for each type of the pushing order bell described above. This is a possible combination of symbols. That is, when the answer is incorrect in the pushing order determined for each type of the pushing order bell, the combination of the symbols of the number of payouts “3” out of the combinations of the symbols corresponding to the role type “winning” or the role type “RT shift” The combination of the symbols corresponding to the "eyes" will be displayed. In the case of the pachislot 1, there are six possible pushing orders for the stop operation. Therefore, a symbol combination to be displayed when the answer is incorrect is set arbitrarily from the five pushing orders of the incorrect answer. be able to.

<Internal lottery table>
Next, an internal lottery table referred to when determining an internal winning combination will be described with reference to FIGS. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state, and defines information of a lottery value for a data pointer corresponding to a winning combination. In the above-described bonus non-winning state of the RT0 gaming state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value specified in the “RT0” column of the internal lottery table. In the winning state of the RT4 gaming state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery values defined in the “RT1” to “RT4” columns of the internal lottery table. In the RT5 gaming state between flags, the internal winning combination is determined using a lottery value specified in the “RT5” column of the internal lottery table. In the bonus state RT0 gaming state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value specified in the “BB (RT0)” column of the internal lottery table, and similarly, the bonus state RT4 gaming state or the bonus state. In the RT2 gaming state of the state, the internal winning combination is determined using a lottery value specified in the “BB (RT4)” or “BB (RT2)” column of the internal lottery table, and the RB gaming state of the bonus state In the internal lottery table, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value specified in the “BB (RB)” column of the internal lottery table.

  In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of winning combination and the winning probability related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination change according to the type of the RT gaming state, and the presence or absence of the bonus (BB or RB) is determined. Therefore, the type of winning combination (other than replay and carryover combination) determined as the internal winning combination and the winning probability change.

  The data pointer is data obtained as a result of the lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and is data used to determine the storage area type and 1-byte data. As the data pointer, a small combination / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are individually defined corresponding to each of a plurality of winning numbers.

  In the present embodiment, the random number for lottery extracted from a predetermined numerical value range “0 to 65535” is sequentially subtracted by a lottery value corresponding to each winning combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative The internal lottery is performed by making a determination (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred).

  Therefore, the larger the value specified as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data (that is, the data pointer) to which the value is assigned is determined. That is, the winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (65536)”.

<Comparison table of internal winning combinations and symbol combinations>
FIG. 38 to FIG. 56 are comparison tables showing the correspondence between the combinations (combinations) of symbols that can be displayed on the winning line in each internal winning combination. A circle in each correspondence table indicates a combination (combination) of symbols that can be displayed on a winning line in a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. It should be noted that in the winning combination, combinations of symbols that cannot be displayed on the winning line are not shown in the correspondence table (for example, in the winning combination “F_black-black-black” shown in FIG. Since the combination of the symbols shown in (1) cannot be displayed, the illustration of the correspondence table is omitted).

  Referring to FIG. 38, for example, when the winning combination “F_black-black-black” is the internal winning combination, the combination of the symbols of the combination name “C_BB1” can be stopped and displayed on the winning line. Referring to FIG. 21, the combination name “C_BB1” is a combination of symbols in which “BAR-BAR-BAR” is displayed along the pay line. Note that the case where the winning combination is “losing” is not defined in the correspondence table shown in the same figure, but this is the case of all combinations of symbols defined by the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. Indicates that the display of is not allowed.

  In the pachislo 1, the main control circuit 91 changes the stop control according to the internal winning combination and the gaming state, and when the predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control circuit 91 sets the corresponding relationship shown in FIGS. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped so that a combination of symbols can be displayed. In the correspondence tables shown in FIGS. 38 to 56, all combinations of symbols that may be displayed when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination are listed. Since the control is different not only according to the internal winning combination but also according to the current gaming state, a combination of symbols with circles corresponding to the winning combination may not be displayed depending on the gaming state.

<Overview of winning combinations>
This point will be described in detail with reference to the outline of the winning combination shown in FIGS. 57 and 58. As shown in FIG. 57, when “losing” is determined as the internal winning combination, display of all symbol combinations specified by the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 20 to 32 is not permitted. Note that, in the RT4 gaming state in which the probability of determining the replay-related hand as the internal winning combination is high, the probability that “losing” is determined as the internal winning hand decreases as the winning probability of the replay-related hand increases. Therefore, in the following, "losing" in the RT4 gaming state may be used as a rare combination (handled as "so-called pure missing").

  If any of “F_black-black-black”, “F_red-red-red”, “F_white-white-white”, “F_red-red-white”, and “F_white-white-red” is determined as the internal winning combination, Display of a combination of symbols having a relationship is permitted. If any of “F_black / black / black”, “F_red / red / red”, “F_white / white / white”, “F_red / red / white”, and “F_white / white / red” is determined as the internal winning combination, as described above, The gaming state is an inter-flag state of RT5 gaming.

  In addition, when one of “F_maintenance lip 1” and “F_maintenance lip 2” is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the symbol combination having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 39 to 43 is permitted. In addition, even if the combination of the corresponding symbols is displayed for “F_maintenance lip 1” and “F_maintenance lip 2”, the RT game state is not shifted.

  Further, “F_123 lip” to “F_2nd lip” are the above-described pressing order lip. When any of these pressing order rips is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence shown in FIGS. The display of the combination of the possessed symbols is permitted. More specifically, when the push order determined for each type of the push order lip is correct, the above-described RT4 shift lip (FIG. 22 to FIG. 22) of the symbol combinations having the correspondence shown in FIGS. The display of the symbol combination according to FIG. 24 is permitted, and when the answer is incorrect in the order of the pressing, the RT1 transition lip (see FIG. 22) of the symbol combination having the correspondence shown in FIGS. ) Is allowed to be displayed.

  The name of the winning combination as the pressing order lip is determined based on the correct pressing order. For example, “1” named “F_123 Lip” indicates that the stop operation is “left”, “2” indicates that the stop operation is “middle”, and “3” indicates that the stop operation is “right”. ". Then, “123” indicates the correct pushing order. In the case of “F_123 Lip”, the first stop operation is “left”, the second stop operation is “medium”, and the third stop operation is “right”. Indicates that the answer is correct, and other push orders result in an incorrect answer. Similarly, in the case of “F_231 Lip”, the answer is correct when the first stop operation is “middle”, the second stop operation is “right”, and the third stop operation is “left”, and in the other pressing order. Is incorrect. “F_2nd lip” indicates that the answer is correct when the first stop operation is “middle”, and that the answer is incorrect when the pressing order is other than that.

  Returning to FIG. 57, “F_123 upper 7-ten” to “F_2nd 7 crosses” are winning combinations with different stop controls depending on the gaming state as well as the internal winning combinations. More specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_123 upper 7-ten” to “F_2nd cross 7 assortment” are the above-described pressing order lip, and when the pressing order is correct, the correspondence shown in FIGS. The display of the combination of the symbols according to the above-mentioned RT4 shift lip (see FIGS. 22 to 24) among the combinations of the symbols having the following is permitted, and when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing, the correspondence shown in FIGS. Display of a symbol combination corresponding to the above-described RT1 transition lip (see FIG. 22) among the symbol combinations possessed is permitted.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, “F_123 upper 7 ten” to “F_2nd 7 cross” are “F_123 upper 7 ten” of the combinations of the combination names “C_CU white” to “C_B white — 02” shown in FIG. "To" F_2nd cross 7 alignment "are permitted to be displayed. Here, the combination of the symbols of the combination names “C_CU white” to “C_B white — 02” is a pseudo line other than the winning line among the lines connecting the upper, middle, and lower stages of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R in a straight line. This is a combination of symbols in which three or two "white 7" symbols or "red 7" symbols are displayed on the line. In the following, a combination of symbols in which either the "white 7" symbol or the "red 7" symbol is displayed may be referred to as a "seven lip", and the "white 7" symbol or the "red 7" symbol. A combination of symbols in which any two of the symbols are displayed may be referred to as a “7-flip”. Of the combination names “C_CU white” to “C_B white — 02”, the combination of the symbols without “FK (fake)” in the combination name is “7-set lip”, and the combination name is “FK (fake)”. The combination of the symbols with "7" is "Rip 7". Lines connecting the upper, middle, and lower sections of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R in a straight line are a top line connecting the upper sections, a center line connecting the middle sections, a bottom line connecting the lower sections, a cross-down line connecting the lower right, and There are five types of cross-up lines that connect to the upper right, but the winning line is a cross-down line, so “7 Aligned Lips” or “7-Fan Lips” are four pseudo lines other than the cross-down line. Along with either one of the three “white 7” or “red 7” symbols.

  Referring to the correspondence shown in FIG. 39, in the bonus state, “F_123 upper 7-ten” and “F_132 lower 7-ten” are permitted to display “7-flip”. Also, in the bonus state, the display of “7 sets of lip” is permitted for “F_312 upper 7 sets” to “F_2nd cross 7 sets”.

  Further, “F_J1 upper 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower 7 lip”, and “F_J1 cross 7 lip” are not only internal wins, but also wins with different stop controls depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_J1 upper 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower 7 lip”, and “F_J1 cross 7 lip” are the above-described RT4 transition lip regardless of the pressing order (see FIGS. 22 to 24). ) Is allowed to be displayed. Note that, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_J1 upper 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower 7 lip” and “F_J1 cross 7 lip” are determined as internal winning combinations only in the RT4 gaming state. , "F_J1 upper 7 lip", "F_J1 lower 7 lip" and "F_J1 cross 7 lip" are determined as internal winning combinations, the RT4 gaming state is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, the stop control of “F_J1 upper 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower 7 lip” and “F_J1 cross 7 lip” has different stop control depending on the type of the JACIN role carried over as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the bonus state, when “F_JACIN1” is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, one of “F_J1 upper 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower 7 lip” or “F_J1 cross 7 lip” and “F_JACIN1” ) Are determined as internal winning combinations), “F_J1 upper 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower 7 lip” and “F_J1 cross 7 lip” are “7 matching rips” other than the cross down line. Along either of the four pseudo lines, three "white 7" symbols or "red 7" symbols are displayed.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, when “F_JACIN2” or “F_JACIN3” is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, “F_J1 upper 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower 7 lip” or “F_J1 cross 7 lip” and “F_J1 cross 7 lip” "F_JACIN2" or "F_JACIN3" is determined as an internal winning combination), "F_J1 upper 7 lip", "F_J1 lower 7 lip" and "F_J1 cross 7 lip" are "normal during bonus". And the combination of symbols other than "7-set lip" among the combinations of symbols having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 39 to 43 are displayed.

  The state in which “F_JACIN1” is carried over as an internal winning combination may be referred to as “between JAC1 flags”. Similarly, the state in which “F_JACIN2” is carried over as an internal winning combination is referred to as “between JAC2 flags”. A state in which “F_JACIN3” is carried over as an internal winning combination may be referred to as “between JAC3 flags”.

  “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” are winning combinations whose stop control differs depending on the game state as well as the internal winning combinations. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” are combinations of symbols corresponding to the above-described RT4 shift lip (see FIGS. 22 to 24) regardless of the pressing order. Display is allowed. Note that, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” are determined as internal winning combinations only in the RT4 gaming state. When “F_J1 lower 7 lip” and “F_J1 cross 7 lip” are determined as the internal winning combination, the RT4 gaming state is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, the stop control of “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” differs depending on the type of the hand related to JACIN carried over as the internal winning hand. Specifically, in the bonus state, when “F_JACIN2” is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, “F_J1 upper 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower 7 lip” or “F_J1 cross 7 lip” and “F_JACIN2” "Is determined as the internal winning combination)," F_J2 Chance Lip 1 "to" F_J2 Cherry Lip "are" Chance Lip ", and the symbols having the correspondence shown in FIGS. Display of any combination of the symbols “C_B Lip 01” to “C_Sui FKF_18” among the combinations is permitted.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, when “F_JACIN1” or “F_JACIN3” is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, one of “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” and one of “F_JACIN1” or “F_JACIN3”) In the case where the two are determined as internal winning combinations), “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” are “normal lip during bonus” and have the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. The symbol combinations other than "chance lip" among the symbol combinations are displayed.

  Further, “F_J3 chance lip 1” to “F_J3 cherry lip” are winning combinations whose stop control differs depending on the gaming state as well as the internal winning combinations. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_J3 chance lip 1” to “F_J3 cherry lip” are combinations of symbols corresponding to the above-described RT4 shift lip (see FIGS. 22 to 24) regardless of the pressing order. Display is allowed. In the bonus non-winning state, since “F_J3 chance lip 1” to “F_J3 cherry lip” are determined as internal winning combinations only in the RT4 gaming state, “F_J3 chance lip 1” to “F_J3 chance lip 1” to When “F_J3 cherry lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, the RT4 gaming state is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, "F_J3 chance lip 1" to "F_J3 cherry lip" are "chance lip" regardless of the type of the role related to JACIN carried over as the internal winning combination, and are shown in FIGS. 44 to 50. Display of any of the symbol combinations “C_B Lip 01” to “C_Sui FKF_18” among the symbol combinations having a correspondence relationship is permitted.

  When any of “F_chance lip 1” to “F_common bell” is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the symbol combination having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 44 to 56 is permitted. The features such as the transition of the RT gaming state triggered by “F_Chance Lip 1” to “F_Common Bell” are as shown in FIG.

  Next, referring to FIG. 58, “F_123 Bell A” to “F_321 Bell D” are basically the above-mentioned push order bells, and one of these push order bells is determined as an internal winning combination. In this case, the display of the combination of symbols having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 51 to 56 is permitted. More specifically, when the answer is correct in the pressing order determined for each type of the pressing order bell, “C_CD bell (see FIG. 30)” of the symbol combination having the correspondence shown in FIGS. The display of the combination of the symbols according to is permitted. On the other hand, when the answer is incorrect in the pressing order determined for each type of the pressing order bell, the symbol corresponding to the above-mentioned bell spilling eye (see FIG. 20) among the combinations of the symbols having the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. Or the combination of the symbols whose payout number is “3” in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 30 to 32).

  The name of the winning combination as the pressing order bell is determined based on the correct pressing order. For example, “1” named “F_123 Bell A” indicates that the stop operation is “left”, “2” indicates that the stop operation is “middle”, and “3” indicates that the stop operation is “middle”. Right ". Then, “123” indicates the correct push order. In the case of “F_123 Bell A”, the first stop operation is “left”, the second stop operation is “medium”, and the third stop operation is “right”. ”Indicates that the answer is correct, and other pressing orders indicate an incorrect answer. Similarly, in the case of “F_231 Bell A”, when the first stop operation is “medium”, the second stop operation is “right”, and the third stop operation is “left”, the answer is correct. In this case, it is incorrect.

  In addition, among the bells in the pushing order, “F_123 bell C”, “F_123 bell D”, “F_132 bell C”, “F_132 bell D”, “F_213 bell C”, “F_213 bell D”, “F_231 bell C”, “F_231 bell D”, “F_312 bell” C, “F_312 Bell D”, “F_321 Bell C”, and “F_321 Bell D” are winning combinations whose stop control differs depending on the gaming state as well as the internal winning combinations. Specifically, during the non-flag period (RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state in a bonus non-winning state), the above-mentioned pressing order bell is used, and when the answer is correct in the pressing order, symbols having the correspondence shown in FIGS. The display of the symbol combination corresponding to "C_CD bell (see FIG. 30)" is permitted, and when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing, the symbol combinations having the correspondence shown in FIGS. The display of the combination of the symbols according to the above-mentioned bell spilled eyes (see FIG. 20) or the combination of the symbols whose payout number is “3” in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 30 to 32) is permitted.

  On the other hand, in the flag-to-flag state (RT5 gaming state of the flag-to-flag state), “F_123 Bell C”, “F_123 Bell D”, “F_132 Bell C”, “F_132 Bell D”, “F_213 Bell C”, “F_213 Bell D”, “F_231 Bell” C, "F_231 bell D", "F_312 bell C", "F_312 bell D", "F_321 bell C", and "F_321 bell D" are combinations of symbols having the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. The display of the combination of symbols according to the “C_CD bell (see FIG. 30)” is permitted.

  In addition, when any of “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3” is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the symbol combination having the correspondence shown in FIG. 38 is permitted. When any one of “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3” is determined as the internal winning combination, “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3” determined as the internal winning combinations have the corresponding symbol combinations. Until it is displayed (only during the bonus state), it is carried over as an internal winning combination.

  In addition, when one of “F_RB combination A” and “F_RB combination B” is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the symbol combination having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 51 to 56 is permitted.

[Various storage areas on the main control side]
59 to 65 show examples of various storage areas stored in the main RAM 95.

<Internal winning combination storage area>
The internal winning combination storing area shown in FIG. 59 is configured by 45 storing areas of the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 45. The size of each of the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 45 is 1 byte.

  Therefore, the total size of the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 45 is 45 bytes. In the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 45, data determined based on the internal winning combination (data indicating a combination of symbols that can be stopped according to the internal winning combination) is stored. In the illustrated internal winning combination storing area, for example, bit 2 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 corresponds to “C_BB1” indicating a combination of symbols that can be stopped when the internal winning combination is “F_black-black-black”. .

<Storage area for carryover role>
The carryover combination storage area shown in FIG. 60 is a storage area of 2 bytes in size, which is constituted by two storage areas of carryover combination storage areas 1 and 2. In the carryover combination storage area, data relating to the carryover combination is stored.

  For example, by storing “1” in bit 2 of the carryover combination storage area 1, it is possible to determine that the combination name “C_BB1” has been won as “F_black-black-black” that can be stopped. The state in which “1” is stored in bit 2 of the carryover combination storage area 1 is held until the symbol combination corresponding to the combination name “C_BB1” is displayed on the winning line.

  That is, when “F_black-black-black” is won, the bit 2 of the carryover combination storage area 1 is set to “2” in at least one unit game until the combination of these bonus symbols is displayed on the payline as a display combination. The state where "1" is stored is maintained. Maintaining the state where “1” is stored in the bit 2 from the unit game in which the bonus is won to the winning unit game is called so-called “carryover”. Also, “F_black / black / black”, “F_red / red / red”, “F_white / white / white”, “F_red / red / white”, “F_white / white / red”, “F_JACIN1” corresponding to the data (combination of symbols) stored in the carryover combination storage area “F_JACIN2” and “F_JACIN3” are referred to as “carried over role”.

  When a stop operation is performed by the player and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped, the internal winning combination storage area is initialized, but the carryover combination storage area is not initialized. By doing so, the state of “carryover” can be maintained.

<Display combination storage area>
The display combination storage area shown in FIG. 61 is configured by 45 storage areas of display combination storage areas 1 to 45. The size of each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 45 is 1 byte.

  Therefore, the entire size of the display combination storage areas 1 to 45 is 45 bytes. The display combination storage areas 1 to 45 store data determined based on the data (storage area type) defined by each symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 32. The value of the display combination storage area is used by the main CPU 93 to identify the display combination after all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R have stopped.

  In the illustrated display combination storage area, for example, bits 0 to 7 of the display combination storage area 1 correspond to “R_RT transition A_01” to “R_RT transition C_01”, respectively.

<Gaming state flag storage area>
The game state flag storage area shown in FIG. 62 stores a flag for identifying a game state managed by the main control circuit 91, and has a size of 1 byte.

  Bits 0 to 6 of the gaming state flag storage area are respectively set to “RT1 gaming state”, “RT2 gaming state”, “RT3 gaming state”, “RT4 gaming state”, “RT5 gaming state”, “BB gaming state”, and “RB gaming state”. Yes, it is.

<Operation stop button storage area>
The operation stop button storage area shown in FIG. 63 is 1 byte in size. Bits 4 to 6 are storage areas indicating stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R capable of detecting a stop operation by the player, that is, valid stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R.

  Bits 0 to 2 are storage areas indicating the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R in which the stop operation corresponding to the valid stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R was detected immediately before. In the present embodiment, bit 3 and bit 7 are not used and “0” is stored.

  Bit 0 corresponds to left stop button 17L. When the left stop button 17L is operated by the player, "1" is stored in bit 0. Bit 1 corresponds to the middle stop button 17C. When the middle stop button 17C is operated by the player, "1" is stored in bit 1. Bit 2 corresponds to right stop button 17R. When the right stop button 17R is operated by the player, "1" is stored in the bit 2.

  Bit 4 corresponds to left stop button 17L. When the left stop button 17L is valid, "1" is stored in bit 4. Bit 5 corresponds to the middle stop button 17C. When the middle stop button 17C is valid, “1” is stored in bit 5. Bit 6 corresponds to right stop button 17R. When the right stop button 17R is valid, "1" is stored in bit 6.

  In the present embodiment, that the stop button is valid means that a stop operation can be detected. The stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R corresponding to the reels rotating at a constant speed and capable of detecting the stop operation are referred to as effective stop buttons.

<Pressing order storage area>
The pressing order storage area shown in FIG. 64 is an area for storing information indicating the pressing order of the three stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R. This pressing order storage area is 1 byte in size, uses bits 0 to 5, uses bits 6 and 7, and stores “0”.

  Bit 0 corresponds to the pressing order “left → middle → right”, and “1” is stored (on) in bit 0 when the pressing order is “left → middle → right”. Similarly, if the pressing order is “left → right → middle”, “1” is stored (ON) in bit 1, and if the pressing order is “middle → left → right”, “1” is stored in bit 2 Is stored (ON), "1" is stored in bit 3 in the case of "middle → right → left", and "1" is stored in bit 4 in the case of "right → left → middle" (ON), and “1” is stored (ON) in bit 5 in the case of “right → middle → left”.

<Symbol code storage area>
The symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 65 has the same configuration as the display combination storage area shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  The symbol code storage area stores data indicating a combination of symbols that may be displayed on the rotating reel. For example, when all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating, all combinations of symbols may be displayed. Therefore, “1” is stored in all corresponding bits of the symbol code storage area. You. Thereafter, when the left reel 3L stops (the reels 3C and 3R rotate), the bit corresponding to the symbol combination that cannot be displayed due to the stop of the left reel 3L is updated to "0".

[Transition flow of sub-side gaming state]
Next, a game state controlled by the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) of the pachislo 1 of this embodiment and its transition flow will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 manages the game state based on whether or not to notify the details of the stop operation advantageous to the player. As shown in FIG. 66, the sub control circuit 101 distinguishes between a normal gaming state, an ART gaming state, and a bonus state. Here, the general gaming state is a gaming state that is basically disadvantageous to the player, the bonus state is a gaming state that is basically advantageous to the player, and the ART gaming state is a gaming state. Is the most advantageous game state for the player. In the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, the player plays a game so as to shift from the general gaming state (while sandwiching the bonus state according to the situation) to the most advantageous ART gaming state.

  The general gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the main non-bonus winning state RT0 to RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 17) and a sub-side ART random determination gaming state. As shown in FIG. 66, the normal game state is constituted by a normal game state, a high-probability game state, and a CZ (chance zone). The normal gaming state, the high-probability gaming state, and the CZ are gaming states having different transition probabilities to the ART gaming state, and the normal gaming state has the lowest transition probability to the ART gaming state. The game state has a higher transition probability to the ART game state than the normal game state.

  The normal gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the main non-bonus winning state RT0 to RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 17) and a sub-side ART random determination gaming state. As shown in FIG. 66, there is a possibility that a transition from the normal gaming state to the ART gaming state, the CZ, the high-probability gaming state, and the bonus state.

  Specifically, in the normal gaming state, the lottery (A) for transition to ART and CZ is performed. In this transition lottery, when the transition to (A1) ART is won, the sub control circuit 101 sets the normal gaming state. From the game state to the ART game state. Also, in this transfer lottery, when the transfer to (A2) CZ is won, the sub-control circuit 101 transfers the game state from the normal game state to CZ. Although the details of the shift lottery (A) during the normal game state will be described later, in the normal game state, the shift to the ART and the CZ is performed twice at the start of reel rotation and the stop of the reel during one game. The lottery (A) is performed.

  In the normal gaming state, a lottery (B) for shifting to the high-probability gaming state is also performed. Specifically, in the normal gaming state, when the main gaming state is controlled to shift to the bonus non-winning state of the RT4 gaming state, the bonus non-winning state of the RT4 gaming state is shifted to the high probability gaming state by lottery (B). Is performed. When this transition lottery (B) is won, the sub-control circuit 101 transitions the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the high-probability gaming state. The details of the shift lottery (B) during the normal gaming state will be described later. In this shift lottery, the role related to the replay in the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, which is the sub-side normal gaming state, is set as the internal winning combination. The transfer lottery (B) is performed based on the determined number of times.

  Further, in the normal gaming state, (6) a combination of symbols corresponding to the carried BB is displayed, and when the BB is activated, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the bonus state. Note that the shift to the bonus state is common to the main side and the sub side, and therefore detailed description is omitted below.

  Subsequently, CZ is a gaming state corresponding to the main non-bonus winning state RT0 to RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 17), and a sub-side ART random determination non-winning gaming state. CZ is a game state (chance zone) having a high probability of transition to the ART game state, and continues for a maximum of 30 games. The CZ is a so-called perfect-run chance zone, and when the CZ has continued for a maximum of 30 games, the ART transition is determined. On the other hand, during the CZ, a lottery transition to the ART is performed, and when the transition lottery is “maintained”, the CZ ends. Here, even if the transition lottery is “maintained”, the transition to ART is performed if the transition lottery has been won, but more advantageous if CZ continues for 30 games. Since there is a possibility of transition to the ART gaming state, during the CZ, basically, the game is performed without receiving the transition lottery, and when the transition lottery is performed, the transition lottery is set to “invalid”. By playing the game in such a manner, it is desired to continue the 30 games without ending the CZ. The “maintenance / invalidation” of the shift lottery during CZ will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 66, there is a possibility that a transition from the CZ to a normal gaming state, an ART gaming state, and a bonus state is made. Specifically, when (C1) is won in the lottery transition (C) to ART performed during CZ, the sub-control circuit 101 transitions the gaming state from CZ to the ART gaming state, and ( C2) When no winning is made, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from CZ to the normal gaming state.

  Subsequently, the high-probability gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to an RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 17) in a bonus non-winning state on the main side, and a gaming state in which the sub-side ART random determination is not won, and The transition to the high-probability gaming state during the normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the lottery (B) is won. As shown in FIG. 66, there is a possibility that a transition from the high-probability gaming state to the normal gaming state, the ART gaming state, and the bonus state.

  Specifically, in the high-probability gaming state, a transition lottery (D) to the ART is performed, and in this transition lottery, when the transition to the (D1) ART is won, the sub control circuit 101 sets the high-probability gaming state. From the game state to the ART game state. Although the details of the shift lottery (D) during the high-probability game state will be described later, basically, similarly to the shift lottery (A) during the normal game state, when the reel rotation starts during one game and when the reel At the two timings at the time of stopping, the lottery (D) for shifting to ART is performed. The transition lottery (D) during the high-probability gaming state has a higher probability of winning the transition to ART than the transition lottery (A) during the normal gaming state.

  The high-probability gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the main-side bonus non-winning state of the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 17). In the main-side control, (E) transitions from the RT4 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. When such control is performed, the sub-control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the high-probability gaming state to the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state in which the bonus is not won).

  Here, as described above, the RT4 gaming state in the main non-bonus winning state in the main bonus non-winning state is, for example, when the answer to the push order lip is correct in the RT0 gaming state in the non-bonus winning state on the main side (the normal gaming state in the sub side). It is a game state to shift. As described above, in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal game state, which is the most basic game state (= disadvantageous for the player), when the answer is correct to the pushing order lip, the game is shifted to the high-probability game state, and the game proceeds to ART. The transition of the advantage. In other words, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, if the player accidentally shifts to the RT4 gaming state in which the bonus is not won by the stop operation of the player, a penalty such as not performing the ART transfer lottery is given. Instead, it is in an advantageous state for the player. As a result, in the pachislot 1, the RT4 gaming state in which the bonus is not won in the ART transfer lottery state can be set as a transition chance section to the ART gaming state, and the bonus non-attached ART bonus is not provided. It is possible to enhance the interest in the winning state of the RT4 gaming state.

  Further, from the viewpoint of the player, if the player answers correctly in the order of pushing in the normal game state, the player may shift to the high-probability game state which is a transition chance section to the ART game state. Sexuality is increased, and the interest during the normal game state can be increased. That is, in the gaming property in which the gaming state that has accidentally shifted due to the stop operation of the player is set as a penalty section, the stop operation during the normal game state is simple (for example, the first stop operation is performed by the left reel so as not to receive a penalty). And so on). In this regard, as in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, by performing the lottery for shifting to the ART without imposing a penalty, the player can freely perform the stop operation during the normal game state, and can perform the normal game state. The operability as well as the medium gameability can be improved.

  By the way, if the gaming state shifted to by chance by the stop operation is not a penalty section but a transition chance section to the ART gaming state, the profit on the player side and the profit on the amusement store side so as not to give an excessive profit to the player. It is necessary to adjust the balance. There are many possible methods of adjusting the balance. For example, there is an adjustment method in which a transition chance lot to the ART gaming state is set, and it is easier to win the shift lottery compared to the normal gaming state. With the method, the meaning of the transition chance section is lost. In this regard, in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, an RT1 game state in a bonus non-winning state with a fixed number of games is provided without transition to an RT4 game state in a bonus non-winning state. And By providing such an RT1 gaming state during the bonus non-winning state with the fixed number of games, the frequency of accidental transition due to the stop operation can be adjusted, and as a result, the profit of the player and the profit of the game store can be adjusted. The balance can be adjusted. As a result, the variables for adjusting the profit balance between the two can be further diversified, and a gaming machine rich in gaming properties can be provided.

  Subsequently, the bonus state is a game state corresponding to any of the main-side bonus states (see FIG. 17). As shown in FIG. 66, there is a possibility that a transition from the bonus state to a general gaming state (normal gaming state) and an ART gaming state. More specifically, if (F1) is won in the lottery transition (F) to ART performed during the bonus state, the sub-control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state after the BB operation ends. If (F2) is not won in this shift lottery, the sub-control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the normal gaming state after the operation of the BB ends. Although the details of the shift lottery (F) during the bonus state will be described later, in the bonus state, when the above-described “7-set lip” symbol combination can be displayed, ART is won, and BB When a predetermined lottery performed at the end of the operation of the game is won, an ART is won. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a specific effect state start means, and when the transition to the ART is won in the transition lottery (A) during the normal game state (A1), the transition lottery during CZ. (C) when the transfer to the ART is won (C1), when the transfer lottery during the high-probability game state is won (D), when the transfer to the ART is won (D1), and when the transfer to the ART is in the bonus state (F). When the transition to ART is won (F1), the gaming state is shifted to the ART gaming state.

  Subsequently, the ART gaming state is a gaming state for notifying the contents of a stop operation advantageous to the player, corresponds to the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 17) of the main-side bonus non-winning state, and the sub-side. This is the gaming state in which the ART lottery has been won. In the ART gaming state, for example, when the pressing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning pressing order bell is displayed so that a combination of symbols having a large payout number (C_CD bell with a payout number of 10) is displayed. Notify the correct push order. Further, in the ART gaming state, for example, when the pressing order lip is determined as the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols for maintaining the RT4 gaming state in which there is a high probability that the combination relating to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination (for example, The winning push order lip is notified of the correct push order so that (RT4 shift lip) is displayed.

  Further, in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, the ally character and the enemy character battle (battle) during the ART game state, and the ART game state is continued when the ally character wins, and the ART is performed when the enemy character wins. End the gaming state. In order to provide such gaming properties, the ART gaming state is composed of an enemy-determining ART and a battle ART, as shown in FIG.

  The enemy-determining ART is an ART gaming state during a period in which the type of the enemy character fighting with the ally character is determined. As shown in FIG. 66, from the enemy-determined ART, there is a possibility of shifting to the battle ART and the bonus state. Specifically, when an enemy character is determined in (G) enemy determination ART, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the game state from the enemy determination ART to the battle ART. The method of determining the enemy character during the enemy determination ART will be described later.

  The battle ART is an ART gaming state during a period in which the enemy character and the ally character determined in the enemy determination ART compete against each other. As shown in FIG. 66, there is a possibility that a transition from the battle ART to the enemy determination ART, the normal game state (normal game state), and the bonus state. Specifically, in the battle (H) during the battle ART, when the (H1) ally character wins, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the game state from the battle ART to the enemy determination ART, and (H2) the enemy character wins Then, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the battle ART to the general gaming state. The method for determining the outcome of the battle (H) during the battle ART will be described later. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes an advantageous state starting means, and a role related to replay is internally won during an enemy-determining ART and a battle ART, which is started based on winning of the shift lottery. The notification of the mode of the stop operation required to maintain the RT4 gaming state having a high probability of being determined as a combination (for example, the order of pressing for displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the RT4 transition lip) is started.

[Correspondence between main side / sub side of winning combination]
FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating a part of the correspondence between the types of winning combinations managed on the main (main control circuit 91) side and the abbreviations of winning combinations managed on the sub (sub-control circuit 101) side. On the sub side, the winning combination on the main side is managed by abbreviations shown in the correspondence table of FIG. It should be noted that “missing” may be “pure missing” only during the RT4 gaming state. Further, the correspondence between the main side and the sub side of the winning combination can be made different depending on the gaming state. In this regard, the correspondence shown in FIG. 67 indicates a correspondence in a gaming state other than the bonus state, and the correspondence in the bonus state is shown in FIG.

[Overview of effects performed on liquid crystal display device 11]
FIG. 68 shows an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. In FIG. 68, the liquid crystal display device 11 is divided into two regions, a first display region 111 and a second display region 112, for the sake of simplicity, but in the actual pachislot 1, the respective regions are mixed. It will be formed integrally.

  The first display area 111 is an area where a main effect is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 68, a display example during the battle ART is shown. During the battle ART, as shown in FIG. 68, an ally character and an enemy character compete against each other, and an effect of winning or losing is performed by reducing each physical strength (HP) by each attack / defense. .

  In the second display area 112, an apocalypse 113 which affects various kinds of lottery performed on the sub (sub-control circuit 101) side is displayed. The apocalypse 113 is provided with five areas 113A, 113B, 113C, 113D, and 113E for setting an effect ball to be described later. In the area 113A, effect balls that affect various lotteries in the current game are set, in the area 113B, effect balls that affect various lotteries in the next game are set, and in the area 113C, two game destinations are set. The effect ball which influences various lotteries in the game is set, the effect ball which affects various lotteries in the game of three game destinations is set in the area 113D, and the various lotteries in the game of four game destinations are set in the area 113E. The effect ball which influences is set. That is, in Apocalypse 113, effect balls that affect various lotteries in five games including the current game are set. The effect ball set in the apocalypse 113 is updated in the set area in accordance with the progress of the game. When the apocalypse 113 is activated, some effect ball (including a blank (empty)) is set, and when not operating, the effect ball is not set.

  Specifically, in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, the apocalypse 113 may or may not operate, and operates by winning an operation lottery described later. When the apocalypse 113 is activated in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, as shown in FIG. Is set. The lottery balls 1 to fixed balls set in the apocalypse 113 in the normal game state and the high-probability game state have an effect on the above-described transition lottery (A) (D). More specifically, the lottery balls 1 to fixed balls set in the area 113A have an effect on the above-described transition lottery (A) (D) in the current game.

  Note that the above-mentioned transition lottery (A) and (D) are performed at two timings, ie, at the start of reel rotation and during the stop of the reel during one game. Among them, for the shift lottery (A) and (D) performed at the start of the reel rotation (at the start), the lottery balls 1 to the set ball set in the area 113A are determined as the lottery results regardless of the internal winning combination. Affect it. On the other hand, for the shift lottery (A) and (D) performed when the reels are stopped, the lottery balls 1 to the set balls set in the area 113A are the combination of symbols displayed when the reels are stopped when the combination of symbols is "Bell Win" or more. Only in certain cases, it affects the lottery result. In addition, "bell winning" means that the combination of the symbols at the time of the correct answer in the pushing order bell is displayed, or that the combination of the symbols according to the common bell is displayed. Means that a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the rare roles such as "Changing Bell", "Chan Lip", "Strong Cherry", "Low Cherry", "Determining Role", "Watermelon" and "Pure Out" (see FIG. 67) is displayed. It is.

  The lottery ball 1 to the confirmed ball have different effects on the shift lottery (A) and (D). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the lottery ball 1 has a low probability of winning above CZ (CZ or ART), the lottery ball 2 has a medium probability of winning above CZ, and the lottery ball 3 has The winning probability of CZ or higher is a high probability, and the lottery ball 4 is determined to have a winning of CZ or higher, and the determined ball is determined to be the ART winning.

  Subsequently, in CZ, Revelation 113 is always activated. As shown in FIG. 57, in the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113 in the CZ, any of the developed balls or the avoidance balls is set, or a blank (empty) state is set in which no effect ball is set. The developed ball and the avoidance ball set in the apocalypse 113 in the CZ affect the above-mentioned ART transition lottery (C) performed during the CZ. More specifically, the developed ball and the avoidance ball set in the area 113A affect the above-described ART transition lottery (C) in this game.

  Specifically, when the development order ball is set in the area 113A and the pressing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the above-mentioned ART transition lottery (C) is performed. If a stop operation is performed in this game, and if the stop operation is a correct stop operation in the pressing order determined for the winning pressing order bell, the lottery result of the shift lottery (C) Becomes "invalid". On the other hand, when the stop operation is an operation of stopping the incorrect answer in the pressing order determined for the winning pressing order bell, the lottery result of the shift lottery (C) is “maintained”. As described above, the CZ is a complete-run type CZ, and the CZ ends when the transfer lottery (C) performed at a stage before the complete run is “maintained”. Therefore, in the game in which the development ball is set in the area 113A, the player desires that the pressing order bell is not determined as the internal winning combination (the shift lottery (C) itself is not performed). When the bell is determined as the internal winning combination, it is desired that the correct answer is made in the order of pressing (the shift lottery (C) becomes invalid).

  In the above description, the fact that the lottery result of the shift lottery (C) is "maintained" means that in the game in which the pressing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the incorrect answer stop operation is performed in the pressing order. This is synonymous with displaying a combination of symbols (bell spilled eyes) displayed in such a case. Therefore, the termination condition of CZ can be that the lottery result of the shift lottery (C) is "maintained", and in the game in which the pressing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, a bell spilling eye is displayed. It can also be said.

  Further, in the above description, when the bell spilled eye is displayed, the lottery result of the shift lottery (C) is set to “invalid”, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the lottery result of the shift lottery (C) is set to “invalid” at the time of the correct answer of the pressing order of the push order bell, a disadvantage is given to the player if the shift lottery (C) is won. become. In this respect, by maintaining the lottery result of the shift lottery (C) without invalidating the lottery result (C) at the time of the correct answer of the pushing order of the pushing order bell, CZ can be continued without giving a disadvantage to the player. Is preferred. If the lottery result of the shift lottery (C) is determined to be “maintained” at the time of the correct answer of the pushing order of the pushing order bell, the condition for terminating the CZ may be an incorrect answer in the pushing order of the pushing order bell. preferable. Thereby, it is possible to “maintain” the lottery result of the shift lottery (C) while continuing the CZ. To “maintain” the lottery result of the shift lottery (C) while continuing the CZ means that, for example, when the shift lottery (C) is won, the right of ART (the number of sets) is determined according to the lottery result. It means giving a number (one or more). As described above, by maintaining the lottery result of the shift lottery (C) during the CZ, the shift lottery performed in the middle of the CZ (first right grant lottery) and the shift lottery performed at the completion of the CZ (second The rights (the number of sets) of the ART granted in both of the rights grant lottery) can be given, and as a result, the ART corresponding to the right can be executed after the CZ ends. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the number-of-rights management means and the advantageous state control means, and is provided in both the transfer lottery performed in the middle of the CZ and the transfer lottery performed in the CZ complete run. In addition to counting the total number of the rights of the ARTs, and executing the ART for the total number after the end of CZ.

  On the other hand, the avoidance ball and the blank (empty) are effect balls that do not perform the lottery (C) for shifting to the ART even if the pressing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination. From the player's point of view, a game in which an avoidance ball and a blank (empty) are set can be played with ease.

  Subsequently, in the enemy determination ART, the apocalypse 113 always operates. In the enemy-determining ART, in the regions 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113, as shown in FIG. The boss ball 1 to the boss ball 8 and the ally ball set in the apocalypse 113 in the enemy determination ART influence the lottery of the enemy determination performed during the enemy determination ART. More specifically, the boss ball 1 to the boss ball 8 and the ally ball set in the area 113A influence the lottery of the enemy decision in this game.

  Specifically, when any one of the boss ball 1 to the boss ball 8 is set in the area 113A and the pressing order bell (which may include a common bell) is determined as the internal winning combination, the setting is performed. The boss corresponding to the type of the boss ball being set is determined as the opponent in the battle ART. The bosses corresponding to the boss balls 1 to 8 are enemy characters having different characteristics, respectively, and will be described later in detail. On the other hand, when any one of the boss ball 1 to the boss ball 8 is set in the area 113A and an order other than the pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the enemy character of the opponent is not determined and the enemy is determined. ART will continue. Further, when any one of the boss ball 1 to the boss ball 8 is set in the area 113A, any one of the net loss, the watermelon, the weak cherry, the strong cherry, and the chanlip (so-called rare role) is determined as the internal winning combination. Then, the opponent is not determined, and the stock lottery of the ally ball is performed. In the situation where this stock lottery has been won and allied balls are stocked, the boss balls 1 to 8 set in the apocalypse are rewritten as allied balls.

  Further, when an ally ball is set in the area 113A during the enemy determination ART, a lottery for increasing the physical strength (HP) of the ally character based on the internal winning combination is performed. If this lottery is won, the ally character's physical strength increases, and the degree of expectation of the ally character winning in the subsequent battle ART increases.

  Subsequently, in the battle ART, the apocalypse 113 always operates. As shown in FIG. 68, any one of a friendly ball, an enemy ball, and an awakening ball is set in the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113 in the battle ART. The friendly ball, the enemy ball, and the awakening ball set in the apocalypse 113 in the battle ART affect the result of the battle performed during the battle ART. More specifically, the ally ball, the enemy ball, and the awakening ball set in the area 113A affect the battle in the current or subsequent game.

  Specifically, when a friendly ball or an enemy ball is set in the area 113A and the pressing order bell or the common bell is determined as the internal winning combination, a character corresponding to the type of the effect ball set is set. Attack the opponent in the game. For example, when an ally ball is set, the ally character attacks the enemy character, and as a result, the physical strength (HP) of the enemy character decreases. On the other hand, when the enemy ball is set, the enemy character attacks the ally character, and as a result, the physical strength (HP) of the ally character decreases.

  On the other hand, when a friendly ball or an enemy ball is set in the area 113A, if any of the net loss, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, or chanlip (so-called rare role) is determined as the internal winning combination, Regardless of the type of the effect ball being set, the ally character attacks the enemy character. In this case, the physical strength (HP) of the enemy character is basically reduced more than when the pressing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination.

  In addition, when the awakening ball is set in the area 113A, if the push order bell, the common bell, the net loss, the watermelon, the weak cherry, the strong cherry, or the chanlip is determined as an internal winning combination, the ally character is determined. Attack against the enemy character and stock allied balls. Then, when the friend ball is stocked, the enemy ball set in the apocalypse is replaced with the friend ball by the amount of stock. As a result, the situation in which the ally character launches an attack increases after that, and as a result, the degree of expectation that the ally character wins in the battle ART increases.

[How to manage production balls]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 69, a description will be given of a method of managing effect balls in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment. In the pachislot 1, the sub-control circuit 101 stores information on the effect ball set in the apocalypse 113 in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 103. As described above, the effect balls are set in the apocalypse 113 corresponding to the five regions 113A to 113E, and five or more effect balls are stored in the sub RAM 103. In this regard, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, six effect balls are stored in the sub RAM 103.

  Of the six effect balls, the effect ball stored in storage area "1" is set corresponding to area 113A, and the effect ball stored in storage area "2" is set corresponding to area 113B. The effect ball stored in storage area “3” is set corresponding to area 113C, and the effect ball stored in storage area “4” is set corresponding to area 113D and stored in storage area “5”. The effect ball to be performed is set corresponding to the area 113E, and the effect ball stored in the storage area “6” is set not in the current game but in the next game in accordance with the area 113E.

  In the example shown in FIG. 69, at the time of FIG. 69A (now game), the lottery balls 1, the lottery balls 2, the lottery balls 3, the lottery balls 4, The ball is stored. As a result, lottery ball 1, lottery ball 2, lottery ball 3, lottery ball 4, and confirmed ball are set in regions 113A to 113E of Revelation 113, respectively. On the other hand, although the lottery ball 3 is stored in the storage area “6”, the lottery ball stored in the storage area “6” is not set in the apocalypse 113 at the time of FIG.

  Thereafter, when the next game is played, the effect balls stored in the storage area are updated, and the effect balls set in the areas 113A to 113E slide one by one. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the storage areas “1” to “5” of the next game have the storage areas “2” to “6” at the time (previous game) in FIG. 69 (a). Are stored in the storage area "6" for the next game, and a new effect ball is stored by lottery. As a result, in the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113, the lottery ball 2, the lottery ball 3, the lottery ball 4, the confirmed ball, and the effect ball 2 stored in the storage areas "1" to "5" of the next game are set. Will be done.

  The effect ball stored in each storage area is set in each area by the operation of the apocalypse 113 (that is, displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11). Here, as described above, in the normal game state and the high-probability game state, the apocalypse 113 may be activated or may not be activated. The effect ball may not be set (displayed) in each area of the apocalypse 113. On the other hand, in CZ and ART, the apocalypse 113 always operates, and the effect ball stored in the storage area is always set (displayed) in each area of the apocalypse 113. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub RAM 103 constitutes effect information storage means, and stores the storage areas “1” to “6” corresponding to the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113 under the control of the sub control circuit 101. Memorize the production ball. Further, the liquid crystal display device 11 constitutes a display unit, and under the control of the sub control circuit 101, a part of the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 (for example, the storage areas “1” to “5”). Is displayed in the regions 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113. In addition, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes effect information registering means, first effect information registering means, and second effect information registering means. In), the effect balls to be registered for the games for six games (a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead) are drawn by lottery, and the effect balls determined by the lottery (lottery balls 1 to 4 and confirmed balls). , Boss balls 1 to 8, enemy balls, friendly balls, etc.) are registered in the sub RAM 103 as effect information.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the types of effect balls set in the apocalypse 113 are different between the normal game state and the high-probability game state, the CZ, the enemy-determining ART, and the battle ART. Therefore, the sub RAM 103 may be provided with a storage area corresponding to each state. In the CZ, the enemy determination ART, and the battle ART, initial lottery of effect balls is performed at the start of each state, and at the end of each state, all effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are cleared. Therefore, a common storage area may be used for the CZ, the enemy-determining ART, and the battle ART, since the timing for using the storage areas does not overlap.

  On the other hand, in the normal game state and the high-probability game state, the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 is maintained regardless of the operation / non-operation of the apocalypse 113. That is, the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 immediately before the apocalypse 113 becomes inactive is maintained even when the apocalypse 113 is not operating, and is maintained in the sub RAM 103 when the apocalypse 113 is operated next time. The effect ball is set in each area of Revelation 113. The storage areas corresponding to the normal game state and the high-probability game state are basically maintained during the game, but are cleared at a predetermined timing. The timing for clearing the storage areas according to the normal game state and the high-probability game state will be described later.

[ART and CZ random determination in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70 to FIG. 87, details of the lottery (A) and (D) for transition to ART and CZ performed during the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state will be described. FIG. 70 is a schematic diagram of the transfer lottery (A) (D) performed during the normal game state and the high-probability game state, and FIGS. 71 to 87 are referred to during the transfer lottery (A) (D). These are various data tables. The various data tables are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

<Overview of transfer lottery (A) (D)>
Referring to FIG. 70, in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, when the start operation is performed and the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts, the internal winning combination is determined according to the control of main control circuit 91. . In the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, when the internal winning combination is determined, first, the ART and CZ transition lottery (A) (D) at the start is performed. In the shift lottery (A) (D) at the start, the winning probability of ART or CZ basically differs according to the gaming state, and the ART or CZ winning in the high-probability gaming state is higher than in the normal gaming state. High probability. In addition, in the shift lottery (A) (D) at the start, as described later, not only the gaming state, but also the internal winning combination and the effect balls (lottery balls 1 to fixed balls) set in the area 113A. Or, the winning probability of CZ is different.

  In addition, in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, when the internal winning combination is determined, the apocalypse lottery is performed as to whether or not to activate the apocalypse. In this apocalypse lottery, the winning probability differs depending on the winning mode of the apocalypse operation. Specifically, the winning modes of the apocalypse operation include a low mode, a high mode, and a concentrated mode (there are also states of short, middle, and long, respectively). In the mode and the high mode, the act of apocalypse is not won. In the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, the winning mode of the apocalypse operation is shifted based on the internal winning combination, and the apocalypse is activated when the promotion to the concentrated mode is completed.

  After that, when a stop operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, ART and CZ transition lottery (A) (D) at the time of reel stoppage is performed according to the presence or absence of the operation of the apocalypse. Specifically, when the apocalypse is operating, based on the combination of the effect ball (lottery ball 1 to the confirmed ball) set in the area 113A and the symbol “Bell prize” or more, the ART and CZ are set. (A) and (D). In the transfer lottery (A) and (D) when the reel is stopped, the winning probability of ART or CZ differs depending on the effect ball set in the area 113A.

  On the other hand, when the apocalypse is not operating, the promotion lottery of the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 is performed. When the apocalypse is not operating, the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 is not set in the apocalypse (in other words, it is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11). Therefore, this promotion lottery is performed for hidden information that does not appear in the table. As will be described later in detail, during the period in which the promotion lottery is performed, the rotating auditory product 200 is driven, so that the player can know that the promotion lottery is being performed.

<Various Data Tables Referenced in Transition Lottery (A) (D)>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 70 to FIG. 87, the lottery (A) and (D) for transition to ART and CZ performed during the normal game state and the high-probability game state will be specifically described.

<ART lottery table at start>
FIG. 70 to FIG. 73 are diagrams showing a start ART random determination table referred to in the start random determination (A) and (D) during the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state. The start-time ART lottery table defines information on a lottery value with respect to the lottery result for each of the current gaming state, the effect ball set in the area 113A, and the internal winning combination.

  In the present embodiment, on the sub (sub-control circuit 101) side, the effect random number value extracted from the predetermined numerical value range “0 to 32767” is sequentially subtracted by a lottery value according to each lottery result. The lottery is performed by determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether a so-called "digit" has occurred).

  Referring to the start-time ART lottery tables shown in FIGS. 70 to 73, during the normal gaming state, the probability of winning CZ or ART differs depending on the effect ball set in the area 113A. It can be seen that the probability of winning the CZ or the ART differs accordingly. Also, comparing the start-time ART lottery table shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 with the start-time ART lottery table shown in FIG. 73, in the high-probability game state, the ART is won with a higher probability than in the normal game state. In the high-probability gaming state, there is a probability that all the winning combinations will win the ART, but in the normal gaming state, only some of the winning combinations will win the ART. The fact that only some of the winning combinations win the ART is synonymous with that only some of the winning combinations do not perform the lottery transition to the ART. The start lottery (A) is performed only at the start, and in the high-probability gaming state, the start lottery (A) is performed when a plurality of roles including some of these roles are determined as internal winning combinations. become. Similarly, referring to the start-time ART lottery table shown in FIG. 73, it can be seen that in the high-probability gaming state, although the CZ is not won, the probability of winning the ART is high.

<Mode shift lottery table>
FIG. 74 to FIG. 78 are mode transition lottery tables referred to in the transition lottery of the winning mode of the apocalypse operation in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state. The mode shift lottery table defines whether or not the apocalypse is currently operating, the current win mode of the apocalypse operation, and information on the lottery value for the win mode of the transfer destination for each internal winning combination. Whether or not the apocalypse is currently operating is determined by the apocalypse flag. When the apocalypse flag is “0”, it means that the apocalypse is not operating. When the apocalypse flag is “1”, the apocalypse is operating. Means inside.

  As described above, the winning modes of the apocalypse operation include the low mode, the high mode, and the concentrated mode, and each mode has a state such as short, middle, and long. The low mode, the high mode, and the concentrated mode are winning modes in which the expected appointments of the apocalypse lottery for determining whether to activate the apocalypse are different as described above. The short, middle, and long states are states that determine whether to easily shift to a more advantageous winning mode or to shift to a more unfavorable winning mode. Specifically, a short is a state in which it is most difficult to shift to a more advantageous winning mode, and a state in which it is most likely to shift to a less advantageous winning mode, and a middle is less likely to shift to a more advantageous winning mode next. The state is a state where it is easy to shift to the less favorable winning mode next, and the long state is a state where it is most easy to shift to the more advantageous winning mode and a state where it is most difficult to shift to the more disadvantageous winning mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 to 78, when the apocalypse is not operating (the apocalypse flag 0), the winning mode basically rises in the order of the low mode, the high mode, and the concentration mode, and then rises to the concentration mode once. Does not go down to the low and high modes until the apocalypse is activated.

<Apocalypse operation lottery table>
FIG. 79 is an apocalypse operation lottery table referred to in the apocalypse lottery during the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state. The apocalypse operation lottery table defines whether or not the apocalypse operation is currently in operation, the current winning mode of the apocalypse operation, and information on the lottery value relating to the operation of the apocalypse for each internal winning combination. Here, the operation of the apocalypse is performed over the guaranteed number of games to be added or subtracted as a result of the apocalypse lottery. Specifically, as a result of the apocalypse lottery, the number of guarantees is added by the number corresponding to the case where “Apocalypse is active_additional security 1 addition” to “apocalypse is active_additional security 5 addition”, and When "subtraction" is won, the guaranteed number of times is decremented by one. Then, when the number of guarantees becomes 0 as a result of the addition / subtraction, the operation of the apocalypse ends (the apocalypse flag changes from 1 to 0). If the guaranteed number is added by 1 or more when the apocalypse flag is 0, the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1 and the apocalypse is activated.

  Further, in the apocalypse operation lottery table, “no apocalypse operation” means that the apocalypse lottery is not won, and the apocalypse flag is maintained at 0. Similarly, “keeping apocalypse in operation_maintained” means that the operation of the apocalypse is maintained without adding or subtracting the guaranteed number of times, and the apocalypse flag is maintained at “1”.

  Referring to the apocalypse operation lottery tables of FIGS. 79 (A) and (B), if the apocalypse is not currently operating, the operation of the apocalypse may start only when the winning mode is the concentrated mode. I understand. Therefore, in the pachislot 1, an effect indicating the current winning mode may be performed. For example, the current winning mode can be suggested by moving the rotating accessory 200. Specifically, the probability of moving the rotating role 200 is changed according to the winning mode. For example, in a situation where the user is staying in the concentrated mode, the probability of moving the rotating role 200 is increased, and the mode is set to the high mode or the low mode. In a staying situation, a mode in which the probability of moving the rotating accessory 200 is reduced may be considered. Similarly, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the apocalypse will be activated (the guaranteed number is added) in the apocalypse lottery may be performed. In particular, the production of the suggestion of the degree of expectation may be performed by a different thing from the rotating accessory 200. Specifically, the panel device 400 may display an image corresponding to the latent image 402 in a color corresponding to the expected degree.

<Apocalypse MAP lottery table>
80 and 81 are apocalypse MAP lottery tables for lottery of the apocalypse MAP for determining the effect ball to be set in the active apocalypse in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state. In the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, basically, a MAP having a larger MAP number is more advantageous for a player. This applies not only to the apocalypse MAP but also to other MAPs described later. The apocalypse MAP lottery table in FIG. 80 is a table that is referred to when the apocalypse is activated (the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1). The apocalypse MAP lottery table in FIG. 81 is a table that is referred to when the MAP data defined for each apocalypse MAP is 0.

  The apocalypse MAP lottery table defines, for each of the current apocalypse MAPs, information on the lottery value for the apocalypse MAP at the migration destination. It is assumed that “MAP0” is set as the apocalypse MAP at the initial stage when the power is turned on.

<MAP data correspondence table>
In the apocalypse MAP, MAP data for determining the effect ball to be set in the operating apocalypse is defined. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of MAP data defined in each apocalypse MAP. As shown in FIG. 82, in the apocalypse MAP1, MAP data "1" is defined in the first game, and MAP data "0" is defined in the second game. When the MAP data “0” is defined, a new apocalypse MAP is randomly selected with reference to the apocalypse MAP lottery table shown in FIG.

<Rotary lottery table at the time of Apocalypse operation>
FIG. 83 is an apocalypse operation effect ball lottery table for determining the effect ball to be set in the operating apocalypse in the normal game state and the high-probability game state. The effect ball lottery table at the time of the apocalypse operation defines information on the lottery value of the effect ball set for each MAP data. As shown in FIG. 83, as the MAP data is larger, an effect ball that is more advantageous for the player is set. In FIG. 83, the determined ball is not randomly selected. In this regard, although the description is omitted, for example, by performing a lottery for elevating an effect ball set at the time of winning a rare role or the like, it is possible to upgrade from the lottery ball 1 to the lottery ball 4 to a confirmed ball. Is also good.

  In FIG. 83, the information of the lottery value for the effect ball is also defined for the MAP data “0”. As described above, when the MAP data is “0”, a new apocalypse MAP is randomly selected. Here, the lottery of the new apocalypse MAP and the lottery of the effect ball based on the MAP data “0” may be given priority. In this regard, in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, when the lottery of the effect ball is never performed in the lottery apocalypse MAP, the lottery of the effect ball based on the MAP data “0” is prioritized, and the lottery apocalypse is performed. If the lottery of the effect ball has been performed at least once in the MAP, the lottery of the new apocalypse MAP is given priority. For example, in the case of the apocalypse MAP "0", since all the MAP data for the five games are "0" (see FIG. 82), a lottery of the effect ball based on the MAP data "0" is performed once, and thereafter, a new lottery is performed. Lottery of Revelation MAP. On the other hand, in the case of the apocalypse MAP “1”, since the MAP data of the first game is “1” and the MAP data of the second game is “0” (see FIG. 82), the effect based on the MAP data “0” Without performing the lottery of the ball, a new apocalypse MAP is randomly selected after the lottery of the effect ball based on the MAP data “1”.

  This applies to other MAPs described later. Specifically, the MAP data “0” performs a random determination based on the MAP data “0” only in the first game, and does not perform a random determination based on the MAP data “0” in the case of shifting to the second game. , A new MAP is randomly selected. When such control is performed, the lottery based on the MAP data “0” is not performed in the MAP having the MAP number “1” or more.

<Flow of the set of production balls to Apocalypse>
Here, the flow of setting the effect ball in the apocalypse will be specifically described. When the apocalypse lottery is won and the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1, the apocalypse is activated. In accordance with the operation of the apocalypse, the sub control circuit 101 sets the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 to the apocalypse. As described above, the storage area corresponding to the normal game state and the high-probability game state is basically maintained during the game, so that when the apocalypse is activated, the maintained effect ball is set in the apocalypse. become. On the other hand, the storage areas according to the normal game state and the high-probability game state are also changed at the time of setting change or at the start of the next business day. Cleared at a predetermined timing such as hour. Then, when the storage areas according to the normal game state and the high-probability game state are cleared, the effect ball is initialized (re-lottery) in the storage area. Hereinafter, the flow of the initial setting of the storage area according to the normal game state and the high-probability game state will be described.

  In the initial setting of the storage area according to the normal game state and the high-probability game state, first, the apocalypse MAP is randomly selected. In this initial setting, the apocalypse MAP “0”, which is the initial apocalypse MAP, is set first. In the apocalypse MAP “0”, as shown in FIG. 82, “0” is defined as the MAP data of the first game. Therefore, the sub control circuit 101 randomly selects the first effect ball based on the MAP data “0” of the first game. As a result, referring to the effect ball lottery table at the time of the apocalypse operation shown in FIG. 83, “lottery ball 1” is determined as the first effect ball.

  Subsequently, the sub control circuit 101 refers to the MAP data of the second game of the apocalypse MAP “0”. As shown in FIG. 82, since the MAP data of the second game is “0”, the sub-control circuit 101 randomly selects a new apocalypse MAP without performing the random determination of the effect ball. Specifically, with reference to the apocalypse MAP lottery table referred to at the time of the MAP data “0” shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 81, the apocalypse MAP “1” is randomly selected as the apocalypse MAP of the migration destination. As shown in FIG. 82, the apocalypse MAP "1" defines "1" as the MAP data of the first game and "0" as the MAP data of the second game. Therefore, the sub control circuit 101 randomly selects the second effect ball based on the MAP data “1” of the first game. As a result, referring to the effect ball lottery table at the time of the apocalypse operation shown in FIG. 83, for example, “lottery ball 2” is determined as the second effect ball.

  Subsequently, the sub control circuit 101 refers to the MAP data of the second game of the apocalypse MAP “1”. As shown in FIG. 82, since the MAP data of the second game is “0”, the sub-control circuit 101 randomly selects a new apocalypse MAP without performing the random determination of the effect ball. Specifically, referring to the apocalypse MAP lottery table referred to at the time of the MAP data “0” shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 81, for example, the apocalypse MAP “2” is randomly selected as the migration apocalypse MAP. As shown in FIG. 70, the apocalypse MAP "2" defines "1" as the MAP data of the first game and "0" as the MAP data of the second game. Therefore, the sub control circuit 101 randomly selects the third effect ball based on the MAP data “1” of the first game. As a result, referring to the effect ball lottery table at the time of the apocalypse operation shown in FIG. 83, for example, “lottery ball 3” is determined as the third effect ball.

  After that, similarly, when six effect balls are determined repeatedly, the sub-control circuit 101 finishes the lottery of the effect balls and stores the determined effect balls in the sub RAM 103 in order. The order in which the effect balls are determined is arbitrary. For example, the sub-control circuit 101 determines the effect balls in an order corresponding to each area of the apocalypse 113. That is, the sub-control circuit 101 determines the effect balls to be set in the area 113A of the apocalypse 113 in order.

<Promotion of production ball>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 84, a method of promoting the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 during the normal game state and the high-probability game state will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an outline of a method for promoting a production ball used in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (a), in the normal game state and the high-probability game state, a predetermined number of effect balls are stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 103 even when the apocalypse is inactive. The stored effect ball is not set (displayed) in the apocalypse as shown in FIG. 84 (a) in the situation where the apocalypse is not activated, but when the apocalypse is activated, the corresponding ball in the apocalypse as shown in FIG. 84 (b). Set (displayed) in the area.

  In the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, the promotion lottery of the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 (that is, the effect ball that is not displayed) is performed in a state where the apocalypse is not operated. In the example shown in FIG. 84, the lottery ball 1 stored in the storage area “1” in FIG. 84A is promoted to the lottery ball 3 as shown in FIG. 84C as a result of the promotion lottery. . Thereafter, when the apocalypse is activated, as shown in FIG. 84 (d), the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 is set (displayed) in the area corresponding to the apocalypse. 84 (b) and 84 (d), it can be seen that as a result of the promotion lottery, the effect ball set in the area 113A has been promoted from the lottery ball 1 to the lottery ball 3.

  Such a promotion lottery is performed when the rotating accessory 200 moves in a state where the apocalypse is not activated. Specifically, in the pachislo 1, when the cover member 198 corresponding to the eyelid of the rotating accessory 200, which is an eyeball accessory, is released and the eyeball body 203 corresponding to the eyeball becomes visible to the player, the non-display is performed. Is to be promoted. Therefore, when the centerpiece main body 203 appears during the normal game state and the high-probability game state, a promotion lottery of an effect ball that affects the ART lottery is performed, and the player has the centerpiece main body 203 appearing. During the period, the player plays the game in hope of being promoted to a more advantageous effect ball.

<Movable lottery table>
FIG. 85 is a movable item random determination table for performing a random determination as to whether or not to perform a promotion random determination of a non-displayed effect ball during an apocalypse non-operation of a normal gaming state and a high-probability gaming state. The role-movable lottery table defines information on a lottery value relating to moving the rotating role 200 for each internal winning combination. In the pachislot 1, if the guarantee of the movable object becomes 1 or more as a result of the lottery using the movable item lottery table, the rotating accessory 200 is moved to the movable role 200 (the cover member 198 is opened). A movement request is issued to a control task (see FIG. 132 described later). As described above, while the rotating auditorium 200 is movable, the promotion lottery of the non-displayed effect ball is performed. Therefore, the movable object lottery table shifts to a period in which the promotion random determination is performed. It can be said that this is a table for performing a lottery on whether or not to perform.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the guaranteed number of movable parts is basically added when the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and a combination other than the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination. This is subtracted or maintained. After the guaranteed number of movement of the accessory becomes 1 or more and the rotating accessory 200 moves, after the guaranteed number of movement of the accessory becomes 0, the movement of the rotating accessory 200 ends and the cover member 198 is closed. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a movable item lottery means, uses the movable item lottery table to determine whether or not to perform the promotion random determination, and guarantees the movable object according to the result of the random determination. When the number becomes 1 or more, a request to move the rotating accessory 200 is made.

<Direction ball promotion lottery table>
Next, FIG. 86 randomly determines whether or not to promote a non-displayed effect ball in a state where the rotating accessory 200 is movable (that is, when the guaranteed number of movable accessory is 1 or more). It is a production ball promotion lottery table for the. The effect ball promotion lottery table defines information on a lottery value regarding the promotion number of effect balls for each internal winning combination. The effect balls according to the normal game state and the high-probability game state are provided in the order of the lottery ball 1, the lottery ball 2, the lottery ball 3, the lottery ball 4, and the confirmed ball according to the expected degree of the ART or CZ winning. The promotion number specified in the effect ball promotion lottery table indicates the number of stages in which these effect balls are promoted to effect balls with higher expectations. For example, “one-stage promotion” means that the lottery ball 1 is promoted to the lottery ball 2, and that the lottery ball 2 is promoted to the lottery ball 3, and “two-stage promotion” means that the lottery ball 1 is promoted. The promotion to the lottery ball 3 and the promotion from the lottery ball 2 to the lottery ball 4 mean the like. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a promotion lottery means, and determines whether or not to promote a non-displayed production ball using the production ball promotion lottery table while the rotating accessory 200 is in a movable state. Or lottery.

  As described above, six effect balls are stored in the sub RAM 103. Here, if the effect ball is determined to be promoted in the promotion lottery, the effect ball to be promoted is arbitrary. For example, all six production balls may be promoted all at once according to the result of the promotion lottery, or only one or more production balls to be promoted may be promoted according to the result of the promotion lottery. Good. In this case, the method of determining one or more effect balls to be promoted is also arbitrary.

  For example, it is conceivable that six effect balls are sequentially determined as effect balls to be promoted. Specifically, first, the effect ball stored in the storage area “1” of the sub RAM 103 is determined as the effect ball to be promoted, and then the effect ball stored in the storage area “2” is promoted. Is determined as a production ball. In this case, the timing of updating the promotion ball to be promoted is also arbitrary. For example, a predetermined number of games are completed or a promotion lottery is performed for a performance ball to be promoted or promoted a predetermined number of times (when a lottery value is defined only for “no promotion”, the promotion lottery may be performed. Also, the promotion lottery may not be performed.) When it is performed, the promotion ball to be promoted may be updated. In addition, when the promotion ball to be promoted can be promoted in one step, the promotion ball to be promoted is changed. Updating may be performed, and when the effected ball to be promoted can be promoted to a predetermined effected ball (for example, lottery ball 4), the effected ball to be promoted may be updated. Also, as a result of the promotion lottery, if it is determined that a plurality of stages are to be promoted, only the effect ball that was the target of promotion in this game may be promoted in a plurality of stages. While promoting, it is also possible to promote a plurality of production balls one step at a time, such as one step of the next promotion target production ball, A plurality of effect balls may be promoted while weighting them according to whether or not they are to be promoted, such as one stage of effect balls to be promoted next.

  In addition, for example, it is conceivable that one or a plurality of effect balls determined by lottery among the six effect balls are determined as effect balls to be promoted. It should be noted that the lottery for determining the effect ball to be promoted may be performed with predetermined weighting. The method of weighting is arbitrary. It is possible to make it easier to be drawn as a promotion ball to be promoted. In this case as well, the promotion ball to be promoted may be updated at an arbitrary timing. It may be promoted.

<Control of rotating accessory 200 at the time of promotion>
Further, in the pachislot 1, the rotating combination item 200 may be controlled based on the result of the promotion lottery. As described above, the rotating accessory 200 is provided with a plurality of LEDs, and irradiates the centerpiece body 203 from behind. At the time of the promotion lottery, since the centerpiece body 203 appears due to the movement of the rotating accessory 200, the pachislot 1 controls the LED according to the result of the promotion lottery, and changes the centerpiece body 203 that can be visually recognized by the player to various colors. , The result of the promotion lottery can be informed to the player in a predictable manner. For example, a mode in which the result of the promotion lottery is notified by controlling the LED and emitting the eyeball body 203 in various colors such as white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow can be considered. The light emission of the plurality of LEDs provided on the rotating accessory 200 is controlled by a lamp control task described later. This is performed by requesting a pattern from the lamp control task.

  In the pachislot 1, six effect balls are stored in the sub RAM 103, but the relationship between the emission color of the LED and the effect ball can be arbitrarily set. For example, the light emission of the LED may be controlled based on the total number of promotion of six effect balls. As an example, the LED emits “white” when the total number of promoted balls is “1” or less, and the LED emits “blue” when the total number is “3” or less. When the total number is “5” or less, the LED emits “yellow”.

  Further, the light emission of the LED may be controlled based on one or more of the six effected balls or the type of the effected ball after the promotion. Specifically, as a result of the promotion lottery, based on the type of the production ball with the highest expectation among the six production balls, for example, when the production ball with the highest expectation is the lottery ball 1, the LED is set to “ The LED emits “blue” when the effect ball with the highest expectation is the lottery ball 2, and emits the LED with “blue” when the effect ball with the highest expectation is the lottery ball 3. Emits light.

  According to the latter method, any one or more of the six production balls is promoted to a production ball with high expectation, and the other production balls are still production balls with low expectation. Also, the LED emits light in a highly expected color such as red and rainbow, and as a result, the eyeball body 203 emits light in a highly expected color. On the other hand, when the six production balls are promoted evenly as a whole, and all the six production balls are production balls with relatively low expectations, the LED is a color with low expectations such as blue and yellow. , And as a result, the eyeball body 203 emits light in a color of low expectation.

  On the other hand, according to the former method, when the total number of promoted balls of six production balls is small, even if one of the six production balls is promoted to a production ball with high expectation, the LED is expected to be high. Light is emitted in a low degree of color, and as a result, the eyeball body 203 emits light in a low degree of expectation. Conversely, if the total number of promoted balls of the six production balls is large, even if all of the six production balls remain the production balls of relatively low expectations, the LED is a color with high expectations. , And as a result, the eyeball body 203 emits light in a highly expected color.

  Also, the former method and the latter method may be combined to control the light emission of the LED. More specifically, if the total number of promoted balls of six pieces is large, or if one or more of the six rendered balls are promoted to a highly expected one, the LED is changed to the expected degree. In the case where one or more of the production balls are promoted to the production balls with high expectation and the total number of promotion balls of the six production balls is large, the LED is not expected to emit light in a high color. It may be made to emit light with a high color.

  Further, in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, two lotteries, that is, the movable lottery of the rotating accessory 200 and the promotion lottery of the effect ball, are performed separately. Only the promotion lottery of the ball may be performed. Specifically, when it is determined that the effect ball is to be promoted as a result of the effect ball lottery, the rotating accessory 200 may be moved and the centerpiece body 203 may appear on the front.

  As in the present embodiment, by separately performing two types of lottery, that is, the movable lottery of the rotating accessory 200 and the promotion lottery of the effect ball, it is possible to create a game period in which the effect ball is promoted. From the player's point of view, during this game period, a chance period for promoting the effect ball is provided, so that the interest during the period in which the eyeball body 203 is visible can be improved.

  On the other hand, even in such a chance period, if the promotion lottery performed individually is not won, the effect ball is not promoted. Therefore, in the method of performing two lotteries individually as in this embodiment, Even if the eyeball body 203 becomes visible, the effect ball may not be promoted. In this regard, in the method of performing the rotation lottery 200 only when the promotion of the production ball is performed and the promotion of the production ball is determined, the production ball is always promoted when the main body 203 becomes visible. Therefore, the player can expect for the subsequent game.

<ART lottery table at reel stop>
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a reel stop ART lottery table referred to in the transition lottery (A) and (D) when the reel is stopped in the normal game state and the high-probability game state. The reel stop-time ART lottery table defines information on a lottery value corresponding to a lottery result for each effect ball set in the area 113A. Here, as described above, in the transfer lottery (A) and (D) when the reel is stopped, the effect ball set in the area 113A is the case where the combination of the symbols displayed when the reel is stopped is equal to or more than "bell winning". Only affects the lottery result. Therefore, the reel stoppage lottery table shown in FIG. 87 is a table that is referred to only when the effect ball is set in the area 113A and the combination of the symbols displayed when the reel is stopped is equal to or more than “bell winning”. is there.

  Referring to the reel-stop ART lottery table shown in FIG. 87, the probability of winning the CZ or the ART differs depending on the effect ball set in the area 113A. It can be understood that the winning is surely achieved.

[Game in high probability game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88 and FIG. 89, a flow of a game other than the shift lottery (D) in the high-probability game state will be described. As described above, the high-probability gaming state corresponds to the main-side bonus non-winning state RT4 gaming state. When the main side shifts from the bonus non-winning state RT4 gaming state to the bonus non-winning state RT1 gaming state, The probability game state is also ended, and the game shifts to the normal game state. The transition from the non-bonus winning state RT4 gaming state to the bonus non-winning state RT1 gaming state on the main side is, as described above, an incorrect answer to the pushing order bell or pushing order lip. Therefore, the high-probability game state ends at the timing when the sub side grasps that the combination of the symbols displayed at the time of the incorrect answer is displayed on the pushing order bell or the pushing order lip. Here, if the high-probability game state is immediately ended and the normal game state is entered even though the normal game state can be shifted to the high-probability game state, the interest is impaired. Therefore, in the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability gaming state, the pressing order of the correct answer is notified to the pressing order bell or the pressing order lip only a predetermined number of times.

  FIG. 88 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a game during the high-probability game state, and FIG. 89 is a data table referred to during the high-probability game state. The data table shown in FIG. 89 is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

<Overview of game flow during high-probability game state>
Referring to FIG. 88, if a combination of symbols related to the RT4 transition lip is displayed during the non-winning of the RT transition lottery in the normal gaming state, the main side shifts to the RT4 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state. At this point, the sub-side gaming state is the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state). In this normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), when the start operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts, the internal winning combination is determined under the control of the main control circuit 91. In the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), when an internal winning combination is determined, lottery of an avoidance point is performed based on the determined internal winning combination. When the avoidance point is obtained in this lottery, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the high-probability gaming state for the first time. The shift random determination (B) to the high-probability gaming state described above with reference to FIG. 66 corresponds to the random determination of the avoidance point.

  In the high-probability gaming state, a situation in which the main side shifts to the non-bonus winning RT1 gaming state based on the acquired avoidance point is avoided. Specifically, in the high-probability gaming state, when the start operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts, the internal winning combination is determined according to the control of the main control circuit 91. The sub-control circuit 101 determines whether or not there is a possibility of shifting to the non-bonus winning state RT1 gaming state based on the internal winning combination. More specifically, when the internal winning combination is a pressing order bell or a pressing order lip, the sub-control circuit 101 determines that there is a possibility of shifting to the bonus non-winning state RT1 gaming state.

  When there is a possibility of shifting to the bonus non-winning RT1 gaming state, the sub control circuit 101 determines that the push order bell or the push order lip determined as the internal winning combination is correct only when the avoidance point remains. Notify the pressing order. By receiving this notification, the player can perform the stop operation in the correct order of pushing, and the high-probability gaming state ends (that is, the state shifts to the RT1 gaming state in which the bonus is not won). ) Can be avoided. If there is no avoidance point, the player himself / herself selects the correct pushing order.

Thereafter, when the stop operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, the game state is shifted on the main side based on the combination of the displayed symbols. Specifically, when the bell spilled eye or the RT1 shift lip is displayed, the game shifts to the RT1 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, and otherwise, the RT4 gaming state in which the bonus is not won is maintained. . On the sub side, the sub control circuit 101 ends the high-probability game state and starts the normal game state from the next game when the main game state shifts to the non-bonus winning state RT1 game state. On the other hand, when the main-side gaming state maintains the RT4 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, the high-probability gaming state is maintained, and the next game is also set to the high-probability gaming state.
The above flow is the flow of the game in the high-probability game state.

<Avoidance point lottery table>
FIG. 89 is an avoidance point lottery table referred to in the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state). The avoidance point lottery table defines the number of replays determined as an internal winning combination during the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state) and information on a lottery value for the avoidance point to be added for each internal winning combination in the current game. . As shown in FIG. 89, in the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), different avoidance point lottery tables are referred to based on the number of times replays are determined as internal winning combinations. In FIG. 89, the number of times the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is different between “0” and “one or more”, but the number of times the table is different is not limited to this. .

  Referring to the avoidance point lottery table shown in FIG. 89, when the replay is determined as the internal winning combination at least once in the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), the probability that the avoidance point is given increases, and in particular, the replay is one. In a replay determined as an internal winning combination after being determined as an internal winning combination at least twice, an avoidance point is easily given. As described above, in the RT4 gaming state, a combination related to replay is highly likely to be determined as an internal winning combination. Therefore, if the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state) continues for several games, an avoidance point is given. Will be.

[Game in CZ]
Subsequently, the flow of a game during CZ will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 90 is a schematic diagram of the flow of a game in CZ, and FIGS. 91 to 95 are data tables referred to in CZ. The data tables shown in FIGS. 91 to 95 are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

<Outline of the game flow during CZ>
As described above, in the transition lottery (A) (D) in the normal gaming state or the high-probability gaming state, when the CZ is won, the gaming state transitions to the CZ. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit constitutes a lottery state start means, and when the CZ is won in the shift lottery, the sub game circuit shifts the gaming state to CZ. As shown in FIG. 90, in the first game after the shift to the CZ, when the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts with the start operation, the lottery of the CZ_MAP is performed. CZ is a complete run type chance zone in which a maximum of 30 games are continued, and ends when the lottery (C) for shifting to ART that is performed on the way is “maintained”. In the lottery (C) for shifting to the ART performed in the middle of the CZ, the winning probability of the ART increases as the CZ continues. CZ_MAP is used to set the number of games in which the ART winning probability increases in the lottery (C) for shifting to ART performed in the middle of CZ.

  When the CZ_MAP is randomly selected in the first game after the CZ shift, the invalid point is randomly selected. The lottery of the invalid point includes a lottery of an initial value performed in the first game after shifting to the CZ, and an additional lottery performed in each game during the CZ. The invalidation point is information that determines the number of times the transfer lottery (C) to the ART performed in the middle of the CZ is made “invalid”.

  Subsequently, a lottery of an effect ball to be set in the apocalypse is performed. Thereafter, in games other than the 30th game of CZ, it is determined whether or not a developed ball is set in the current game, that is, whether or not a developed ball is set in the area 113A. If an advanced ball is set in this game, there is a possibility that a lottery (C) for shifting to ART in the middle of CZ may be performed. If an advanced ball is not set, basically The transfer lottery (C) is not performed. More specifically, when an advanced ball is set, the invalid point is 0, and the pressing order bell is determined as an internal winning combination, a lottery (C) for shifting to ART in the middle of CZ is performed. In the lottery during the CZ, the winning probability of the ART differs depending on the CZ mode, and when the CZ mode is 1 or more, the ART is always won. The above-described CZ_MAP is a MAP for setting the number of games in which the CZ mode increases from 0 to 1 (see FIG. 92).

  Here, when the development ball is set in the current game and the invalid point is 1 or more, or when the avoidance ball is set in the current game, an effect indicating the current CZ mode is performed. It may be. Specifically, since the number of games in which the CZ mode rises from 0 to 1 is set in CZ_MAP, the current CZ mode is 1 or the number of games remaining after the CZ mode changes from 0 to 1 Whether to go up can be specified from CZ_MAP. When the current CZ mode is 1, or when the CZ mode increases from 0 to 1 in a few games (for example, two or three times) in the game, the sub control circuit 101 compares the CZ mode with the other cases. By performing an effect in a different mode, an effect indicating the current CZ mode can be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 90, in the game of the 30th game of the CZ, a lottery transition to the ART (C) is performed. In this case, the lottery (C) for shifting to the ART based on the CZ mode 2 is always performed, and the ART is won assuming that the chance zone has been completed. Then, when the CZ is completed as described above, the state shifts to a more advantageous ART gaming state. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes an advantageous state lottery means, and performs a lottery transition (C) to the ART when the CZ is completed (30 games).

  During the CZ, when the lottery (C) for the transition to the ART accompanying the developed ball is performed at the start, the following processing is performed. Specifically, after the stop operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, it is determined whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is equal to or more than "Bell prize", that is, the answer is correct in the order in which the bells are pushed. It is determined whether or not it has been done. Then, if the answer is correct in the order in which the bells are pushed, the result of the lottery (C) transition to the ART accompanying the development ball is invalidated regardless of whether or not the ART is won, and CZ continues. become. On the other hand, in the case where the answer is incorrect in the pushing order of the pushing order bell, the lottery result of the shift lottery (C) to the ART accompanying the development ball is maintained, and thereafter, the game state is shifted to the gaming state according to the lottery result. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a game state control means, performs an AT transition lottery (C) during CZ, and transitions the game state to the ART game state according to the lottery result.

  As described above, during CZ, as the CZ continues, the probability of winning the transfer lottery to the ART (C) increases, and in addition, when the CZ is completed, the transfer lottery to the ART (C) is always won, and Since the state is shifted to the advantageous ART gaming state, the longer the CZ is, the more advantageous the situation is for the player. Therefore, the player plays the game so that CZ continues. Here, since the termination condition of the CZ is that the lottery result of the shift lottery (C) to the ART is maintained, the player prevents the development ball from being set in the apocalypse, and the development ball in the apocalypse. In the game that is set, the pressing order bell is not determined as the internal winning combination.If the pressing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the development ball is set in the apocalypse, The game will be played so that the answer is correct in the order of the push.

<CZ_MAP lottery table>
FIG. 91 is a CZ_MAP lottery table referred to in the first game after the CZ shift. The CZ_MAP lottery table defines information on a lottery value for the type of CZ_MAP. When the process shifts to CZ, the sub control circuit 101 refers to the CZ_MAP lottery table and randomly selects CZ_MAP to be used in the CZ.

<CZ_MAP correspondence table>
FIG. 92 is a CZ_MAP correspondence table showing the contents of CZ_MAP which is randomly determined by the CZ_MAP random determination table. In each of the CZ_MAPs, a CZ mode is set for each continuous game number in the CZ. The CZ mode is information for setting the ART winning probability in the lottery (C) for shifting to the ART during CZ as described above, and is set such that the greater the numerical value of the CZ mode, the higher the ART winning probability. ing. As shown in FIG. 92, each of the CZ_MAPs is set so that the CZ mode is raised each time the number of continuous games in the CZ is increased, and is not lowered once the CZ mode is raised. That is, each CZ_MAP is set so that the number of games going from CZ mode 0 to CZ mode 1 is different. Further, in all CZ_MAPs, when the number of continuous games is 30, the CZ mode is set to 2.

  In this embodiment, only three types of CZ modes, CZ modes 0, 1, and 2, are provided as the CZ mode. It is sufficient if the setting is made so that the mode does not decrease when the mode rises, and the types of the CZ mode are not limited to three types.

<Invalid point lottery table>
FIG. 93 is an invalid point lottery table. The invalid point lottery table randomly selects an invalid point that invalidates the transfer lottery (C) to ART performed when the pressing order bell is determined as an internal winning combination in a game in which a developed ball in CZ is set. Used for When the invalidation point is 1 or more, the lottery transition to ART (C) performed when the pressing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the developed ball is set is invalidated. When the invalid point is 1 or more, the transfer lottery (C) may be performed once and then invalidated, or the transfer lottery (C) may not be performed at all.

  As described above, the lottery of the invalid point includes the lottery of the initial value performed in the first game after shifting to the CZ, and the additional lottery performed in each game during the CZ. FIG. 93 (A) is an invalid point lottery table used for initial value random determination, and defines information on a random determination value for an invalid point determined as an initial value. Further, (B) and (C) of FIG. 93 are invalid point lottery tables used for additional lottery, and the lottery for invalid points to be added for each type of effect ball and internal winning combination set in the current game. Specify the value information.

<Direction ball lottery table>
FIG. 94 is an effect ball random determination table used when effect balls to be set in the apocalypse during CZ are randomly selected. The information of the lottery value for the effect ball set for each final effect ball in the set is defined. The final effect ball in the set is, for example, an effect ball set in the region 113E farthest from the current game. Referring to FIG. 94, if the final effect ball in the set is a developed ball, the developed ball is not randomly selected. That is, during the CZ, two consecutive development balls are not set in the apocalypse areas 113A to 113E. On the other hand, when the final effect ball in the set is other (blank or avoidance ball), a developed ball is randomly selected with a predetermined probability.

  During the CZ, either the developed ball or the avoidance ball is set in the apocalypse. Avoidance balls are not drawn. Here, the avoidance ball is set in the apocalypse by rewriting the set advanced ball when the invalid point is 1 or more and the developed ball is set in the apocalypse. In addition, when the invalid point is 1 or more, the timing of rewriting the developed ball to the avoidance ball is arbitrary. For example, among the regions 113A to 113E, the developed ball may not be rewritten as the avoidance ball until the region 113B is reached. Of course, the developed ball may be rewritten as the avoidance ball at the time of the region 113E. Alternatively, the end of the CZ may be avoided by maintaining the developed ball even at the time of the area 113A and invalidating the transfer lottery (C) itself.

<ART lottery table in CZ>
FIG. 95 is a CZ ART lottery table referred to in the transition to ART during CZ lottery (C). The CZ-mode ART lottery table defines information on a lottery value for the lottery result of the shift lottery (C) for each of the CZ mode and the BB winning. Referring to the ART random determination table during CZ, when the BB is not won, the probability of winning the ART is low when the CZ mode is 0, and the ART is always won when the CZ mode is 1 or more. In the CZ mode, the ART winning probability in the transfer lottery (C) and the ART advantage at the time of the ART winning need only be greater for the player as the numerical value is larger, and the ART is always won in the CZ modes 1 and 2. You don't need to set it up.

[Game during BB]
Subsequently, a flow of a game during the bonus state (also referred to as “BB”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 101. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a part of the correspondence between the types of winning combinations managed on the main (main control circuit 91) side and the abbreviations of winning combinations managed on the sub (sub-control circuit 101) side during BB. FIG. 97 is a schematic diagram of the flow of a game during BB, and FIGS. 98 to 101 are data tables referred to during BB. The data tables shown in FIGS. 98 to 101 are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

<Correspondence between main side / sub side of winning combination>
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a part of the correspondence between the types of winning combinations managed on the main (main control circuit 91) side and the abbreviations of winning combinations managed on the sub (sub-control circuit 101) side during BB. is there. On the sub side, the winning combination on the main side is managed by abbreviations shown in the correspondence table of FIG. The correspondence other than the winning combination shown in FIG. 96 is the same as that in FIG.

<Overview of the game flow during BB>
As shown in FIG. 97, a game during BB is performed with the operation of BB as an opportunity. When the operation of the BB is performed, the BB mode is set to 0. Here, the BB mode is information for setting the ART winning probability in the lottery (F) for shifting to the ART performed during the BB. The pachislo 1 of the present embodiment has BB modes 0 to 5 as BB modes, and the greater the numerical value of the BB mode, the higher the ART winning probability.

  Subsequently, when the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started during the BB with a start operation, a lottery (F) for shifting to the ART performed at the start during the BB is performed. In the start lottery (F) at the start, regardless of the above-described BB mode, if the abbreviation “7 Aligned Lips” on the sub side is determined as the internal winning combination, ART is won, and in other cases, The ART is not won.

  Subsequently, a mode up lottery of the BB mode is performed based on the internal winning combination during BB. In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, a winning combination that has a possibility of mode up for each current BB mode is defined. Although the details will be described later, the pachislot 1 is set so that as the BB mode increases, the types of winning combinations that may be upgraded are reduced.

  Thereafter, when the payout of medals is performed in response to the stop operation, it is determined whether or not the operation of the BB is terminated. In the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, when more than 59 medals are paid out during the BB, the operation of the BB ends. If no more than 59 medals have been paid out, the operation of the BB continues. On the other hand, if more than 59 medals have been paid out, a lottery (F) for shifting to ART at the end of BB is performed. The shift lottery (F) at the end of this is a lottery performed in accordance with the BB mode, and the greater the numerical value of the BB mode, the higher the ART winning probability.

  When BB ends in a state where an ART has been won, ART (enemy decision ART) starts from the next game. Here, as shown in FIG. 17, during the BB, the combination according to JACIN is transferred to the high RT state (RT4 game state) in a situation in which the combination according to JACIN is carried over as the internal winning combination, and the symbol according to the combination according to JACIN. When the combination is displayed, the state shifts to the low RT state (RT2 game state). After the end of the BB, the RT game state during the BB is maintained, and after the end of the BB, the state becomes the high RT state or the low RT state depending on the result of the game during the BB.

  In the pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment, when BB ends in a state where an ART has been won, the ART may be executed at the timing of transition to the high RT state, and regardless of the type of the RT gaming state, ART (more specifically, AT) may be executed. That is, when BB ends in the low RT state, the enemy-determined ART may be started without waiting for the transition to the high RT state. In this case, the enemy-determining ART, in spite of the low probability that the role related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination, informs the pressing order of the correct answer according to the pressing order, and, in accordance with the control during the enemy-determining ART, performs the apocalypse. A production ball is set. As described later, during the enemy determination ART, the HP of the ally character may increase as a result of the ally ball being set in the apocalypse, and if the HP of the ally character increases, the battle ART is won thereafter The possibility of (continuation) increases. Even if the enemy-determining ART is started in the low RT state, the advantage of increasing the HP of the ally character (that is, increasing the degree of expectation of continuing the ART gaming state) can be given to the player, so that the low RT state is maintained. It is possible to reduce the disadvantage that the player who has finished BB receives.

<ART lottery table at start during BB>
FIG. 98 is a BB start-time ART lottery table referred to in the transfer random determination (F) at the start during BB. The ART lottery table at the start during BB is referred to when the abbreviation “7 Aligned Lips” on the sub side is determined, and defines information on the lottery value for the result of the lottery transition to ART. As shown in FIG. 98, when the abbreviation “7 Aligned Lips” on the sub side is determined, ART is always won in the shift lottery (F) at the start.

  Here, referring to the winning combination correspondence table shown in FIG. 96, between the JAC2 flags (the state in which JACIN2 is carried over as an internal winning combination) and between the JAC3 flags (in the state in which JACIN3 is carried over as an internal winning combination), the main Only three of “F_312 upper 7 alignment” to “F_2nd cross 7 alignment” on the side are “7 alignment lip”. On the other hand, between the JAC1 flags (the state in which JACIN1 is carried over as an internal winning combination), “F_312 upper 7 lip” to “F_2nd cross 7” on the main side include “F_J1 upper 7 lip” to “F_J1 cross 7”. A total of six, including the three "rips," is a "seven lip." Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1, the probability of winning in the ART in the shift lottery (F) at the start differs depending on the type of the carryover combination carried over during BB.

<Mode up lottery table during BB>
FIG. 99 and FIG. 100 are BB mode up lottery tables referred to in the BB mode mode up lottery. The BB mode up lottery table defines information on lottery values for the current BB mode and the lottery result of the mode up lottery for each internal winning combination.

  Referring to the BB mode up lottery table, if the current BB mode is 0, if any of the pressing order bell, common bell, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, or chanlip is determined as the internal winning combination, BB The mode will go up. In other words, there are six types of winning combinations that may be upgraded from the BB mode 0. Similarly, there are five types of winning combinations that have the possibility of mode up from BB mode 1, four types of winning combinations that have the possibility of mode up from BB mode 2, and There are three types of winning combinations that can be raised, and there are two types of winning combinations that can be upgraded from the BB mode 4.

  The winning combinations that have the possibility of mode-up from the BB mode 4 are included in the winning combinations that have the possibility of mode-up in the BB mode 3, and similarly, the winning combinations that have the possibility of mode-up from the BB mode 3. Is included in the winning combinations that are likely to be upgraded in the BB mode 2, and the winning combinations that are likely to be upgraded in the BB mode 2 are included in the winning combinations that are likely to be upgraded in the BB mode 1. , A winning combination that has a possibility of mode up from BB mode 1 is included in a winning combination that has a possibility of mode up in BB mode 0.

  As described above, in the pachislot 1, as the BB mode goes up, the types of winning combinations that are likely to be mode-up are set to be smaller, and the winning combinations that may be mode-up when the BB mode is high are: , BB mode may be in a low mode.

  In the BB mode up lottery tables illustrated in FIGS. 99 and 100, the BB mode can be skipped step by step and the mode can be increased (for example, the BB mode can be changed from BB mode 0 to BB mode 1 without going through BB mode 1). The mode can be increased to two or more). In this regard, in the BB mode, the BB mode up lottery table may be configured so that the mode is always upgraded only one step at a time. According to such a configuration, since the BB mode is increased only by one step, the degree of expectation during staying in each BB mode is reduced. Can be set to increase the degree of expectation. As a result, it is easy to go up to a certain BB mode during BB, so that it is easy to create a game mode in which the BB mode gradually increases in mode.

  Here, referring to the BB medium mode lottery table shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, when the internal winning combination is a champion, the BB mode is likely to go up. In addition, referring to the winning combination correspondence table shown in FIG. 96, between the JAC1 flags and the JAC3 flags, only five of “F_J3 chance lip 1” to “F_J3 cherry lip” on the main side are “chan lip”. On the other hand, among the JAC2 flags, a total of 10 “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” plus “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” to “F_J3 chance lip 1” to “F_J3 "It has become. Therefore, in pachislot 1, the probability of raising the BB mode differs depending on the type of carryover carried over during BB, and as a result, the transition at the end of BB according to the type of carryover carried over during BB In the lottery (F), the probability of winning the ART is different.

<ART lottery table at end of BB>
FIG. 101 is an ART lottery table at the end of BB referred to in the shift lottery (F) at the end of BB. The ART lottery table at the end of BB defines information on a lottery value for the result of the lottery transition to ART for each state during BB and each BB mode. Note that the ART lottery table at the end of BB in FIG. 101A is referred to in the main gaming state “RB gaming state in bonus state” and “RT4 gaming state in bonus state”, and BB in FIG. 101B. The end-time ART lottery table is referred to in the main gaming state “RT0 gaming state in bonus state” and “RT2 gaming state in bonus state” (see FIG. 17).

[Game during ART]
Subsequently, a flow of a game during the ART gaming state (also referred to as “during ART”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 121. FIG. 102 is a schematic diagram of the game flow during the enemy-determining ART, FIG. 103 is a schematic diagram showing the game flow during the battle ART, and FIGS. 104 to 121 are referred to during the ART. This is a data table. The data tables shown in FIGS. 104 to 121 are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

<Overview of game flow during ART>
As shown in FIG. 102, when the lottery transition to the ART is won in the general game state (normal game state, high-probability game state, CZ) or the bonus state, the sub-control circuit 101 determines the state of the lottery transition. The ART state is randomly determined. The ART state is a state in which the degree of expectation regarding the continuation of the ART game state is different, and basically, the ART state having a larger numerical value is more likely to continue the ART (advantageous for the player). When the ART state is determined and the main game state shifts to the non-bonus winning RT4 game state, the enemy-determined ART starts.

  When the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts with the start operation during the enemy determination ART, a lottery of the effect ball set in the apocalypse is performed. In the enemy determination ART, effect balls such as boss balls 1 to 8 for determining an enemy character to battle during the battle ART and ally balls for increasing the HP of the ally character are set in the apocalypse. . The ART state determined before the start of the enemy-determining ART is referred to in the lottery of the effect ball, and as the ART state increases, the number of boss balls in which the ally character easily wins in the apocalypse is set.

  The lottery of the effect ball is performed based on the boss MAP data defined in the boss MAP described later and the ART state. During the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP "1" is set first, and thereafter, the boss MAP having a larger value is set as the same enemy determination ART continues.

  If the boss ball is set in the apocalypse immediately after the start of the enemy-determining ART, the enemy-determining ART may end immediately after the start. Therefore, at the start of the enemy-determining ART, the guaranteed number of times that no effect ball is set in the apocalypse may be set. By doing so, the enemy-determining ART continues for the minimum number of guarantees, so that it is possible to prevent the enemy-determining ART from ending immediately after starting. The guaranteed number of times may be a predetermined fixed number of times (for example, five games) or may be determined by lottery at the start of the enemy determination ART. In addition, if the number of guarantees is different between the enemy-determined ART (so-called first hit) started when the lottery transfer to the ART is won and the enemy-determined ART started when the ART gaming state is continued. It is good also as making it. Also in this case, the fixed number of guarantees may be different in both cases, and the lottery probability of the number of guarantees may be different in both cases. Further, when the ART gaming state continues, the guaranteed number of times may be made different depending on the type of the enemy character who has competed in the battle ART during the continuation. Also in this case, the fixed number of guarantees may be made different or the lottery probability of the number of guarantees may be made different depending on the type of the enemy character who has competed in the battle ART during continuation.

  Subsequently, the HP of the ally character is determined. The HP of the ally character determined here is used in the subsequent battle ART. Note that the HP of the ally character is determined based on an initial determination made in the first game of the enemy determination ART and a lottery of an additional ride described later performed when an ally ball is set in the apocalypse.

  The initial decision is different depending on whether the current HP of the ally character is less than the initial value (HP50). The value is determined, and if the value is equal to or greater than the initial value, the HP of the current ally character is maintained as it is. In the pachislot 1, if an ally character wins in the battle ART, the enemy determination ART is performed again. At this time, since the HP of the ally character fluctuates according to the result of the continued ART (for example, the HP increase by the ally ball (additional lottery) in the continued enemy determination ART of the ART, or the battle ART of the continued ART In a new enemy decision ART after the enemy ball (enemy attack) due to a middle enemy ball (enemy attack), the HP of the ally character is set according to the variation from the initial value.

  Subsequently, the sub-control circuit 101 performs control according to the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game. For example, when a boss ball is set, it is determined whether or not a pressing order bell (which may include a common bell) is determined as an internal winning combination, and the pressing order bell is determined as an internal winning combination. If so, the boss corresponding to the type of boss ball set in the apocalypse in this game is determined as the opponent in the battle ART. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes an opponent determination unit, and determines an opponent in the battle ART according to the boss balls 1 to 8 set in the apocalypse in the current game.

  When the opponent of the battle ART is determined in this way, the HP of the enemy character to be the opponent is determined. The determination of the HP of the enemy character is performed based on the internal winning combination of the next game in which the opponent is determined. For example, when the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the HP of the enemy character is reduced. Is determined. When the opponent is determined in the enemy-determining ART (the bell is pressed in the order of boss balls) and the HP of the enemy character is determined (internal winning of the next game), the enemy-determining ART ends and the next game starts. The battle ART will start. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the second advantageous state starting means, and determines the HP of the opponent and the enemy character of the opponent based on the boss ball set during the enemy determination ART. End the enemy determination ART and start the battle ART from the next game.

  On the other hand, if the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a friend ball, the sub-control circuit 101 performs an additional lottery of HP of the friend character. In the additional lottery, the HP of the ally character is increased (added) based on the internal winning combination. More specifically, when a friend ball is set in the apocalypse in the current game, an extra lottery is won for “bell winning” or more, and the HP of the friend character increases. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a numerical value adding means, and when the ally ball is set in the apocalypse, performs the additional lottery of the HP of the ally character based on the internal winning combination. Is increased (added) based on the HP. Note that "bell winning" means that a pressing order bell or a common bell is determined as an internal winning combination, and "bell winning" or more means "bell winning" or pure loss, watermelon, weak cherry, strong One of rare combinations such as cherry and chanlip is determined as an internal winning combination.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the enemy determination ART is repeatedly performed until an opponent is determined. On the other hand, when the opponent is determined in the enemy determination ART and the HP of the enemy character is determined, the enemy determination ART ends, and the battle ART starts from the next game. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the first advantageous state control means, and determines an enemy character to battle during the battle ART, determines the HP of the ally character, and adds lottery when the ART continues. And so on.

  As shown in FIG. 103, when the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts in response to the start operation during the battle ART, lottery of the effect ball set in the apocalypse is performed. In the battle ART, effect balls such as friendly balls, enemy balls, and awakening balls for determining the character to attack are set in the apocalypse. As will be described later, parameters such as attack power, defense power, and speed are set for each enemy character, and the effect ball is randomly selected according to the speed of the enemy character. Specifically, an enemy character having a higher speed has a higher probability of randomly selecting an enemy ball, and an enemy character having a lower speed has a higher probability of randomly selecting an ally ball.

  Subsequently, during the battle ART, a battle between the ally character and the enemy character is performed based on the effect ball set in the internal winning combination and the apocalypse. Specifically, if the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an ally ball or an awakening ball, the ally character attacks the enemy character by "bell win" or more, and the enemy character's HP Decreases. In addition, the production ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an awakening ball, and in the case of "bell win" or more, the ally ball is stocked, and the enemy ball set in the apocalypse is the same as the stocked ball Rewritten as a friendly ball.

  On the other hand, if the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball, the enemy character attacks the ally character by “bell winning”, the HP of the ally character decreases, and the “rare role” In the "winning", the ally character attacks the enemy character, and the HP of the enemy character decreases. The “rare combination winning” means that any of the rare combinations such as pure loss, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, and chanlip are determined as the internal winning combination.

  Here, the amount of decrease in the HP of the ally character at the time of attacking the enemy character differs according to the attack power set for the enemy character. The lower the enemy character is, the smaller the decrease amount of the HP of the ally character is. Similarly, the amount of decrease in the enemy character's HP when an ally character attacks differs depending on the defense strength set for the enemy character. The lower the enemy character, the greater the amount of decrease in the enemy character's HP. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a numerical value subtracting means, and reduces the HP of the ally character when the effect ball set in the apocalypse during the battle ART is an enemy ball (third effect information). (Subtraction), and the HP of the enemy character is reduced (subtracted) in the case of an ally ball (fourth effect information).

  As shown in FIG. 103, the battle ART ends when the HP of either the ally character or the enemy character becomes 0 as a result of the battle. Specifically, when the HP of the ally character becomes 0, the battle ART ends and the ART game state for one set ends. On the other hand, when the HP of the enemy character becomes 0, the battle ART ends without changing the number of sets in the ART gaming state. If the number of sets in the ART gaming state remains at the end of the battle ART, the ART gaming state continues, and the battle ART shifts to a new enemy-determining ART. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes the second advantageous state control means and the advantageous state control means, and sets the effect ball attacked by the enemy character in the apocalypse during the battle ART, the ally character and the enemy character , The end of the ART gaming state based on the result of the battle, or the transition to the enemy-determining ART based on the continuation of the ART gaming state. Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a continuation control unit, and when the HP of the enemy character becomes 0 as a result of the battle or the HP of the ally character becomes 0 as a result of the battle, the sub game circuit 101 is in the ART gaming state. When the number of sets remains, the ART gaming state is continued, and the gaming state is shifted from the battle ART to the enemy-determining ART.

<ART state lottery table>
FIG. 104 is an ART state lottery table which is referred to to randomly determine the ART state when winning the transition to ART. The ART state lottery table defines information on a lottery value with respect to the ART state for each situation at the time of winning the lottery transition to the ART. For example, when the lottery (A) and (D) for shifting to the ART performed during the normal game state and the high-probability game state is won, refer to the ART state lottery table in the “normal game state, high-probability game state” column. Then, the ART state is randomly selected. Similarly, in the case where the lottery (C) for shifting to the ART during CZ is won, the ART state is randomly selected with reference to the ART state lottery table corresponding to the CZ mode during CZ. In addition, when the lottery (F) for shifting to the ART during the bonus state is won, the ART state is randomly determined by referring to the ART state random determination table in the “bonus state column”.

  Referring to FIG. 104, in the case where the transfer lottery is won in the CZ mode 2, the ART state having a larger numerical value is randomly selected than in the case where the transfer lottery is won in the CZ modes 0 and 1, or in other cases. Become. Here, the CZ mode 2 is a CZ mode when the vehicle completes the CZ, and the ART state is a state in which the ART is more advantageous to the player as the numerical value is larger (the ART is more likely to continue). It can be seen that when the run is completed, not only the transition to the ART but also a more advantageous state for the player is obtained.

<Various data tables referenced during enemy determination ART>
Subsequently, various data tables referred to during the enemy-determining ART will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Boss MAP lottery table>
FIG. 105 is a boss MAP random determination table for randomly determining a boss MAP for determining an effect ball to be set in the apocalypse in the enemy determination ART. During the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP “1” is set first, and then, when the boss MAP data defined for each boss MAP is 0, a new boss MAP is randomly selected. The boss MAP lottery table in FIG. 105 is a table that is referred to when the boss MAP data is 0 to randomly select a new boss MAP.

  Referring to the boss MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 105, it can be seen that in the pachislot 1, every time a boss MAP is randomly selected, a boss MAP having a larger numerical value is more likely to be randomly selected. Specifically, the boss MAP "3" is likely to be randomly drawn from the boss MAP "1", and similarly, the boss MAP "5" is likely to be randomly determined from the boss MAP "3". On the other hand, when the boss MAP “4” is randomly selected from the boss MAP “1”, the boss MAP “3” is easily selected from the boss MAP “4”, so that the numerical value of the boss MAP once decreases. However, since the boss MAP "3" is randomly selected from the subsequent boss MAP "3", the boss MAP having a larger numerical value is randomly selected every time the boss MAP is randomly selected.

  Referring to the boss MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 105, if the boss MAP is updated to the boss MAP “52” as a result of the boss MAP being repeated, then the boss MAP “52” or the boss MAP It can be seen that only one of “53” is randomly selected and no other boss MAP is randomly selected. As will be described later in detail, when these boss MAPs "52" and "53" are set as the boss MAP, the effect ball advantageous to the player is determined as the effect ball set in the apocalypse. Therefore, the boss MAPs “52” and “53” set as a result of the repetition of the boss MAP lottery can be said to be the ceiling of the boss MAP. The ball will be set in Revelation.

<Boss MAP data correspondence table>
The boss MAP defines boss MAP data for determining the effect ball to be set in the apocalypse. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of boss MAP data defined for each boss MAP. As shown in FIG. 106, the boss MAP1 defines boss MAP data “1” for the first to fourth games, and boss MAP data “0” for the fifth game. When the boss MAP data “0” is defined, a new boss MAP is randomly selected with reference to the boss MAP random determination table shown in FIG.

<Entrance Decision Art Production Ball Lottery Table>
FIG. 107 and FIG. 108 are production ball lottery tables during the enemy determination ART for determining the production ball to be set in the apocalypse in the enemy determination ART. The effect ball lottery table during ART defines boss MAP data and information on the lottery value of the effect ball set for each ART state. In FIG. 107A, the information of the lottery value for the effect ball is defined for the boss MAP data “0”. When the MAP lottery is prioritized, it is not used.

  Referring to FIG. 107 and FIG. 108, when the boss MAP data is “1”, “2”, “4”, the effect ball to be randomly drawn is substantially constant irrespective of the ART state, while the boss MAP data “3”. In the case of "", the effect ball to be drawn by lot differs greatly depending on the ART state. For example, referring to the ART state “28” or more in the case of the boss MAP data “3”, it can be seen that one of the boss balls 7 and 8 is determined as the effect ball. The boss balls 7 and 8 are effect balls for which the continuation of the battle ART is determined when they are determined as opponents (see FIG. 68). Referring to the boss MAP data correspondence table shown in FIG. 106, it can be seen that the boss MAP data "3" is defined in many boss MAPs, and in many cases, the effect ball is produced based on the boss MAP data "3". It can be seen that is randomly selected.

  From this, it can be seen that the greater the value of the ART state, the more advantageous the ART for the player, and since at the time of CZ completion, "28" or more is randomly selected as the ART state (see FIG. 104), It can be seen that the ART to be transferred is easy to continue.

  Referring to FIGS. 106 and 107, when the boss MAP is “52”, “4” is defined as the boss MAP data, and one of the boss balls 7, 8 for which the continuation of the battle ART is determined. It turns out that it is determined as a production ball. Similarly, when the boss MAP is “53”, “2” is defined as the boss MAP data, and it can be seen that the ally ball that increases the physical strength (HP) of the ally character is determined as the effect ball.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 105, the boss MAPs “52” and “53” are the ceiling of the boss MAP set when the lottery of the boss MAP is repeated. Then, when the ceiling reaches the ceiling of the boss MAP, only the boss balls 7, 8 for which continuation is determined or the ally ball for increasing the HP of the ally character are set in the apocalypse, and the subsequent ART is easily continued. It turns out that it becomes. That is, in the present embodiment, the boss MAP lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76 is a boss MAP data (lottery value information) for determining the effect ball to be set in the apocalypse during the enemy determination ART. A lottery information storage unit that stores a plurality of MAPs (lottery information) is configured. Further, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a lottery information determination unit, determines a boss MAP by referring to the boss MAP lottery table, and determines an effect ball to be set in the apocalypse based on the boss MAP. Then, the boss MAP is updated to another boss MAP.

<Artistic ball upgrade lottery table during enemy determination ART>
FIG. 109 is an enemies-determined ART effect ball upgrade lottery table that is referred to in order to rewrite the enemy balls set in the apocalypse during the enemy-determined ART to the friendly balls. The effect ball upgrade lottery table during the enemy-determined ART defines information on a lottery value with respect to the number of stocked ally balls for each internal winning combination. When the stock of one or more ally balls is determined by this lottery, the boss balls are rewritten into ally balls by an amount corresponding to the number of stocks. The timing at which the boss ball is rewritten to a friend ball is arbitrary. Referring to FIG. 109, if a rare role (net loss, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, chan lip) is determined as an internal winning combination during the enemy-determining ART, friendly balls are stocked.

(Rewrite to friendly ball)
Here, with reference to FIG. 155, an operation example when the boss ball is rewritten to a friend ball will be described. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an outline of the operation when the boss ball is rewritten to a friend ball during the enemy determination ART.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (a), in the present game, in the sub RAM 103, the boss ball 1 is stored in the storage area "1", the boss ball 2 is stored in the storage area "2", the boss ball 1 is stored in the storage area "3", and the storage area. The boss ball 4 is stored in “4”, the ally ball is stored in the storage area “5”, and the boss ball 3 is stored in the storage area “6”. As described above, the effect balls stored in the storage areas “1” to “5” of the sub RAM 103 are set (displayed) in the apocalypse, and the effects stored in the storage area “6” of the sub RAM 103. The ball is not set in the Apocalypse (hidden).

  When the rewriting to the friendly ball is not performed (the stock of the friendly ball is “0”), the effect ball stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 103 slides as shown in FIG. In the storage areas “1” to “5” of the game, the effect balls stored in the storage areas “2” to “6” of the current game are stored. The performed effect ball is newly stored.

  On the other hand, if there is a stock of friendly balls, the boss balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are rewritten as friendly balls. FIG. 155 (b) is an example of rewriting the boss ball when the stock of the ally ball is “2”. When the stock of the friend ball is “2”, the two boss balls are rewritten as the friend ball. Since the effect ball stored in the storage area “1” of the current game does not exist in the next game, in the example shown in FIG. The two boss balls have been rewritten as friendly balls in the next game.

  In the example shown in FIG. 155 (b), the boss balls are rewritten in order from the boss ball on the near side (the storage area "1" side of the storage areas "1" to "6"). The method of determining the boss ball is arbitrary. For example, priorities may be assigned to the boss balls 1 to 8, and a boss ball to be rewritten may be determined according to the priority order. It is also preferable to set the priorities based on, for example, the continuation expectation degree of the battle ART. In other words, the continuation expectation degree of the battle ART may be set for each of the boss balls 1 to 8, and may be determined as the boss ball to be rewritten in order from the boss ball having the lower (or higher) continuation expectation degree.

  It is also preferable to set the priority order based on the number of stocked friend balls. For example, when the stock number of the friendly ball is a predetermined number (for example, “1”), the boss ball to be rewritten is determined based on the first priority set for the boss balls 1 to 8, When the stock number of the friendly ball is a specific number (for example, “2”), the boss ball to be rewritten is determined based on the second priority set for the boss balls 1 to 8.

  It is also preferable to set the priority order based on the internal winning combination at the time of stocking the friend ball. For example, when stocking of a teammate ball is performed when a predetermined combination (for example, watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, the first priority set for the boss balls 1 to 8 is determined. If a boss ball to be rewritten is determined, and a specific role (for example, a chance lip) is determined as an internal winning combination, stock of a friend ball is performed. The boss ball to be rewritten is determined based on the set second priority.

  The boss ball is rewritten to the ally ball in accordance with the stock of the ally ball, thereby increasing the HP of the ally character and making it difficult for the HP of the ally character to become “0” in the battle ART, so that the battle ART is easily continued. Become. Here, as described above, the boss balls 7 and 8 are boss balls for which the continuation of the battle ART is determined. If the boss balls 7 and 8 are rewritten as friendly spheres, the battle ART becomes difficult to continue. Therefore, the boss balls 7 and 8 may be maintained without being rewritten as friendly balls. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a specific role rewriting means, and when the rare role is internally won, the sub-control circuit 101 rewrites the boss ball stored in the sub RAM 103 to a friendly ball, and sets the target boss ball to the boss ball. If it is 7, 8, it is maintained without being rewritten as a friend ball. Further, the sub-control circuit 101 determines the boss ball to be rewritten in the first priority based on the internal winning of the predetermined combination, and rewrites the boss ball in the second priority based on the internal winning of the specific combination. Determine the target boss ball.

  FIG. 155 (c) is a diagram illustrating an example of rewriting the boss ball when the boss ball 7 or the boss ball 8 is stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 103. In FIG. 155 (c), the stock of the friend ball is “2”, and the boss ball 1, boss ball 7, boss ball 1, boss ball 4, A friend ball and a boss ball 3 are stored. When rewriting the boss ball in order from the boss ball on the near side, the boss ball 7 and the boss ball 1 stored in the storage areas “2” and “3” are determined as the boss balls to be rewritten. In this case, while the boss ball 1 is rewritten to a friend ball, the boss ball 7 is maintained without being rewritten to a friend ball.

  In the example shown in FIG. 155 (c), for the boss ball 7 to be rewritten, the boss ball 7 is maintained while a friendly ball is inserted in front of the boss ball 7. As a result, the ally ball inserted in front of the boss ball 7 to be rewritten is stored in the next game storage area “1”, and the boss ball 7 is maintained in the next game storage area “2”. Is done. Then, in the next game storage area “3”, friend balls rewritten from the boss ball 1 are stored, and in the next game storage areas “4” to “6”, the current game storage areas “4” to “6” are stored. An effect ball having the same content as “6” is stored.

  In the example shown in FIG. 155 (c), while determining the boss ball 7 as the boss ball to be rewritten, the boss ball 7, 8 for which the continuation of the battle ART is determined by inserting a friend ball in front of the boss ball 7. However, the boss balls 7 and 8 may not be determined as boss balls to be rewritten in the first place.

  It is disadvantageous for the player that the boss ball whose continuation is confirmed is rewritten to a friend ball. It is suitable. Since the effect ball stored in the storage area “6” is not set in the apocalypse and is not displayed, even if it is a boss ball whose continuation is determined, it can be rewritten as a friendly ball. Good. Such a non-displayed effect ball cannot be grasped by the player, so that the player does not feel dissatisfied even if the boss ball whose continuation is determined is rewritten to a friend ball.

<Enemy Deciding ART Middle Friend Power Addition Lottery Table>
FIG. 110 is an enemy-determined ART medium ally power addition lottery table referred to at the time of additional lottery of the HP of the ally character performed when the effect ball set in the apocalypse is the ally ball in this game. The enemy-determined ART medium ally power addition lottery table defines the amount of additional HP of the ally character for each internal winning combination. Referring to FIG. 110, it can be seen that, in the present game, when the teammate ball is set in the apocalypse, the HP of the teammate character increases after "bell win".

<Boss power lottery table during enemy determination ART>
FIG. 111 is an enemy-determining ART boss power lottery table that is referred to when determining the HP of the enemy character in the next game in which the enemy character of the opponent is determined. The enemy-determining ART boss power lottery table defines information on a lottery value for the enemy character's HP for each internal winning combination. Referring to FIG. 111, it can be seen that when a rare combination other than a pure loss is won, the HP of the enemy character is determined to be reduced. In addition, the boss power lottery table during the enemy determination ART may be a common table for all enemy characters to be opponents, or a different table may be provided for each enemy character. By providing a different table for each enemy character, it is possible to determine the HP according to the personality of the enemy character.

<Various data tables referenced during the battle ART>
Next, various data tables referred to during the battle ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 121. Prior to description of these data tables, characteristics of each enemy character will be described.

<Boss status correspondence table>
FIG. 112 is a boss status correspondence table. The bosses 1 to 8 as opponent enemy characters have statuses such as attack power, defense power, and speed, respectively. For example, the boss 1 is of the attack type, and has a high attack power and a low speed. On the other hand, the boss 5 is of a speed type, and has a low attack power but a high speed. During the battle ART, a battle between the ally character and the enemy character is performed according to such characteristics of the enemy character.

  Note that the bosses 7 and 8 are enemy characters for which the continuation of the ART gaming state is determined when the boss is determined as an opponent. As described above, the ART gaming state is such that if the HP of the enemy character becomes 0 before the HP of the ally character becomes 0, or if the HP of the ally character becomes 0, the number of sets of the ART gaming state remains. If you continue. The manner in which the ART gaming state is continued when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined is arbitrary. For example, when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as the enemy characters, the HP of the enemy character is always set to 0 before the ally character. When the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as enemy characters, the number of sets in the ART gaming state always becomes 1 or more (for example, when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as enemy characters). In this case, the number of sets in the ART gaming state may be added by 1 or the number of sets in the ART gaming state may not be subtracted even if the HP of the ally character becomes 0.) In this regard, in the present embodiment, when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as enemy characters, the ART game state is increased even if the HP of the ally character becomes 0 by adding 1 to the set number of the ART game state. By making sure that the number of sets remains, the ART game state is continued when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined. Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, if the HP of the bosses 7 and 8 can be set to 0, it is also possible to shift to a so-called additional specialization zone. The type of the additional specialization zone is arbitrary, but in the case of the present embodiment, it is conceivable that the number of sets in the ART gaming state is added or the HP of the ally character is added as the additional specialization zone.

<Battle MAP lottery table>
FIG. 113 to FIG. 115 are battle MAP lottery tables for randomly determining a battle MAP for determining an effect ball to be set in the apocalypse in the battle ART. The battle MAP lottery table is provided for each type of enemy character that is an opponent, and defines information on a lottery value for the battle MAP of the transfer destination for each battle MAP of the transfer source. FIG. 113 is a battle MAP random determination table corresponding to boss 1, FIG. 114 is a battle MAP random determination table corresponding to boss 2, and FIG. 115 is a battle MAP random determination table corresponding to boss 5. As described later, the information on the lottery value specified in the battle MAP lottery table depends on the speed set for the enemy character.

<Battle MAP data correspondence table>
The battle MAP defines battle MAP data for determining the effect ball to be set in the apocalypse. FIG. 116 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of battle MAP data defined in each battle MAP.

<Effect ball lottery table during Battle ART>
FIG. 117 is an effect ball random determination table during the battle ART for determining the effect ball to be set in the apocalypse in the battle ART. The during-battle effect ball lottery table defines information on the lottery value of the effect ball set for each battle MAP data. In FIG. 117 (A), the information of the lottery value for the effect ball is also specified for the battle MAP data “0”, but a new boss than the effect ball lottery based on the MAP data “0” is specified. When the MAP lottery is prioritized, it is not used.

  Referring to FIG. 117, while the battle MAP data “1” is easy to draw lots of enemy balls, the battle MAP data “2” and “3” always draw lottery balls or awakening balls. Also, referring to the battle MAP data comparison table shown in FIG. 116, it can be seen that seven battle MAPs are included in one set. Specifically, referring to the battle MAPs "1" to "7", the battle MAP data continues to be "2" and "3" after five consecutive "1" s, and the battle MAPs "8" to "14", It can be seen that the same applies to battle MAPs “15” to “21” and battle MAPs “22” to “28”.

  Note that battle MAPs “4”, “11”, “18”, and “25” are battle MAPs that are not actually randomly selected (the randomized value is 0 as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115). Therefore, in the pachislot 1, battle MAP data "1" in which battle MAP data "1" in which an enemy ball is easily determined is determined (one is not randomly selected), and battle MAP data "2" in which an ally ball or an awakening ball is randomly determined. A set of six battle MAPs including two battle MAPs in which “3” is defined is included.

  Here, the process returns to the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIGS. In the battle MAP lottery table, battle MAP data "2" and "3" for which a friendly ball or an awakening ball is always drawn randomly are defined as battle MAP "6" "7" "13" "14" "20" "21" " 27 and 28 are highlighted. Referring to the battle MAP lottery table, the battle MAP basically shifts to a battle MAP having a larger numerical value one by one in one set, or always draws a friendly or awakening ball in one set. It turns out that it shifts to battle MAP. Specifically, from the battle MAP “1”, the battle MAP “2” having a larger numerical value by one or the battle MAP “6” in which the ally ball or the awakening ball in the same set is always randomly determined may be easily determined. I understand.

  By configuring the battle MAP and the battle MAP data in this manner, in the pachislot 1, the number of consecutive attacks by the enemy character is suppressed to a predetermined number (four in the present embodiment). That is, when the transition of the battle MAP is performed more than a predetermined number of times (five times in this embodiment), the transition to the battle MAP in which the ally ball or the awakening ball is always performed at least once is performed. Note that, from the battle MAP “1”, the battle MAP “9” and the like are also transferred. However, since the battle MAP “9” and the like are the second numerical battle MAPs in the same set, the battle MAP is shifted. If the number of times exceeds a predetermined number, the process shifts at least once to a battle MAP in which an ally ball or the like is randomly drawn.

  Comparing the battle MAP lottery tables in FIGS. 113 to 115 reveals that the probability that the ally ball or the awakening ball will be shifted to the battle MAP in which the ally ball or the awakening ball is randomly drawn differs depending on the type of the enemy character of the opponent. For example, if the attack type boss 1 (see FIG. 112) with a low speed is an enemy character, referring to the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. It can be seen that the transition is relatively easy. When the boss 2 (see FIG. 112), which is a defensive type and has a normal speed, is an enemy character, referring to the battle MAP lottery table in FIG. Similarly, when the speed type boss 5 (see FIG. 112) is an enemy character, referring to the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. It is difficult to shift to the battle MAP “6” and “7”, and basically, the battle MAP shifts from the battle MAP “1” to the battle MAP having a larger numerical value in order.

  Thus, in the battle MAP lottery table, information on the lottery value is defined based on the speed set for the enemy character. As a result, during the battle ART, the effect ball is set based on the speed set for the enemy character, and the enemy ball is set more as the enemy is faster, and the ally is set more as the enemy is slower. Become.

<Damage lottery table during Battle ART>
FIG. 118 and FIG. 119 are damage ART lottery tables during a battle ART used when reducing the HP of an enemy character or an ally character in the battle ART. The damage ART lottery table during the battle ART includes the type of the enemy character to be the opponent, the type of the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game, and the HP of the enemy character or the ally character for each internal winning combination for the reduction amount. Specifies the information of the lottery value.

  FIG. 118 is a battle ART damage lottery table used when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball. FIG. 118 shows a battle ART damage lottery table used when the boss 1 having a high attack power (see FIG. 112) is an enemy character so that the difference due to the status (attack power) of the enemy character can be compared. FIG. 118B shows a battle ART damage lottery table used when the boss 5 having low attack power (see FIG. 112) is an enemy character. Comparing the damage lottery table during the battle ART in FIG. 118, when the pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, when the opponent is the boss 1, “15” is easily determined as the decrease amount of the HP of the ally character. On the other hand, when the opponent is the boss 5, it is understood that “5” is easily determined as the decrease amount of the HP of the ally character.

  Also, referring to FIG. 118, even if the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball, if a rare role other than pure loss is won, the enemy character is HP will decrease. By configuring the damage lottery table during the battle ART in this way, the player expects that the rare role is determined as the internal winning combination during the battle ART, and can enhance the interest during the ART. .

  FIG. 119 is a battle ART damage lottery table used when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an ally ball or an awakening ball. FIG. 119 is a battle ART damage lottery table used when the boss 1 (see FIG. 112) having high defense power is the enemy character so that the difference due to the status (defense power) of the enemy character can be compared. FIG. 119B shows a battle ART damage random determination table used when the boss 5 having a low defense force (see FIG. 112) is an enemy character. Comparing the damage ART lottery table during the battle ART in FIG. 119, when the opponent is the boss 1, “5” or the like is easily determined as the reduction amount of the enemy character's HP, while when the opponent is the boss 5, the enemy character is It can be seen that “10” or the like is easily determined as the amount of decrease in the HP of FIG.

  By providing the battle ART damage lottery table according to the type of the enemy character to be the opponent, the status (attack power and defense power) of the enemy character can be reflected, and the game during the battle ART can be variously performed. Can be

<ART state lottery table>
FIG. 120 and FIG. 121 are ART state lottery tables for randomly determining a new ART state when it is determined to continue to ART in the battle ART. The ART state lottery table defines the type of the opponent's enemy character, the ART continuation count, and the information of the lottery value for the ART state of the transfer destination for each ART state of the transfer source. Note that FIGS. 120 and 121 show an ART state lottery table which is referred to when the opponent enemy character is any of the bosses 1 to 6. When the opponent's enemy character is one of the bosses 1 to 6, when the transfer source ART state is “31” to “33”, the same ART state is determined as the transfer destination ART state. On the other hand, when the opponent enemy character is one of the bosses 7 and 8 and the transfer source ART state is “31” to “33”, although not shown, a different ART state (for example, the ART state “3”) is used. ") Is determined as the ART state of the transfer destination.

  Referring to FIG. 120 and FIG. 121, it can be seen that when the number of ART continuations exceeds 5, it is easy to shift to the ART state having a large numerical value.

<Description of operation of main control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main operation of pachislot under control of main CPU]
First, a procedure of main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachislot 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to a flowchart (hereinafter referred to as a main flow) shown in FIG.

  First, when the power is turned on to the pachislo 1, the main CPU 93 performs power-on processing (S 1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, the setting has been changed appropriately, and the like, and initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area in which data must be deleted for each unit game (game), such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a medal acceptance / start check process (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor (not shown) and the start switch 64 is checked.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a random value acquisition process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 93 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) for internal winning combination lottery, and stores the extracted random number value in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S5). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random number for internal winning combination lottery extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S6). In this process, reel stop control information used for stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S5 and the current gaming state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 95, and is used in the reel stop control processing in S11.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a start command generation and storage process (S7). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub-control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the start command data includes various types of information necessary for producing an effect such as an internal winning combination.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a wait process (S8). In this processing, when the elapsed time from the previous game start has not elapsed a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds), the main CPU 93 waits until the wait time has elapsed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start process (S9). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of all reels. When the start of rotation of all reels is requested, the drive of the three stepping motors is controlled by an interrupt process (see FIG. 127 described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec), and The rotation of the reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is controlled to accelerate until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and thereafter, is controlled so as to maintain the constant speed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start command generation and storage process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub-control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. By this processing, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize the start of reel rotation, and can determine the timing for executing various effects and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop control process (S11). In this process, using the reel stop control information determined in S6, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are pressed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning search process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks the symbol combination displayed on the winning line after all the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R have stopped, against the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 20 to 32). . Then, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the symbol combination (combination) specified by the symbol combination table is displayed on the winning line, and stores the determination result in the display combination storing area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a medal payout process (S13). In this process, the hopper 33 is driven and the number of credits is updated based on the number of payouts of the symbol combination determined in S12, and medals are paid out. In this process, when the BB game state flag in the game state flag storage area is on, the payout number is subtracted from the bonus end number counter. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes a counting unit, and updates (subtracts) the bonus end number counter based on the payout number determined according to the combination of the symbols displayed during the bonus state. .

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning operation command generation and storage process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a winning operation command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and provides the data in the main RAM 95 together with additional data (combination of displayed symbols, payout number, bonus end number counter value, etc.). In the communication data storage area. The winning operation command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub-control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. With this processing, the sub control circuit 101 can recognize the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line, and can determine the timing for executing various effects and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end check process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to various counters (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95 for managing the timing of ending the bonus game, and checks whether or not to end the operation of the bonus game. The details of the bonus end check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus operation check process (S16). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to perform the replay. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an RT check process (S17). In this processing, the main CPU 93 updates the RT gaming state based on the displayed combination of symbols. Note that the RT check process is a process of updating the RT gaming state in the bonus non-operation state, and is omitted in the bonus state and the state between the flags. The details of the RT check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126 described later.

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, the internal lottery process performed in S5 in the main flow (see FIG. 122) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table according to the gaming state (S31). That is, the main CPU 93 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to grasp the current gaming state, and sets an internal lottery table (see FIGS. 33 to 37) corresponding to the grasped gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the random number value stored in the random number value storage area (S32). Then, the main CPU 93 sets “1” as an initial value of the winning number.

  Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table, acquires the lottery value corresponding to the winning number, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value (S33). The winning number is information assigned to each winning combination that may be randomly selected in the internal lottery table. For example, when the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, the winning number “1” is assigned to “losing”, and the winning number “2” is assigned to “F_black-black-black”. (See FIG. 33). Further, when the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, the winning number “1” is assigned to “F_maintenance lip”, and the winning number “2” is assigned to “F_123 lip”. (See FIG. 35).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the calculation result in S33 is less than 0 (negative value) (S34).

  In S34, when the main CPU 93 determines that the calculation result is not less than 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 updates the random number value and the winning number (S35). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is set to a random value, and the winning number is incremented by one.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all the winning numbers have been checked (S36). In S36, when the main CPU 93 determines that all the winning numbers have not been checked (NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S33, and repeats the processes from S33.

  On the other hand, in S36, when the main CPU 93 determines that all the winning numbers have been checked (YES), the main CPU 93 sets “0” as a data pointer (S37). That is, the main CPU 93 sets “0” as the small part / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer.

  Here, returning to the description of the processing of S34, when the main CPU 93 determines in S34 that the calculation result is less than 0 (negative value) (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the calculation result according to the current winning number. Then, the small pointer / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are obtained (S38).

  Then, after the processing of S37 or S38, the main CPU 93 acquires an internal winning combination based on the small combination / replay data pointer (S39).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storing area (S40).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (S41). In S41, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is not “00000000” (NO), the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S48 described later.

  On the other hand, in S41, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (YES), the main CPU 93 acquires the internal winning combination based on the bonus data pointer. (S42).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carryover combination storing area (S43).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the role of BB is being carried over (S44). Referring to FIG. 60, the hand associated with BB is stored in either bit 2 to bit 7 of the carryover hand storage area 1 or bit 2 of the carryover hand storage area 2. Therefore, in this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether “1” is stored in any of bits 2 to 7 of the carryover combination storage area 1 or bit 2 of the carryover combination storage area 2. In S44, when the main CPU 93 determines that the role of BB is not being carried over (NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S46.

  On the other hand, in S44, when the main CPU 93 determines that the role related to BB is being carried over (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT5 gaming state flag to ON (S45), and then proceeds to the processing of S46. Specifically, “1” is set to bit 4 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62). By this processing, when the combination related to BB is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus non-winning state, the gaming state can be shifted to the RT5 gaming state of the flag state.

  Next, in the process of S46, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the role related to JACIN is being carried over. Referring to FIG. 60, the hand associated with JACIN is stored in any of bits 1 to 3 of carryover hand storage area 2. Therefore, in this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “1” is stored in any of the bits 1 to 3 of the carryover combination storage area 2. In S46, when the main CPU 93 determines that the role related to JACIN is not being carried over (NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S48.

  On the other hand, in S46, when the main CPU 93 determines that the role related to JACIN is being carried over (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT4 gaming state flag to ON (S47), and then proceeds to the processing of S48. Specifically, “1” is set to bit 3 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62). Note that the combination related to JACIN may be determined as an internal winning combination only during the bonus state. Therefore, when the combination relating to JACIN is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus state, The state can be shifted to the bonus state RT4 gaming state.

  Next, in the process of S48, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storage area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process, and moves the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, the bonus end check processing performed in S15 in the main flow (see FIG. 122) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) and determines whether or not “BB” is operating (S51). In S51, when the main CPU 93 determines that “BB” is not operating (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check processing, and moves the processing to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, in S51, when the main CPU 93 determines that “BB” is operating (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (S52). ). If the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”, it means that the payout of medals has exceeded 59 during the bonus state.

  In S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) and sets “RB”. It is determined whether or not is operating (S53). In S53, when the main CPU 93 determines that "RB" is not operating (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S56.

  On the other hand, in S53, when the main CPU 93 determines that “RB” is operating (YES), the main CPU 93 performs an RB end-time process (S54). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the winning number counter and the game number counter, and turns off the game state flag (RB game state flag) corresponding to the active “RB”. Next, the main CPU 93 turns on the RT2 gaming state flag (S55).

  Next, in S56, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end process. In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the bonus end number counter and turns off the game state flag (BB game state flag) corresponding to the operating “BB”. As shown in S53 to S56, when the operation of the BB (bonus state) is completed during the RB game state, the state shifts to the RT2 game state in which the bonus is not won after the BB ends. On the other hand, when the operation of the BB ends in a state other than the RB gaming state, the state shifts to the non-bonus winning state while the RT gaming state in the bonus state is maintained.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end command generation and storage process (S57). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a bonus end command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The bonus end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub-control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. With this processing, the sub control circuit 101 can recognize that the bonus state has ended, and can perform a predetermined effect at the time of ending the bonus. After the processing of S57, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check processing, and moves the processing to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, in S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than “0” (NO), the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) and sets “RB” Is operating (S58). In S58, when the main CPU 93 determines that “RB” is not operating (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check processing, and moves the processing to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, in S58, when the main CPU 93 determines that “RB” is operating (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning number counter or the game number counter is “0”. (S59). When the possible winning number counter is "0", it means that the symbol combination other than "losing" is displayed eight times during the bonus RB gaming state, and the possible gaming counter is "0". In the case of, it means that 12 games have been played in the bonus state RB game state.

  In S59, when the main CPU 93 determines that neither the prize possible number counter nor the game possible number counter is “0” (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check processing and proceeds to the main flow (FIG. It moves to S16 of (see 122).

  On the other hand, in S59, when the main CPU 93 determines that either the winning number counter or the game number counter is “0” (YES), the main CPU 93 performs an RB end process (S60). Next, the main CPU 93 turns on the RT2 gaming state flag (S61), ends the bonus end check processing, and moves the processing to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 122). That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes a profit state end unit, and the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” when the BB game state flag in the game state flag storage area is on. As a result, the bonus end number processing is executed to clear the bonus end number counter and turn off the BB game state flag in the game state flag storage area corresponding to the active “BB”.

[Bonus operation check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the bonus end check processing performed in S16 in the main flow (see FIG. 122) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the symbol combination relating to “BB” (see FIG. 38) is displayed (S71). In S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that the symbol combination related to "BB" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 performs a bonus activation process (S72). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets the BB gaming state flag in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to ON and sets “59” in the bonus end number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the RT5 gaming state flag in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to off (S73). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus start command generation and storage process (S74). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates the data of the bonus start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and together with the additional data (the value of the RT game state flag, the number of possible prizes, the number of possible games, the bonus end number counter, etc.) The data is stored in a communication data storage area provided in the RAM 95. The bonus start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub-control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. By this processing, the sub control circuit 101 can recognize that the bonus state has started, and can perform a predetermined effect at the time of starting the bonus.

  After ending the processing of S74, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and moves the processing to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, in S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that the symbol combination of “BB” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 displays the symbol combination of “JACIN” (see FIG. 38). It is determined whether or not it has been (S75). In S75, when the main CPU 93 determines that the symbol combination relating to "JACIN" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 performs an RB operation process (S76). In this processing, the main CPU 93 sets the RB gaming state flag in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to ON, and sets “8” to the possible winning number counter and “12” to the possible gaming number counter. .

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the RT4 gaming state flag in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to off (S77). When the processing of S77 is completed, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and moves the processing to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, in S75, when the main CPU 93 determines that the symbol combination related to “JACIN” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the symbol combination related to “Replay” is displayed. (S78). In S78, when the main CPU 93 determines that the symbol combination relating to "Replay" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process, and proceeds to the main flow (see FIG. 122). Move to S17.

  On the other hand, in S78, when the main CPU 93 determines that the symbol combination relating to "Replay" has been displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 requests automatic insertion of medals (S79). That is, the main CPU 93 copies the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion number counter. Then, after the processing of S79, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and moves the processing to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 122). That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 configures a profit state start unit, and when the symbol combination related to “BB” is displayed, sets the BB game state flag in the game state flag storage area to ON. Then, "59" is set to the bonus end number counter. In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes a profit control unit that executes a bonus end check process and a bonus operation check process.

[RT check processing]
Next, the RT check processing performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 122) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is any of the non-bonus winning state RT0 gaming state, the bonus non-winning state RT2 gaming state, or the bonus non-winning state RT4 gaming state (S81). . In S81, when the main CPU 93 determines that none of the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, and the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state is NO (NO), The CPU 93 proceeds to the process in S85 described later.

  On the other hand, in S81, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game state is any one of the non-bonus winning state RT0 gaming state, the bonus non-winning state RT2 gaming state, or the bonus non-winning state RT4 gaming state (YES). Then, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “bell spilled eyes” or “RT1 shift lip” is displayed (S82). In S82, when the main CPU 93 determines that neither “bell spilled eyes” nor “RT1 shift lip” is displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S85 described later.

  On the other hand, in S82, when the main CPU 93 determines that either “bell spilled eyes” or “RT1 shift lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 turns off the RT game state flag that is currently on, and resets the RT1. Turn on the gaming state. That is, in the RT0 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, the RT2 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, or the RT4 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, when “bell spilling eyes” or “RT1 transition lip” is displayed, the main CPU 93 Shifts the gaming state to a non-bonus winning state RT1 gaming state. Next, the main CPU 93 sets 5 to the RT game number counter (S84). That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes the RT ending means, and when the gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (high RT state), the "bell spilling eyes" or "RT1" at the time of the incorrect answer of the pushing order When the “transition lip” is displayed, the RT4 gaming state is ended and the game shifts to the RT1 gaming state (low RT state).

  When the determination in S81 or S82 is NO or subsequent to S84, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is the non-bonus winning state RT0 gaming state (S85). In S85, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game is not in the bonus non-winning state of the RT0 gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the processing of S91 described later.

  On the other hand, in S85, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT0 gaming state is in the non-bonus winning state (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “RT4 shift lip” is displayed (S86). In S86, when the main CPU 93 determines that “RT4 shift lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 turns on the RT4 game state flag. That is, when “RT4 shift lip” is displayed in the non-bonus winning RT0 gaming state, the main CPU 93 shifts the gaming state to the non-bonus winning RT4 gaming state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 configures the RT start means, and when the “RT4 shift lip” is displayed in the RT0 game state, shifts the game state to the RT4 game state (high RT state). .

  On the other hand, in S88, when the main CPU 93 determines that “RT4 transition lip” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether “RT3 transition lip” is displayed (S88). In S88, when the main CPU 93 determines that “RT3 shift lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 turns on the RT3 gaming state flag. That is, when the “RT3 transition lip” is displayed in the bonus non-winning state RT0 gaming state, the main CPU 93 shifts the gaming state to the bonus non-winning state RT3 gaming state. Next, the main CPU 93 sets 5 to the RT game number counter (S90).

  When NO is determined in S85 or S88, or subsequent to S87 or S90, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is the RT1 gaming state where the bonus is not won or the RT3 gaming state where the bonus is not won (S91). ). In S91, when the main CPU 93 determines that neither the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state nor the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (NO), the main CPU 93 terminates the RT check processing and proceeds to the main processing. Move to S2 of the flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, in S91, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game is either the non-bonus winning state RT1 gaming state or the bonus non-winning state RT3 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 updates the RT game number counter (YES in step S91). 1 is subtracted) (S92). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT game number counter is 0 (S93). In S93, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check processing, and moves the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, in S93, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 turns off the currently on RT game state flag (S94). By turning off the currently on RT game state flag by this processing, the game state shifts to the RT0 game state in which the bonus is not won. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

<Interrupt processing under control of main CPU>
FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU 93. This process is executed every 1.1172 milliseconds.

  First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S101). Next, the main CPU 93 performs an input port check process (S102). In this process, signals input from various switches such as a stop switch are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a timer update process (S103). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs, for example, a process of subtracting a predetermined timer value for each interrupt process. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a communication data transmission process (S104). In this process, various commands stored in the communication data storage area are mainly transmitted to the main control circuit 91 and the sub-control circuit 101 as appropriate. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes a command transmission unit, and transmits various commands stored in the communication data storage area to the sub control circuit 101 in each process.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel control process (S105). In this process, the main CPU 93 starts the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, and then rotates each reel at a constant speed. Drive control of three stepping motors. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 93 waits until the updated symbol counter matches the value corresponding to the expected stop position (the symbol at the expected stop position reaches an area on the pay line in the display window), and waits for the corresponding reel. The driving of the corresponding stepping motor is controlled so that the rotation is decelerated and stopped.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lamp / 7-segment driving process (S106). In this process, the main CPU 93 controls the drive of the 7-segment display 28 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a register restoration process (S107). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the interrupt processing.

[Sub-control processing]
The sub-control circuit 101 executes various processes according to the flowcharts shown in FIGS.

<Power-on processing>
FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the power-on processing of the sub CPU 102 when the power is turned on.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process (S310). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs an error check on the sub RAM 103 and the like and initializes the task system. The task system includes a lamp control task, a sound control task, which is a task group of timer interrupt synchronization, and a mother task, which is a task group of VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization) interrupt synchronization. In this initialization processing, initialization or backup processing of effect balls according to the normal game state and the high-probability game state stored in the sub RAM 103 is performed, which will be described in detail later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the lamp control task shown in FIG. 129 (S311). The lamp control task waits for the sub CPU 102 to receive a timer interrupt event message transmitted to the sub CPU 102 every 2 milliseconds, and in response to the timer interrupt event message, This is a process for executing a process for controlling the lighting state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the sound control task shown in FIG. 131 (S312). In the sound control task, the state of sound output from the speakers 23L and 23R is controlled by the sub CPU 102.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the accessory control task shown in FIG. 132 (S313). In the accessory control task, the driving state of the rotating accessory 200 is controlled by the sub CPU 102.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the mother task shown in FIG. 133 (S313), and terminates the power-on process. The mother task is a task group of VSYNC (vertical synchronization signal) interruption synchronization, and a vertical synchronization signal (VSYNC interruption signal) sent from the liquid crystal display device 11 when one frame of video is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Is used.

<Initialization or backup processing of effect balls in the normal game state and the high-probability game state>
Here, the initialization or backup processing of the effect ball in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, which is performed in the initialization processing of S310, will be described.

  In the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, the sub RAM 103 includes a DRAM as a work area and a backup SRAM. The effect ball is basically stored in the DRAM, but is also stored in the SRAM for backup.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the pachislot 1, the power may be temporarily cut off during business hours of the game store, or the power source may be turned off when the game store is closed. In the pachislot 1, in the power-on process performed when the power supply that has been temporarily turned off is turned on, the effect ball stored in the SRAM is copied to the DRAM in the initialization process of S 310 to back up the effect ball. Is performed so as to control the state of the game before and after the power is turned off. On the other hand, in the power-on process performed when the power is turned on over the business day, in the initialization process of S310, the effect ball newly selected by lot without storing the backup data is stored in the DRAM.

  Specifically, the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot 1 detects that the power supply 44 has been turned on by a power-on detection circuit (not shown) arranged on the sub-control board 42, and also turns on the power. Is acquired from an RTC (real-time clock: not shown) arranged in the sub-control circuit 101. Then, the sub-control circuit 101 restores or initializes the backup data of the effect ball based on the date and time when the power-on is detected. That is, in the present embodiment, the power-on detection circuit arranged on the sub-control board 42 constitutes a power-on detection unit.

  The sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot 1 detects that the power supply has been cut off by the power supply device 44 by a power-supply cut-off detection circuit (not shown) arranged on the sub-control board 42, and And obtains the date and time from the RTC arranged in the sub RAM 103 (SRAM) (power cutoff process). Then, the sub-control circuit 101 obtains the date and time from the RTC when the power-on is detected, and compares the obtained date and time with the date and time when the power-off stored in the sub RAM 103 (SRAM) is detected. To obtain the power-off period indicating the time during which the power was turned off. That is, in the present embodiment, the power cut-off detection circuit disposed on the sub-control board 42 constitutes a power-off detection unit, and the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes an acquisition unit for acquiring a power interruption period. In the game in which the effect ball is set in the apocalypse as described above, when a predetermined symbol combination (for example, “bell winning” or more) is displayed, the probability according to the type of the effect ball set is set. In the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a privilege granting unit in order to perform the transfer lottery between CZ and ART and various additional lotteries during ART (see FIG. 102 described above).

  Here, when the power is turned off at the end of business and the power is turned on at the start of business, the power-off period is several hours or more. On the other hand, if the power supply is temporarily turned off, the power-off period is only a few minutes at most. Therefore, when the power cut-off period is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 4 hours), the sub-control circuit 101 discards the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 (SRAM) for backup and newly generates 6 The re-lottery of the effect ball for each piece (the effect ball lottery at the time of the apocalypse operation, the effect ball lottery during CZ, the effect ball lottery during the enemy determination ART, the effect ball lottery during the battle ART) is performed, and the sub-RAM 103 (DRAM) is executed. Remember. On the other hand, when the power cut-off period is shorter than the predetermined time, the sub-control circuit 101 copies six effect balls stored in the SRAM for backup to the DRAM (restores backup data). Thus, the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 before the power is turned off is maintained after the power is turned on.

  Further, in the pachislo 1, the backup data of the effect ball can be restored or initialized only from the time when power-on is detected, instead of the power-off period. Since the business hours of the game store are often determined in advance, the time at which the power of the gaming machine such as the pachislot 1 is turned on in the game store is also generally determined. Therefore, if the time at which the power-on is detected is a predetermined time (for example, a time between 7:00 am and 9:00 am), the sub-control circuit 101 Is determined, and the effect ball is initialized. Conversely, when the time at which the power-on is detected is other than the predetermined time, the sub-control circuit 101 determines that the power is temporarily turned off, and restores the backup data of the effect ball.

  Further, among gaming machines such as the pachislot 1 in recent years, gaming machines having an RTC function of performing a predetermined operation in accordance with time are also known. In the case of such a gaming machine, the backup data of the effect ball can be restored or initialized based on the current time, not only when the power is turned on. Specifically, when the current time is a time immediately before the business store starts operating (for example, 9:50 am), the effect ball is initialized. On the other hand, if the current time is other than the time immediately before the game arcade is started, when the power is detected, the backup data of the effect ball is restored.

<Lamp control task>
FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a lamp control task started in S311 of the power-on process shown in FIG. 128.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes a timer interrupt initialization process (S320). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a process of initializing the lamp-related data (S321).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a timer interrupt wait (S322). In this processing, until the sub CPU 102 receives the timer interrupt event message every 2 milliseconds, the sub CPU 102 executes a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization.

  As a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization, for example, there is a main board communication task which is a task group of the command reception interrupt synchronization. In addition, a task group (not shown) for power supply interruption synchronization, a task group (not shown) for door monitoring unit communication synchronization, and the like are given.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a lamp data analysis process (S323), and performs a lamp execution process (S324). For example, the sub CPU 102 displays an image corresponding to the latent image 402 on the display device 10 by controlling the light emission of the LED 403 of the panel device 400 according to the registered effect data. Further, for example, the sub CPU 102 notifies the result of the promotion lottery of the non-displayed effect ball by controlling the LED provided on the rotating accessory 200 according to the registered effect data.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is a call of a non-effect image unrelated to the effect, such as a menu screen or an error screen (S325). Here, when it is determined that there is no call of the non-effect image (NO), the process proceeds to S322. On the other hand, if it is determined that a non-effect image has been called (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not panel display is being performed (S326). Note that the panel is being displayed means that the LED 403 is emitted in the panel device 400 and an image corresponding to the latent image 402 is being displayed. If it is determined that the panel is not being displayed (NO), the process proceeds to S322.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the panel is being displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently turns off the panel display LED, that is, the LED 403 of the panel device 400, and suspends the panel display (S327). The process moves to S322. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 controls the light emission of the LED 403 of the panel device 400, the LED group 25, and the LED provided in the rotating accessory 200 according to the registered effect data. Is configured.

  Here, since the non-production images such as the menu screen and the error screen are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 provided behind the panel device 400, if the non-production images are displayed during the panel display, the non-production images are not displayed. The visibility is reduced. In this regard, in the pachislo 1, when there is a request for calling a non-effect image during panel display, the LED 403 of the panel device 400 is turned off, thereby preventing the visibility of the non-effect image from lowering. Hereinafter, specific control when a non-effect image is called during panel display will be described.

<How to display non-directed images during panel display>
FIG. 130 is a diagram illustrating an outline of a method of displaying a non-effect image during panel display.

  In FIG. 130, time t1 is a timing at which effect data for panel display is read. At this timing, the sub CPU 102 issues an output request for causing the panel control board 79 to emit the LED 403 based on the effect data. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 130 (a) and (b), the LED 403 is turned on from time t1.

  Time t2 is a timing at which a call request for a non-effect image is detected. It should be noted that the detection of the non-effect image calling request can be performed by an arbitrary method. For example, an error screen call request indicating that the front door 2b is open can be detected by receiving a signal for displaying an error from the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74. In response to the request for calling the menu screen, the operation status of various operation buttons (such as the selection button 18 and the determination button 19) provided on the pedestal unit 12 is monitored, and a predetermined operation (menu activation) is performed. Can be detected by detecting.

  At time t <b> 2, when detecting the request for calling the non-effect image, the sub CPU 102 executes the effect data for displaying the non-effect image, and issues an output request for displaying the non-effect image on the liquid crystal relay board 77. Do. The liquid crystal relay board 77 displays a non-effect image on the liquid crystal display device 11 in response to the output request. On the other hand, upon detecting the non-production image calling request, the panel control board 79 turns off the LED 403 in preference to the non-production image calling request received from the time t1 over the LED 403 output request. At this time, as shown in FIG. 130A, the sub CPU 102 continues to execute the effect data for panel display. That is, in the pachislot 1, the light emission of the LED 403 is stopped by suppressing the output port while the light emission animation of the LED 403 continues internally.

  As a result, as shown at time t2 in FIG. 130 (b), a non-effect image such as a menu screen is displayed on the display device 10. At this time, since the LED 403 is turned off, the display by the panel device 400 does not cover the non-production image, and the visibility of the non-production image is not impaired.

  Time t3 is a timing at which the end request of the non-effect image is detected. The detection of the end request of the non-effect image can be performed by an arbitrary method. For example, a request to end the error screen indicating that the front door 2b is open can be detected by receiving a signal indicating that the door has been closed from the door open / close monitoring unit 74 for 24h. The menu screen termination request is based on the fact that the operation status of various operation buttons (such as the selection button 18 and the determination button 19) provided on the pedestal unit 12 is monitored and a predetermined operation (menu termination) is performed. Can be detected by detecting.

  At time t3, when detecting the end request of the non-effect image, the sub CPU 102 ends the execution of the effect data for non-effect image display. As a result, the non-effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 disappears. On the other hand, the panel control board 79 that has stopped emitting light from the LED 403 from time t2 restarts emitting light from the LED 403 in response to the output request of the LED 403 received from time t1. As a result, as shown at time t3 in FIG. 130 (b), an image corresponding to the panel device 400 is displayed on the display device 10.

  Time t4 is a timing at which the execution of the effect for panel display ends. At this timing, the sub CPU 102 ends the execution of the effect data for panel display, and ends the output request for the panel control board 79 to make the LED 403 emit light. As a result, the LED 403 is turned off as shown in FIG. 130A, and the display of the image corresponding to the panel device 400 on the display device 10 ends as shown at time t4 in FIG. 130B. .

  As described above, in the pachislo 1, when the non-production image is called during the panel display production, the final output of the LED 403 is suppressed, thereby preventing the non-production image from being covered by the panel display production. Since only the final output of the LED 403 is suppressed and no processing such as error processing is added to the execution processing of the rendering data itself, the pachislot 1 can simplify the processing at the time of calling the non-rendering image and have a bug. Can be reduced.

  Note that the condition for restarting the lighting of the LED 403 after turning off the LED 403 in response to the detection of the calling request for the non-effect image is arbitrary. That is, in the above description, the lighting of the LED 403 is restarted on condition that the end request of the non-effect image is detected. The lighting of the LED 403 may be restarted. Thereby, the effect by the panel device 400 can be promptly restarted.

  Further, when a call request for a non-effect image is detected, all of the LEDs 403 may be turned off, or only some of the LEDs 403 may be turned off. Since a non-production image such as a menu screen is displayed at a predetermined position on the liquid crystal display device 11, at a position that does not overlap with the non-production image, the visibility of the non-production image is displayed even if a display for panel production is performed. Does not impair. As described above, since the LED 403 is an LED array in which a large number of LEDs are linearly provided, by controlling the LEDs to be turned on / off in accordance with the position where the non-directed image is displayed, the non-directed image can be avoided. A display for a panel effect can be performed. For example, when the non-production image is displayed in a rectangular area substantially at the center of the liquid crystal display device 11, the non-production image is displayed by turning off the center LED of the LED array and turning on the LEDs at both ends. The display for the panel effect can be performed by avoiding it.

  Therefore, when there is a non-production image calling request, the sub CPU 102 specifies an area where the LED 403 is turned off in accordance with the type of the non-production image for which the calling request was made. Then, the panel control board 79 turns off the LED 403 for the area specified by the sub CPU 102 in preference to the output request of the LED 403 based on the panel display effect data, and turns off the LED 403. In the area of, the LED 403 may be output in response to an output request of the LED 403 based on the effect data for panel display.

  Thus, it is possible to display a non-effect image while continuing the panel display effect by the panel device 400. In this case, it is preferable to specify the area where the LED 403 is turned off in accordance with the type of the non-effect image, so that the panel display effect can be continued in a wider area.

<Sound control task>
FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the sound control task started in S312 of the power-on process shown in FIG. 128.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes a process of initializing sound-related data related to a sound output state from the speakers 23L and 23R (S330). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a sound data analysis process (S331), performs a sound effect execution process (S332), and executes the process of S331. In the sound effect execution process of S332, various sounds according to the game are output, and one example thereof will be described below.

<Sound effect execution processing when ART is continued>
In the pachislot 1, since the continuation of the ART is controlled based on the winning or losing during the battle ART, basically, it is not known whether the ART will continue until the battle ART ends (until the winning or losing is decided). However, if there are a plurality of ART sets (see FIG. 71, etc.), the ART will continue even if the battle ART is lost, and the bosses 7 and 8 will be determined as opponents of the battle ART. Since the ART is continued, the continuation of the ART may be determined before the battle ART ends.

  In the pachislot 1, when the continuation of the ART is determined, a predetermined sound effect execution process is performed, so that the player may be informed in advance that the ART currently being executed will be continued. Specifically, the pachi-slot 1 outputs, as sounds during the ART, a first sound continuously output during the ART, a second sound continuously output during the ART, and an instantaneous output during the ART. And a third sound to be played. The first sound is a dedicated song in the ART that is output regardless of whether or not the ART is continued, and the second sound is another dedicated song in the ART that is output only when the ART is continued, The third sound is a sound effect (siren) output only when ART continues.

  As a method of notifying the player that the ART is to be continued by the sound effect execution processing, for example, changing the music in the ART from the first sound to the second sound in the middle of the ART, or from the start of the ART Various modes are conceivable, such as making the tune in the ART the second sound, and outputting the third sound at the start or during the ART. In this case, if the sound is changed from the first sound to the second sound, the player may not be able to recognize that the music has changed depending on the connection of the music, and the second sound is output from the start of the ART. In such a case, an unfamiliar player may not be able to ascertain whether the music is output when the continuation of ART is determined.

  Therefore, the pachislo 1 outputs a sound effect such as the third sound before outputting the second sound, so that the player can easily recognize that the ART is continued.

<Accessory control task>
FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the accessory control task started in S313 of the power-on process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process of the accessory-related data related to the driving state of the rotating accessory 200 (S340). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an analysis process of the accessory data (S341), performs an accessory effect execution process (S342), and executes the process of S341. In addition, in the accessory effect execution process of S342, the rotating accessory 200 is driven in various modes according to the game, and an example thereof is described below.

<Character control during promotion lottery>
As described above, in the pachislot 1, when performing a promotion lottery of a non-displayed effect ball, the cover member 198 of the rotating accessory 200 is opened, and the eyeball body 203 is made visible to the player. Specifically, when the lottery using the movable movable lottery table shown in FIG. 85 is won, the sub CPU 102 sets the valuables data for opening the cover member 198. When the sub CPU 102 controls the rotating accessory 200 based on the accessory data, the player can visually recognize the centerpiece main body 203 at the time of performing the promotion lottery of the effect ball.

<Control of character during ART>
In the pachislot 1, during the ART, the rotating accessory 200 is driven in various modes, and the rotating gaming object 200 is used to express that the current gaming state is a special gaming state. For example, the cover member 198 of the rotating accessory 200 is opened and closed to drive the rotating accessory 200 so that the centerpiece blinks, or the cover of the rotating accessory 200 is interlocked with the start operation of the start lever 16. By opening the member 198 halfway and leaving the centerpiece member 205 exposed only halfway, or by moving the centerpiece member 205 left and right while the cover member 198 is open, the main body of the centerpiece can look around. The rotating accessory 200 is driven. As described above, in the pachislo 1, the movable portion of the rotating accessory 200 moves to a predetermined position during the ART and performs a special effect, thereby enlivening the game during the ART.

  Here, some players may temporarily leave their seats during the ART or interrupt the game in order to operate a mobile terminal or the like (smartphone or mobile phone) after operating the start lever 16. Until such a situation where a player does not exist or a situation where a game is interrupted even if a player exists, the rotating accessory 200 is continuously driven or the cover member 198 is kept in a semi-open state. In this case, the motor 214 (see FIG. 7) for driving the rotating accessory 200 and the motor (not shown) for opening and closing the cover member 198 are consumed, leading to a failure. Therefore, in the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, when the player leaves the seat or interrupts the game during the ART, the driving of the motor related to the rotating accessory 200 is stopped, and a predetermined position (for example, when the cover member 198 is turned off). The movable part of the rotating accessory 200 is returned to an initial position (for example, a position where the cover member 198 covers and covers the eyeball member 205 (a so-called closed state)), whereby the rotating accessory is moved. 200 is reduced. When the cover member 198 is semi-open, a motor (not shown) for opening and closing the cover member 198 needs to continue to excite the motor to maintain the cover member 198 in the semi-open state. The motor (not shown) is consumed.

  Note that any method of detecting a player leaving or interrupting the game is arbitrary. For example, in the pachislot 1, during the ART (more specifically, when the rotating accessory 200 during the ART is being driven, or , When the cover member 198 is in the half-open state), a non-operation time indicating a period during which the player does not receive an operation is measured, and when the non-operation time exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes), The player may leave or interrupt the game. That is, when the player is playing a game, an operation associated with the game (for example, a start operation or a stop operation) or an operation such as an operation on a menu screen is performed, so that the operation of the player is not performed for a predetermined time. Then, it is determined that the player has left the seat or interrupted the game.

  The sub CPU 102 performs a unique effect during the ART by moving the movable part of the rotating accessory 200 from the initial position to the predetermined position until the no-operation time reaches a predetermined time during the ART. When the non-operation time reaches a predetermined time during the operation, the movable part of the rotating accessory 200 is returned to the initial position, thereby reducing unnecessary consumption. Thereafter, when the player performs any operation, the no-operation time is cleared, so the sub CPU 102 moves the movable part of the rotating accessory 200 from the initial position to a predetermined position, and performs a unique effect during the ART. Do. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a timer, and measures the non-operation time during which no gaming operation is performed when the movable part of the rotating accessory 200 is at a predetermined position.

  In addition, from the player's point of view, when the player returns from the unattended state or resumes the game, the effect of the revolving accessory 200 has ended, so that the player may have the impression that the ART has ended. is there. Therefore, when the movable part of the rotating accessory 200 is returned to the initial position, the sub CPU 102 continues to notify that the ART is being performed by emitting light from the LED, displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 11, and sounding the speakers 23L and 23R. It may be that. Compared to a member that is physically worn, such as the movable part of the rotating accessory 200, the possibility that the pachislot 1 will break down even if it is continuously executed during leaving the seat can be suppressed. When the player does not perform any operation, the image output from the liquid crystal display device 11 is suppressed from the viewpoint of energy saving, for example, a demo screen is displayed, or the sound is output from the speakers 23L and 23R in order to suppress the sound volume leaking to the surroundings. It is common practice to suppress the sounds that are made. Therefore, as a method of continuing to notify that an ART is being performed, it is more preferable to control the light emission of the LED rather than the image display of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the sound of the speakers 23L and 23R.

<Mother task>
FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the mother task started in S314 of the power-on process shown in FIG.

  In the mother task, the sub CPU 102 starts the main task (S350), starts the main board communication task (S351), and starts the animation task (S352).

<Main task>
FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the main task started in S350 of the mother task shown in FIG. 133.

  In the main task, the sub CPU 102 executes a VSYNC interrupt initialization process (S360), and waits for a VSYNC interrupt (S361). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a drawing process (S362), and executes the process of S361.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the main board communication task started in S351 of the mother task shown in FIG. 133.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes the initialization of the communication message queue (S370), and checks the received command (S371).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether a command different from the previous command has been received (S372). Here, if it is determined that a command different from the previous command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the process of S371.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a command different from the previous command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 checks the order of the currently received command and the previously received command (S373), and the order of the commands is normal. It is determined whether or not it is (S374). In a gaming machine such as the pachislot 1, insertion of medals, start of reel rotation (operation of the start lever 16), reel stop following the first to third stop operations (operation of the stop buttons 17 </ b> L, 17 </ b> C, 17 </ b> R), and reels Since the game is played in the order of the determination of the displayed symbol combination after the stop and the provision of the profit according to the symbol combination, the order of the commands transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub-control circuit 101 is also determined. The processes of S373 and S374 are processes for determining whether commands have been received in a predetermined order. If the received command is not related to the progress of the game, the sub CPU 102 does not determine the order of the commands.

  If it is determined in step S374 that the order of the commands is abnormal (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets a sequence error (S375). Here, a sequence error is an error detected when the sub-control circuit 101 receives various commands from the main control circuit 91 and receives commands in an order that cannot occur in a normal game. For example, a case where the sub-control circuit 101 receives a start command without receiving a winning operation command after receiving a reel stop command corresponds to a sequence error. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a game order determining means, and determines whether or not the various commands received from the main control circuit 91 are in a predetermined order, so that the progress order of one game is predetermined. It is determined whether or not the processing has been performed in the order described above. The defined order of the commands in the present embodiment is the order of a start command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a reel stop command, a reel stop command, a winning operation command, and a bonus start command and a bonus end command. Although the command is related to the progress of the game, it is not always generated in one game, and thus is excluded from the determination of the order of the commands.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the end of CZ is determined according to the combination of the displayed symbols, and if the sub control circuit 101 cannot receive the winning operation command, the assumed game A game different from the flow will be played. For example, if a bell is spilled during CZ, the sub control circuit 101 ends CZ. However, if a winning operation command cannot be received, it can be grasped that the bell spill has been displayed. Instead, CZ may be continued. In such a case, since the start command in the next game is received without receiving the winning operation command in the current game, by monitoring the occurrence of a sequence error, It can be prevented that a game different from the flow of the game is played.

  In the process of S374, when it is determined that the order of the commands is normal (YES), or subsequent to the process of S375, the sub CPU 102 creates game information from the received command, and stores the created game information in the sub RAM 103. It is stored (S376). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the command analysis process shown in FIG. 136 (S377), and executes the process of S371.

<Command analysis processing>
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the command analysis processing executed in S377 of the main board communication task shown in FIG. 135.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs the effect content determination processing shown in FIG. 138 (S380), performs the lamp data determination processing (S381), performs the sound data determination processing (S382), and executes the accessory data determination processing. Then (S383), the determined data is registered (S384), and the command analysis processing ends.

  In the effect content determination processing, the sub CPU 102 determines the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like according to the game. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines a predetermined game from a plurality of effects including a later-described layer switching type effect and an effect switching type effect capable of switching from a pre-switching effect to a post-switching effect according to the progress of the game. In, the effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is selected. In the sound data determination process, the sub CPU 102 performs sound data for determining the content of the sound output from the speakers 23L and 23R according to the game. In the accessory data determination process, the sub CPU 102 Character data for driving the rotating character 200 is determined.

<Animation task>
FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the animation task started in S352 of the mother task shown in FIG. 133.

  First, the sub CPU 102 checks a change from the previous game information (S390). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an object control process (S391). Specifically, when a check result indicating that the game information has changed is obtained in S390, the sub CPU 102 controls the image according to the change in the game information.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is a request to switch the effect (S392). Here, the effect switching request is determined in advance for each effect that is being executed. For example, a start operation and a rotation start of each reel associated with the start operation, and a first stop operation to a third stop operation are performed. This operation is performed when the reel is stopped or when a predetermined operation button is operated. Such an effect switching request can be obtained based on a command (a start command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning operation command, etc.) received from the main control circuit 91. If it is determined in the processing of S392 that the effect switching request has not been acquired (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the processing of S396.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S392 that the effect switching request has been acquired (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the switched effect is a layer switching effect ( S393). If it is determined in this processing that the effect after switching is a layer switching effect (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently changes the image layer displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 (layer switching effect). Switching to the designated layer (S394), and the process proceeds to S396. On the other hand, when it is determined in S393 that the effect after switching is not a layer switching effect (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the effect in the image layer currently displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Is switched to the effect after switching (S395), and the process proceeds to S396.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes an animation task management process (S396). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 manages the order of images displayed in various effects and the like. After executing the animation task management process, the sub CPU 102 executes the process of S390.

<Specific processing when switching productions>
Here, a method of effect switching when an effect switching request is made will be specifically described. In the pachislot 1, the progress of the effect is linked to the operation of the player by switching the effect in response to the progress of the game such as a stop operation or the operation of a predetermined operation button (for example, a chance button). . In the pachislot 1, the effect in the pachislot 1 is switched in advance by switching the layer in which the effect is being performed, thereby switching between the effect of the layer switching type in which the effect is switched in accordance with the progress of the game and the effect executed in the same layer. And the effect switching type effect that switches the effect according to the progress of the process.

  Then, in the pachislot 1, when there is a request to switch the effect, the effect switching is controlled based on the relationship between the effect currently being executed and the effect after the switching. Specifically, when the effect is a layer switching type effect, the effect after switching is performed on a layer different from the layer on which the effect before switching is being performed, and the layer displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is changed. To switch the production. That is, in the work area of the drawing RAM 105, a first layer in which image data indicating an effect image according to the effect before switching is set, and a second layer in which image data indicating an effect image according to the effect after switching are set. The effect is switched by storing the two layers and switching the layer displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 from the first layer to the second layer.

  Further, in the case of the effect switching type effect, in the layer for executing the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the effect to be executed is changed from the effect before the switching to the effect after the switching, thereby changing the effect. Switch. In other words, the image data set in the layer stored in the work area of the drawing RAM 105 is changed from the image data indicating the effect image corresponding to the effect before switching to the effect image corresponding to the effect after switching to the effect image. Switch.

  In the effect of the layer switching type, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of flicker due to a time lag occurring when switching images before and after switching, but since a plurality of layers are used at the same time, the processing load of image processing is reduced. And the capacity of the drawing RAM 105 is squeezed. On the other hand, in the effect switching type effect, since only one layer is used, the processing load can be suppressed, but a flicker due to a time lag that occurs when switching images before and after switching may occur.

  Therefore, in the pachislot 1, the relationship between the effect before switching and the effect after switching is determined in advance according to the connection between the effects before and after the switching and the processing load of each effect. For example, an effect in which flicker is likely to occur before and after switching and gives a player an uncomfortable feeling is determined as a layer switching type effect, and an effect in which flicker is not bothersome is determined as an effect switching type effect. deep. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the flicker at the time of switching the effect, and to prevent the processing from being dropped in response to the effect switching.

  Note that the predetermined content (layer switching type effect or effect switching type effect) for each effect may be changed according to the continuation of the game. For example, a player whose eyes have become tired due to a long playing time has a more noticeable discomfort due to the flickering of the image. Therefore, in the pachislot 1 in which the player who has increased the playing time is playing, even if the effect is determined in advance as the effect switching type effect, the effect may be changed to the layer switching type effect.

  Note that the game time can be obtained by any method. For example, the operating time of the pachislot 1 may be acquired as the game time, or the time at which the player who has performed the user registration in the pachislot 1 plays the game may be acquired as the game time.

<Switching production when operating the chance button>
In a gaming machine such as the pachislot 1, a player may be prompted to perform an operation irrelevant to the progress of a game, such as a chance button, and the effect may be switched when the operation is performed. The pachislo 1 of the present embodiment also prompts the player to perform button operations. For example, the sub CPU 102 displays an image corresponding to the chance button on the liquid crystal display device 11 while all reels are rotating. The display prompts the player to perform a predetermined operation (press a chance button). The sub CPU 102 detects that the predetermined operation has been performed based on the command received from the main control circuit 91, and outputs a reel stop command or the like from the main control circuit 91 before the predetermined operation is detected. By receiving the information, it is detected that the game has progressed without performing a predetermined operation.

  In the pachislo 1, the effect to be switched is different between a case where a predetermined operation prompted by the player is performed and a case where the game proceeds without performing the predetermined operation. Specifically, when a predetermined operation prompting the player is performed, a first switching request is performed, and the sub CPU 102 switches the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 from the effect before switching to the first effect. After switching, switch to production. If the game has proceeded without performing the predetermined operation, a second switching request is made, and the sub CPU 102 changes the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 from the effect before switching to the effect after the second switching. Switch to

  As described above, in the pachislo 1, the effect to be switched can be made different depending on whether the predetermined operation prompted by the player is performed or not, so that the game performance is diversified and the interest of the game is improved. . Also in this case, by setting a preferable switching method for each effect, the effect can be appropriately switched according to the progress of the game.

<Direction content decision processing>
FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the effect content determination processing executed in S380 of the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 136.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether a start command has been received (S401). If it is determined that the start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the start command receiving process shown in FIG. 139 (S402), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process at the time of receiving a start command, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a start command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a reel rotation start command has been received (S403). Here, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the processing at the time of receiving the reel rotation start command (S404), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the processing at the time of receiving the reel rotation start command, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel rotation start command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether a reel stop command has been received (S405). Here, when it is determined that the reel stop command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a process at the time of receiving the reel stop command (S406), and ends the effect content determination process. In the processing when the reel stop command is received, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel stop command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a winning operation command has been received (S407). Here, if it is determined that the winning operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command shown in FIG. 149 (S408), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the processing at the time of winning operation command reception, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a winning operation command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a bonus end command has been received (S409). Here, if it is determined that the bonus end command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the process at the time of receiving the bonus end command shown in FIG. 154 (S410), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process at the time of receiving the bonus end command, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus end command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether a bonus start command has been received (S411). Here, when it is determined that the bonus start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a process at the time of receiving the bonus start command (S412), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process at the time of receiving the bonus start command, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus start command is set. In the process at the time of receiving the bonus start command, the BB mode “0” is set as the initial value of the BB mode.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes a process corresponding to the other received command (S413), and ends the effect content determination process.

<Start command reception processing>
FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the start command receiving process executed in S402 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 138.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the high-probability gaming state (S421). If it is determined in S421 that the gaming state is either the normal gaming state or the high-probability gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a normal start CZ / ART random determination shown in FIG. 140 (S422). In the normal start CZ / ART lottery, the above-mentioned start lottery (A) (D) and the like are performed based on the internal winning combination and the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game.

  Subsequent to the process of S422, the sub CPU 102 performs an apocalypse operation process shown in FIG. 141 (S423). In this apocalypse operation processing, the sub CPU 102 performs control to start or end the operation of the apocalypse.

  Subsequent to the process of S423, or if it is determined in S421 that the gaming state is neither the normal gaming state nor the high-probability gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently proceeds to the RT4 gaming state in which the gaming state is the normal gaming state. It is determined whether or not there is (S424). More specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state managed by the sub side is the normal gaming state and the RT gaming state managed by the main side is the RT4 gaming state. If it is determined in S424 that the gaming state is the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a high-probability gaming state transition process shown in FIG. 142 (S425). In the probability game state transition processing, the sub CPU 102 performs lottery of avoidance points in order to transition the game state from the normal game state to the high probability game state.

  Subsequent to the processing of S425, or if it is determined in S424 that the gaming state is not the normal gaming state of the RT4 gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state. (S426). If it is determined in S426 that the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs a high-probability medium effect registration process shown in FIG. 143 (S427). In the high-probability effect registration process, the sub CPU 102 performs an effect (push order navigation) for preventing the main gaming state from shifting from the RT4 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state based on the avoidance point. .

  Subsequent to the process of S427 or in S426, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the high-probability gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the gaming state is CZ (S428). If it is determined in S428 that the gaming state is CZ (YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an ART lottery process at CZ start shown in FIG. 144 (S429). In the ART random determination process at the time of CZ start, the sub CPU 102 performs the above-described transition random determination (C) and the like.

  Subsequent to the processing of S429 or in S428, if it is determined that the gaming state is not CZ (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state is a bonus state (during BB) (S430). ). If it is determined in S430 that the gaming state is the bonus state (YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB ART random determination process shown in FIG. 145 (S431). In the BB ART random determination process, the sub CPU 102 performs the above-described transition random determination (F) and the like.

  Subsequent to the processing of S431 or in S430, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the bonus state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the gaming state is the ART gaming state (during the ART). (S432). If it is determined in S432 that the gaming state is the ART gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the processing during ART shown in FIG. 146 (S433). In the processing during the ART, the sub CPU 102 determines the contents of the effect in the enemy determination ART and the battle ART.

  If it is determined in S432 that the gaming state is not the ART gaming state (NO), or after the processing of S433, the sub CPU 102 determines whether a sequence error is set (S434). Here, the sequence error is set when the order of the commands is not normal in the main board communication task. If it is determined in S434 that a sequence error has been set (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs a sequence error process described later (S435), and ends the start command receiving process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S434 that a sequence error has not been set (NO), sub CPU 102 terminates the process upon receiving a start command.

<Specific Example 1 of Sequence Error Processing>
In the present embodiment, in the game in which the pressing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the CZ ends on the condition that a combination of symbols displayed when an incorrect answer stop operation is performed in the pressing order is displayed. I do. The management of CZ is performed in the sub control circuit 101, and the management of the combination of symbols to be displayed is performed in the main control circuit 91. Therefore, the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) transmits from the main control circuit 91. The end / continuation of the CZ is controlled based on the winning operation command. Specifically, the sub-control circuit 101 terminates the CZ when receiving a winning operation command indicating that the displayed symbol combination is "bell spilled eyes" (see FIG. 153 described later).

  Here, when the sub control circuit 101 cannot receive the winning operation command, the sub control circuit 101 cannot grasp the combination of the displayed symbols, and therefore, a game different from the assumed game flow is performed. Will be done. For example, if "bell spilled eyes" is displayed during CZ, CZ is terminated on the side of the sub-control circuit 101, but if a winning operation command cannot be received, "bell spilled eyes" is displayed. This cannot be grasped on the sub-control circuit 101 side, and CZ may be continued.

  Here, the sequence error may occur due to the failure of the pachislot 1 irrespective of the operation of the player, but the communication between the main control circuit 91 and the sub control circuit 101 is temporarily cut off. It may be artificially generated by an illegal action such as a so-called command zero which causes a communication disconnection state. If the termination of the CZ can be avoided by such misconduct, the player who has committed the misconduct will gain undue profit.

  Therefore, the sub-control circuit 101 checks the order of the commands received from the main control circuit 91, and terminates the CZ assuming that a sequence error has occurred when the order of the commands is abnormal. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining unfair profits due to wrongdoing.

<Specific example 2 of processing at the time of sequence error>
In the present embodiment, the RT4 gaming state in the non-bonus winning state on the main side may be treated as the high-probability gaming state on the sub side. This high-probability gaming state ends at the timing when the sub side recognizes that the symbol combination displayed at the time of the incorrect answer is displayed on the pushing order bell or the pushing order lip (see FIG. 152 described later). Therefore, when the sub control circuit 101 cannot receive the winning operation command, the sub control circuit 101 cannot grasp the combination of the displayed symbols, and the game different from the assumed game flow is performed. It will be broken. For example, if "bell spilled eyes" or "RT1 transition lip" is displayed during the high-probability game state, the high-probability game state is terminated on the sub-control circuit 101 side, but when the winning operation command cannot be received. In such a case, the sub-control circuit 101 cannot recognize that the "bell spilled eyes" or "RT1 transition lip" has been displayed, and the high-probability gaming state may continue.

  Therefore, the sub-control circuit 101 checks the order of the commands received from the main control circuit 91, determines that a sequence error has occurred when the order of the commands is abnormal, ends the high-probability gaming state, and returns to the normal gaming state. Move to Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining unfair profits due to wrongdoing.

  When a sequence error has occurred, a history of the sequence errors that have occurred may be stored. Although it is difficult to determine whether the generated sequence error is caused artificially due to wrongdoing or is caused irrespective of the operation of the player due to a failure of the pachislot 1 or the like, it is difficult to determine whether the sequence error has occurred. By accumulating the error occurrence history, it is possible to grasp the tendency of misconduct (goto). For example, a sequence error caused by misconduct is likely to occur when a situation that is advantageous to the player by occurrence occurs, and a sequence error that occurs naturally regardless of the player occurs regardless of the situation Therefore, when a sequence error occurs due to an illegal act, a similar history is accumulated as a sequence error occurrence history. Therefore, a specific command can be received in a specific game state by making it possible to grasp the game state in which the sequence error has occurred and the type of command that could not be received by the sub-control circuit 101 from the tendency of the sequence error occurrence history. By making it impossible, it is possible to grasp the situation where the player unreasonably gains profit, which can be used for designing the gaming machine in the future.

<Normal Start CZ / ART Lottery Processing>
FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the normal start time CZ / ART lottery process executed in S422 of the start command receiving process shown in FIG. 139.

  First, based on the internal winning combination and the effect ball set in the apocalypse in the current game, the sub CPU 102 refers to the start-time ART random determination table shown in FIGS. (A) and (D) are performed (S441). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not CZ has been won in this lottery (S442). If the CZ has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the CZ to the game state of the next game (S443), and ends the normal start CZ / ART lottery process.

  On the other hand, if the CZ has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART has been won in the lottery in S441 (S444). If the ART has not been won (NO), the normal start CZ / ART lottery process is terminated, while if the ART has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the gaming state to the ART gaming state. The enemy determination ART is set (S445). Since the ART gaming state is the main side RT4 gaming state, the RT4 transition lip is displayed, and the main side must transition to the RT4 gaming state. Therefore, “setting the enemy-determining ART of the ART gaming state as the gaming state” does not mean that the gaming state of the next game becomes the enemy-determining ART of the ART gaming state, but the RT4 gaming state on the main side. Means that the sub-side game state becomes the enemy-determined ART of the ART game state. This is the same in the following.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104, randomly determines the ART state based on the gaming state at the time of the ART winning, and sets the lottery result (S446). When this process ends, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal start-time CZ / ART lottery process.

<Revelation operation processing>
FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the apocalypse operation processing executed in S423 of the processing at the time of reception of the start command shown in FIG. 139.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the apocalypse flag is on (S451). At this time, if it is determined that the apocalypse flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S457.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S451 that the apocalypse flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs apocalypse lottery based on the current winning mode (S452). Specifically, with reference to the apocalypse operation lottery table of FIG. 79C, the amount of addition or subtraction of the guaranteed number of times is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination. Next, the sub CPU 102 updates the current guaranteed number of times based on the lottery result of S452 (S453).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the guaranteed number is 1 or more (S454). If it is determined that the guaranteed number of times is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 draws an effect ball by lot, sets it in apocalypse (S455), and proceeds to the process of S462. More specifically, the sub CPU 102 randomly selects an apocalypse MAP and randomly determines an effect ball based on MAP data defined in the apocalypse MAP (see FIGS. 80 to 83). In this process, the sub CPU 102 upgrades the effect ball set in the apocalypse with a predetermined probability when the promotion lottery is possible (when the guaranteed number of movement of the accessory is 1 or more).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the guaranteed number of times is not one or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 updates the apocalypse flag to off, ends the operation of the apocalypse (S456), and then proceeds to the processing of S462.

  If it is determined in S451 that the apocalypse flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs apocalypse lottery based on the current winning mode (S457). Specifically, with reference to the apocalypse operation lottery tables of FIGS. 79 (A) and 79 (B), the addition amount of the guaranteed number of times is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 updates the current guaranteed number of times based on the lottery result of S457 (S458).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the guaranteed number is 1 or more (S459). If it is determined that the number of legal phases is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the apocalypse flag and starts the operation of the apocalypse (S460). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 to the apocalypse (S461).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 performs a lottery for shifting to a winning mode based on the internal winning combination (S462). More specifically, the sub CPU 102 randomly selects the transfer destination winning mode with reference to the mode shift lottery tables shown in FIGS. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result as the winning mode of the next game (S463), and ends the apocalypse operation processing.

<High-probability game state transition processing>
FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the high-probability gaming state transition processing executed in S425 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 139.

  First, the sub CPU 102 randomly selects an avoidance point based on the internal winning combination (S465). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 randomly selects the avoidance point addition amount with reference to the avoidance table lottery table shown in FIG. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery of the avoidance point has been won, that is, whether or not one or more avoidance points are added (S466). If a win has been made (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets an avoidance point based on the lottery result (S467), and ends the high-probability gaming state transition processing. On the other hand, if the winning has not been achieved (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high-probability gaming state transition processing.

<High-probability medium effect registration processing>
FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the high-probability effect presentation registration processing executed in S427 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 139.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pressing order bell or the pressing order lip is determined as an internal winning combination (S471). If it is determined that neither the pushing order bell nor the pushing order lip is determined as an internal winning combination (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high-probability medium effect registration process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing order bell or the pressing order lip is determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the avoidance point is 1 or more (S472). If it is determined that the avoidance point is not one or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high-probability effect registration process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the avoidance point is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the navigation data that is the correct answer in the pressing order (S473). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the avoidance point (S474), and ends the high-probability medium effect registration process.

  As described above, in the high-probability gaming state, when the pressing order bell or the pressing order lip is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct pressing order is notified based on the avoidance point. For the player, by playing the game according to the notification, the high-probability gaming state can be continued, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. Here, in the high-probability gaming state, it is easier to win a lottery transition to the ART than in the normal gaming state, and when the correct pushing order is notified in the high-probability gaming state, the player has the high-probability gaming state. The benefit of continuing is already granted. Therefore, when the push order of the correct answer is notified in the high-probability game state, the lottery result of the shift lottery in the game may be discarded (invalid). This can prevent the profit of the player from becoming excessive.

<ART lottery processing at CZ start>
FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the CZ start-time ART lottery processing executed in S429 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 139.

  First, the sub CPU 102 updates the number of continuous games in CZ (S481). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the first game of CZ (S482). If it is determined that the game is the first game of CZ (YES), the sub CPU 102 randomly selects and sets CZ_MAP. Specifically, the sub-CPU 102 refers to the CZ_MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 91 to randomly select and set the CZ_MAP used during CZ (S483).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines and sets the initial value of the invalid point (S484). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines and sets the initial value of the invalid point with reference to the invalid point lottery table shown in FIG.

  After S484, or if it is determined in S482 that the game is not the first game of CZ (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently randomly draws an effect ball and sets it in Apocalypse (S485). Specifically, the sub-CPU 102 refers to the CZ effect ball lottery table shown in FIG. 94, and randomly draws and sets the effect ball based on the last effect ball currently set. Further, in this processing, when the invalid point is 1 or more, the sub CPU 102 rewrites the developed ball set in the apocalypse to the avoidance ball.

  It is determined whether or not the 30th game of the CZ is performed (S486). If it is determined that the game is the 30th game of the CZ (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the enemy determination ART in the ART gaming state as the gaming state (S487). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 randomly selects and sets the ART state based on the CZ mode 2 with reference to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104 (S488). Then, the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ start-time ART lottery process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is not the 30th game of the CZ (NO), the sub CPU 102 randomly selects and adds invalid points based on the internal winning combination (S489). More specifically, the sub CPU 102 randomly selects an additional amount of the invalid point with reference to the invalid point lottery tables shown in FIGS. 93 (B) and 93 (C) and adds the added amount to the currently held invalid point.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an advanced ball and the pressing order bell is determined as an internal winning combination (S490). If both conditions are satisfied (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the invalid point is 1 or more (S491). When determining that the invalid point is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently subtracts 1 from the invalid point (S492), and sets the present CZ mode notification effect data (S493).

  For example, the effect data indicates or presents that the current CZ mode is 1 or that the CZ mode increases from 0 to 1 in a few games (for example, two or three times). Production data for Specifically, the production data with different probabilities set when the CZ mode is 1 and when the CZ mode is 0, when the CZ mode is increased from 0 to 1 in a game within a predetermined number of times, and when the CZ mode is within a predetermined number of times This is effect data having different probabilities that are set when the game does not go from 0 to 1 in the game. This allows the player to estimate or grasp the current CZ mode when the number of invalid points is one or more.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 102 determines in S491 that the invalid point is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the CZ ART random determination table shown in FIG. ), And sets the lottery completion flag to ON (S494). As described above, during the CZ, when the development ball is set and the push order bell is won, the shift lottery (C) is performed. However, when the answer is correct in the stop order at the stop, the shift lottery (C) lottery result is invalidated. Is done. The lottery completion flag is used to determine whether to invalidate or maintain the lottery result at the time of stopping. When the process of S494 ends, the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ start-time ART lottery process.

  On the other hand, in S490, if any of the conditions is not satisfied (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an avoidance ball ( S495). If it is determined that the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is the avoidance ball (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the effect data for the current CZ mode notification (S496), and the CZ start ART lottery process. To end. Also, in S495, when it is determined that the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is not the avoidance ball (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ start-time ART lottery process. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes an advantageous state lottery means, and shifts to the ART based on the CZ mode performed in the middle of CZ, or shifts to the ART based on the CZ mode 2 performed when the CZ is completed. Execute the lottery.

<ART lottery processing during BB>
FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the BB ART random determination process executed in S431 of the start command receiving process shown in FIG. 139.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the seven matching lips have been determined as an internal winning combination (S501). When it is determined that the seven matching rips are determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the transfer lottery (F) to the ART during BB with reference to the BB start-time ART lottery table shown in FIG. . Referring to FIG. 98, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART winning flag to ON in order to win the transfer lottery (F) without fail (S502). The ART winning flag is information indicating that the ART has been won in the middle of the bonus state, and is referred to when the bonus ends.

  Subsequent to S502 or if it is determined in S501 that the seven matching rips are not determined as the internal winning combination (NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the BB mode up lottery table shown in FIGS. 99 and 100. Then, a mode up lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination (S503). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the BB mode based on the lottery result (S504), and ends the BB ART random determination process.

<Process during ART>
FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the processing during ART executed in S433 of the processing at the time of reception of the start command shown in FIG. 139.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state is during the enemy-determining ART (S511). If it is determined that the enemy determination ART is not being performed (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the battle ART processing shown in FIG. 148 (S517), and ends the ART processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the enemy determination is being performed (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the determined flag is on (S512). The determined flag is information for determining whether or not the opponent enemy character is determined during the enemy determination ART. If it is determined that the determined flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the enemies-determining ART processing shown in FIG. 147 (S516), and ends the ART processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the determined flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines the HP of the enemy character based on the internal winning combination with reference to the boss power random determination table during enemy determination ART shown in FIG. (S513). Subsequently, effect data for introducing an enemy character is set (S514). The effect data for introducing the enemy character is, for example, effect data for displaying the boss status shown in FIG. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 turns off the determined flag, sets the battle ART to the game state of the next game (S515), and ends the processing during the ART.

<Process during enemy determination ART>
FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the enemies-determining ART processing executed in S516 of the ART processing shown in FIG. 146.

  First, the sub CPU 102 draws an effect ball by lottery and sets it in Apocalypse (S521). More specifically, the sub CPU 102 randomly determines an effect ball based on the boss MAP data defined in the boss MAP and the ART state (see FIGS. 105 to 108). In this process, the sub CPU 102 also performs stock lottery of friendly balls, and if there is stock, rewrites the boss ball set in the apocalypse to a friendly ball (see FIG. 109). When the guaranteed number of games that guarantees the number of continuous games of the enemy-determined ART is used as described above, the process of S521 may not be performed during the guaranteed number of games.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 performs an HP initial setting process of the ally character (S522). In this process, if the HP of the ally character is less than the initial value (HP50), the sub CPU 102 sets the HP of the ally character to the initial value.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a boss ball (S523). If it is determined that the boss ball has been set (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not a bell has been won (S524). At this time, if it is determined that a bell has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the enemies-determining ART processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that a bell has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines an enemy character corresponding to the boss ball as an opponent (S525). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the determined flag to ON (S526), and ends the enemies determining ART processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S523 that the boss ball is not set (that is, the ally ball is set) (NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the enemy-determined ART medium ally power addition lottery table shown in FIG. Based on the winning combination, a lottery is performed on the HP of the ally character (S527). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 updates the HP of the ally character based on the lottery result (S528), and ends the enemy-determining ART processing.

<Processing during Battle ART>
FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the battle ART processing executed in S517 of the ART processing shown in FIG. 146.

  First, the sub CPU 102 draws an effect ball by lottery and sets it in Apocalypse (S531). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 randomly determines an effect ball based on battle MAP data specified in the battle MAP (see FIGS. 113 to 119). In this process, the sub CPU 102 also rewrites the enemy ball based on the wake-up ball, and when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a wake-up ball and is equal to or more than a bell win. Rewrites the enemy ball set in Apocalypse to a friend ball.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 performs a damage random determination based on the effect ball and the internal winning combination (S532). Specifically, when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball, the sub CPU 102 performs damage lottery with reference to the battle ART damage lottery table illustrated in FIG. 118, If the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an ally ball or an awakening ball, the damage lottery is performed with reference to the battle ART damage lottery table illustrated in FIG. 119.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 updates the HP of the enemy character or the ally character based on the lottery result (S533). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the HP of the ally character is 0 or less (S534). If the HP of the ally character is determined to be 0 or less (YES), the sub CPU 102 terminates the ART gaming state, sets the normal gaming state to the next gaming state (S535), and terminates the battle ART processing.

  On the other hand, when determining that the HP of the ally character is not 0 or less (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the HP of the enemy character is 0 or less (S536). When determining that the HP of the enemy character is not equal to or less than 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 terminates the battle ART processing. On the other hand, if the HP of the enemy character is determined to be 0 or less (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table illustrated in FIGS. 120 and 121 to change the ART state based on the type of the enemy character and the number of continuations. Lottery is set and set (S537). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the enemy determination ART to the game state of the next game (S538), and ends the battle ART processing.

<Processing when receiving a winning operation command>
FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command, which is executed in S408 of the effect content determination processing shown in FIG. 138.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the high-probability gaming state (S541). If it is determined that the gaming state is either the normal gaming state or the high-probability gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs a normal end CZ / ART random determination shown in FIG. 150 (S542). In the normal end CZ / ART lottery, the above-mentioned start lottery (A) (D) and the like are performed based on the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game.

  Subsequent to the processing of S542 or if it is determined in S541 that the gaming state is neither the normal gaming state nor the high-probability gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently proceeds to the RT4 gaming state in which the gaming state is the normal gaming state. It is determined whether or not there is (S543). If it is determined that the gaming state is the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a high-probability transition determination process shown in FIG. 151 (S544). In this high-probability transition determination process, it is determined whether or not it is possible to transition from the RT4 gaming state in the normal gaming state to the high-probability gaming state.

  Subsequent to the processing of S544, or if it is determined in S543 that the gaming state is not the normal gaming state of the RT4 gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state. (S545). When determining that the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs a high-probability termination determination process illustrated in FIG. 152 (S546). In the high-probability end determination process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether to end the high-probability game state based on the combination of the displayed symbols.

  Subsequent to the processing of S546 or in S545, when determining that the gaming state is not the high-probability gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state is CZ (S547). If it is determined that the gaming state is CZ (YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a CZ random determination result management process shown in FIG. 153 (S548). In the CZ lottery result management process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether to maintain or invalidate the above-described transition lottery (C) performed in the middle of CZ.

  When the processing of S548 is completed, or when it is determined that the game state is not CZ (S547) (NO), the sub CPU 102 terminates the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command.

<CZ / ART lottery process at normal end>
FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the normal end CZ / ART random determination processing executed in S542 of the winning operation command reception processing shown in FIG. 149.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the apocalypse flag is on (S551). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the apocalypse flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the normal end CZ / ART lottery process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the apocalypse flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the bell prize is obtained (S552). If it is determined that the winning is not equal to or more than the bell prize (NO), the sub CPU 102 terminates the CZ / ART lottery process at the time of normal termination.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning is equal to or more than the bell prize (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently refers to the reel stop-time ART lottery table shown in FIG. 87 and determines based on the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game. Then, the lottery (A) (D) for shifting to CZ and ART is performed (S553).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not CZ has been won in this lottery (S554). If the CZ has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the CZ to the game state of the next game (S555), and ends the CZ / ART random determination process at the time of normal termination.

  On the other hand, if the CZ has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART has been won (S556). If the ART has not been won (NO), the CZ / ART lottery process at the normal end is terminated, while if the ART has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the gaming state to the ART gaming state. The enemy determination ART is set (S557). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104, randomly determines the ART state based on the gaming state at the time of the ART winning, and sets the lottery result (S558). When this process ends, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal end CZ / ART lottery process. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a lottery state starting means, and when the CZ is won in the lottery (A) (D) for shifting to CZ and ART based on the effect ball, the game state of the next game Is set to CZ to start CZ which is an advantageous state lottery state.

<High-probability transition determination processing>
FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the high-probability transition determination process executed in S544 of the winning operation command reception process shown in FIG. 149.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the spilled bell or the RT1 transition lip is displayed (S561). If it is determined that the bell spilled eye or the RT1 transition lip has been displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently clears the number of replays and the avoidance point (S562), and ends the high-probability transition determination processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the spilled bell nor the RT1 transition lip is displayed (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the avoidance point is 1 or more (S563). If it is determined that the avoidance point is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the high-probability gaming state to the next gaming state (S564). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 clears the number of replays (S565), and ends the high-probability transition determination process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the avoidance point is not one or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether a combination of symbols related to replay other than the RT1 transition lip is displayed (S566). If it is determined that the symbol combination related to the replay other than the RT1 transition lip is not displayed (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high-probability transition determination processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that a symbol combination related to replay other than the RT1 transition lip has been displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 adds one to the number of replays (S567), and ends the high-probability transition determination process. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a high-probability state transition unit, and based on winning of the avoidance point lottery in the above-described high-probability game state transition processing (see FIG. 142), the sub-control circuit 101 executes The game state is shifted to a high-probability game state in which the transfer lottery has a high probability of winning.

  As described above, in the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, when the main side shifts to the RT4 game state during the normal game state, the normal game state is maintained until the avoidance point is given, and the avoidance point is given. Transition to the high-probability gaming state. As in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine in which the situation in which the game machine has shifted to the RT4 gaming state by chance is not a penalty section but a chance section, it is necessary to adjust the balance so as not to be too advantageous for the player. In this regard, even if the main side shifts to the RT4 gaming state, it is possible to adjust the balance between the profits of both the player and the gaming shop by treating the main side as the normal gaming state until the avoidance point is given. Of course, it is sufficient that the balance between the two benefits is adjusted in the entire gaming machine, so that the main game may immediately shift from the normal gaming mode to the high-probability gaming mode when the main mode shifts to the RT4 gaming mode.

<High-probability termination determination processing>
FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the high-probability-end determining process executed in S546 of the winning-operation-time command receiving process shown in FIG. 149.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a spilled bell or an RT1 transition lip is displayed (S571). If it is determined that neither the spilled bell nor the RT1 transition lip is displayed (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high probability end determination processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the bell spilled eye or the RT1 transition lip is displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently clears the avoidance point (S572). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal game state as the game state of the next game (S573), and ends the high-probability end determination processing. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a low-probability state transition unit, and when the bell spilled eye or the RT1 transition lip is displayed, the sub-control circuit 101 enters the normal gaming state in which the probability of winning the ART transition lottery is low. The game state is shifted.

<CZ Lottery Result Management Processing>
FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the CZ lottery result management processing executed in S548 of the winning operation command reception processing shown in FIG. 149.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery completion flag is on (S581). If it is determined that the lottery completion flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ lottery result management process.

  On the other hand, when determining that the lottery completion flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the answer is correct in the order of pressing (S582). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the stop operation has been performed in the pressing order according to the pressing order bell that has been won in S490 of FIG. 144, in other words, according to “C_CD bell (see FIG. 30)”. It is determined whether or not the combination of the symbols has been displayed. If it is determined that the answer is correct in the pressing order according to the pressing order bell (YES), the sub CPU 102 discards (invalidates) the lottery result (S583) and ends the CZ lottery result management process. As a result, CZ is continued. Note that, as described above, when the answer is correct in the pressing order according to the pressing order bell, the lottery result may be maintained while CZ is continued.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the answer is not correct in the pressing order according to the pressing order bell (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the ART is won (S584). If it is determined that the ART has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently sets the normal game state to the game state of the next game (S587), and ends the CZ lottery result management process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the ART has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the enemy-determined ART of the ART gaming state as the gaming state (S585). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104, randomly determines the ART state based on the gaming state at the time of the ART winning, and sets the lottery result (S586). When this process ends, the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ lottery result management process. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a lottery state ending means, and based on the fact that it is determined that the pressing order of the pressing order of the bells is not correct during CZ, the sub-control circuit 101 sets the gaming state of the next game. When the normal game state is set, or when the CZ completes running (YES in S486 of FIG. 144) in the above-mentioned ART random determination processing at the time of CZ start (see FIG. 144), the ART game state is set as the next game state. .

<Process when receiving bonus end command>
FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the processing upon reception of the bonus end command, which is executed in S410 of the effect content determination processing shown in FIG. 138.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs a lottery transition (F) to the ART based on the current BB mode with reference to the BB end time lottery table shown in FIG. 101 (S591). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART has been won (S592). If it is determined that the ART has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the ART winning flag is ON (S593). If both S592 and S593 are NO, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal game state to the game state of the next game (S596), and ends the process at the time of receiving the bonus end command.

  On the other hand, if YES in either one of S592 and S593, the sub CPU 102 sets the enemy determination ART in the ART gaming state as the gaming state (S594). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104, randomly determines the ART state based on the gaming state at the time of the ART winning, and sets the lottery result (S595). When this processing ends, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the bonus end command.

[Effect of Pachislot 1]
The pachislo 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachislot 1, the following effects can be expected.

<Effect of JACIN carried over during bonus status>
In the pachislot 1, if any of the combinations related to JACIN (“F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, “F_JACIN3”) is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus state, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed (while the carryover is being performed). ), A bonus state RT4 game state is set. In the bonus state RT4 gaming state, JAC1 replays such as “F_J1 upper 7 lip” to “F_J1 cross 7 lip”, JAC2 replays such as “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip”, and “F_FJ3” A JAC3-related replay such as "chance lip 1" to "F_J3 cherry lip" can be determined as an internal winning combination (see FIGS. 35 and 36).

  In the pachislot 1, stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed based on the gaming state and the internal winning combination. For example, if a JAC1 replay is determined as an internal winning combination in a state where “F_JACIN1” is carried over as an internal winning combination, in the game, two types of roles, “F_JACIN1” and a JAC1 replay, are used internally. If the replay of the JAC1 system is determined as the internal winning combination in a state where “F_JACIN2” is carried over as the internal winning combination, the game is determined to be “F_JACIN2”. This means that two types of winning combinations, JAC1 type replays, are determined as internal winning combinations.

  Therefore, in the pachislot 1, the stop control can be made different depending on the type of the role of the carryover JACIN. When the replay of the JAC1 system to the replay of the JAC3 system is determined as the internal winning combination, The stop control is performed so that the symbol combination having the correspondence shown in 57 is displayed. By making the privilege (ART) given to the player different by using such control, in the pachislot 1, it is possible to make a difference whether or not the privilege is given according to the type of the carryover combination. The game in the state can be diversified, and the interest in the game in the bonus state can be enhanced.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 57, when the replay of the JAC1 system is determined as the internal winning combination in a state where “F_JACIN1” is carried over as the internal winning combination, “7-set lip” is displayed, and “F_JACIN2” is displayed. If the JAC1 replay is determined as the internal winning combination in a state where the internal winning combination has been carried over, “normal lip” is displayed. By making the stop control different between the situation where the privilege is given and the situation where the privilege is not given, it is possible to know whether or not the privilege is given from the combination of the displayed symbols. The player has a strong interest in the combination of the displayed symbols, and can increase the interest in the game during the bonus state.

  In addition, referring to FIG. 57, in the pachislot 1, stop control capable of displaying “7-set lip” is performed only in the case of the JAC1 system replay, and in the case of the JAC2 system replay or the JAC3 system replay, Stop control that cannot display “7 sets of rips” is performed. In this regard, even in the case of a JAC2 system replay or a JAC3 system replay, the stop control may be performed so that “7 aligned rips” can be displayed. Specifically, when the replay of the JAC2 system is determined as the internal winning combination in a state where “F_JACIN2” is carried over as the internal winning combination, stop control capable of displaying “7-set lip” is performed, and “F_JACIN1” is performed. Alternatively, if the replay of the JAC2 system is determined as the internal winning combination in a state where “F_JACIN3” is carried over as the internal winning combination, stop control that cannot display “7-set lip” is performed. Similarly, when the replay of the JAC3 system is determined as the internal winning combination in a state where “F_JACIN3” is carried over as the internal winning combination, stop control capable of displaying “7-set lip” is performed, and “F_JACIN1” or “F_JACIN1” or “ When the replay of the JAC3 system is determined as the internal winning combination in a state where the “F_JACIN2” is carried over as the internal winning combination, stop control is performed so that “7-set lip” cannot be displayed.

  Then, when “7 sets of rips” can be displayed, by referring to the ART random determination table at the time of start during BB shown in FIG. 98, by performing the lottery (F) of shifting to the ART in the bonus state, the carryover combination Whether or not to give a privilege can be made different depending on the type, and the interest of the game during the bonus state can be enhanced.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. 36, the probability that the privilege is given by making the probabilities that the JAC1 replay, the JAC2 replay, and the JAC3 replay are determined as the internal winning combinations differ from each other. Can be provided, and the interest in the game during the bonus state can be enhanced.

  Note that the combination relationship between a carryover combination and a winning combination that can display “7 sets of lips” is arbitrary. For example, for a JAC1 type replay, the carryover role that can display “7-set lip” is only “F_JACIN1”, and for a JAC2 type replay, a carryover role that can display “7-set lip”. There may be two types of “F_JACIN1” and “F_JACIN2”, and for a JAC3 type replay, the carryover role that can display “7 sets of rips” may be all of “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3”. Of course, the present invention is not limited to such a combination, and may be an arbitrary combination.

<Effects of the high-probability game state>
In the pachislot 1, an RT4 gaming state is provided as a high RT state in which the combination relating to replay is determined to be an internal winning combination with a high probability, and when a transition to the ART is won, information of an advantageous stop operation in this RT4 gaming state is notified. By doing so, the ART gaming state is realized (see FIG. 66). Note that, in the pachislot 1, the state shifts to the RT4 game state when the answer is correct in the pressing order according to the pressing order lip during the RT0 game state. In the pachislot 1, if the transition to the ART has not been won and the player accidentally transitions to the RT4 gaming state due to a stop operation, the transition to the ART also occurs in the RT4 gaming state that is accidentally transitioned without being treated as a penalty. A lottery that is advantageous to the player such as a lottery is performed. Since the RT4 gaming state is a high RT state, it is possible to play a game without consuming medals. Therefore, in the pachislot 1, the RT4 gaming state that has not won the ART is set to the ART transition chance section. It is possible to enhance the interest during the high RT state in which the privilege is not given.

  In addition, since the lottery for transition to the ART is performed during the RT4 gaming state, the strategy for the stop operation during the normal gaming state is increased, and the interest during the normal gaming state can be enhanced. Specifically, in a pachislot that treats a case where the player has accidentally shifted to the RT4 game state by a stop operation as a penalty, the stop operation during the normal game state is simple (for example, the first stop operation so as not to receive a penalty). Must be performed on the left reel). In this regard, the pachislot 1 does not impose a penalty during the RT4 game state that has been shifted to by accident, so that the player can freely perform a stop operation during the normal game state, and can perform only the playability during the normal game state. Operability can also be improved.

  In addition, in the pachislo 1, as long as there is an avoidance point, information of an advantageous stop operation in the RT4 gaming state that has accidentally shifted to (push order for avoiding shifting to the RT1 gaming state) is notified. Thus, if the game player accidentally shifts to the RT4 game state, the game does not immediately shift to the normal game state, and for a predetermined period, the player can receive the lottery for shifting to the ART with a high replay winning probability. .

  Note that by setting the RT4 gaming state to a high-probability gaming state in which the probability of winning the transition to ART is high, it is possible to make the RT4 gaming state shifted by chance into a transition chance section to ART, and a benefit is provided. Enhancement during a high RT state that is not performed can be enhanced.

  In the pachislot 1, an RT0 game state that can be shifted to the RT4 game state and an RT1 game state that cannot be shifted to the RT4 game state are provided as the normal game state. In the pachislot, it is necessary to adjust the balance between the player's profit and the game store's profit so as not to give excessive profit to either the player or the game store. In this regard, the pachislot 1 according to the present invention in which the accidentally shifted RT4 gaming state is shifted to the ART chance section and the other gaming machines in which the accidentally shifted RT4 gaming state shifts to the penalty interval are compared. The pachislo 1 according to the present invention is more advantageous for a player than other gaming machines. Therefore, in the pachislot 1, by providing an RT1 game state that cannot be shifted to the RT4 game state, it is possible to adjust the balance between both benefits. As a result, it is possible to diversify variables for adjusting the balance between both profits, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is rich in gaming properties.

<Effect of apocalypse during normal game state (high-probability game state)>
The pachislot 1 has a complete run type CZ as an ART chance zone. When the apocalypse is activated during the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, the lottery (A) and (D) for shifting to the CZ when the reel is stopped is performed. The shift lotteries (A) and (D) have a probability corresponding to the effect balls (lottery balls 1 to 4 and fixed balls) set in the apocalypse when the combination of the displayed symbols is “bell winning” or more. Done. As described above, the transfer lottery (A) and (D) are performed in consideration of not only the contents of the effect (the effect ball set in the apocalypse) but also the combination of the symbols displayed as a result of the game, thereby shifting the game state. , The operation of the player can be interposed, and the fairness of the game can be secured.

  Further, since the lottery (A) and (D) for shifting to the CZ when the reel is stopped is performed when the combination of the displayed symbols is equal to or more than the "bell winning", the rare combination as the internal winning combination during the apocalypse operation. Even if it is not determined, the player can receive the shift lottery (A) (D). Therefore, it is possible to give more opportunities to have a sense of expectation as compared with the case of performing the lottery of the game state based on the rare combination, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the operation of the apocalypse ends when the guaranteed number of times becomes 0. However, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), the guaranteed number is subtracted at the time of pressing the bell in the pushing order, so that during the operation of the apocalypse, the player is instructed. The opportunity to receive the transfer lottery (A) (D) for the guaranteed number of times is given (the player can receive the transfer lottery (A) (D) by correctly answering in the pressing order at this opportunity). . As a result, according to the pachislo 1, it is possible to avoid a situation in which there is no opportunity to receive the transfer lottery (A) (D) during the apocalypse operation, and to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced. it can. Note that, with reference to FIG. 79 (C), the guaranteed number of times is also subtracted when the internal winning combination is “losing”. In this regard, the guaranteed number of times may be subtracted only in the case of a pushing order bell without subtracting the number of guaranteed times in the case of “outside”, whereby the effect described above becomes clearer.

<Effects by the promotion lottery of the hidden effect ball>
Here, in the pachislot 1, even if the apocalypse is not operating, the effect ball to be set during the operation of the apocalypse is managed. More specifically, in the pachislot 1, the promotion lottery of the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 (that is, the effect ball that is not displayed) is performed in a state where the apocalypse is inactive. By performing this promotion lottery in conjunction with the driving of the rotating accessory 200, which is the centerpiece, the player plays a game in the hope that the player will be promoted to a more advantageous effect ball during the period in which the centerpiece appears. As a result, the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, since the light emission of the rotating accessory 200 is controlled based on the result of the promotion lottery, a player expects that the effect ball has been promoted to a more advantageous effect ball from the player. Can be inferred from the color. As a result, if it can be inferred that the game has become advantageous, the player will have a strong interest in the later game, so that the player can continue the game without getting bored.

<Management of production ball at power-on>
In the pachislo 1, the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 is rewritten to a new effect ball based on the time at which the power is turned on. From the time when the power is turned on, for example, it is known that the time is before business hours at the game store, and by comparing with the time when the power source is turned off, it is before business hours the next day. Therefore, for example, when it is determined from the time when the power is turned on that it is the start of business on the next day, by setting a new effect ball different from the previous day, the change of the set value from the effect ball can be performed. It can be prevented that the presence or absence is grasped, and the fairness among the players is not impaired. On the other hand, if it can be determined from the time when the power is turned on that the power is only temporarily turned off, the pachislot 1 maintains the effect ball without rewriting, thereby playing the game before and after the power is turned off. Maintain the status of the aircraft. For the player, even if the power supply is temporarily cut off when an advantageous effect ball is registered for himself, the advantageous effect ball will be maintained after the power is turned on again, so it is dissatisfied. You can play without feeling.

  In addition, in the pachislot 1, when the effect ball is rewritten, the effect ball to be newly set is determined by lottery. As a method of making it difficult to grasp whether or not the setting value has been changed, a method of rewriting the effect ball to the effect ball in a predetermined initial state when the power is turned on the next day can be considered, but such a method requires a plurality of gaming machines. If the game is installed, the diversity of the game is reduced. Therefore, in the pachislot 1, the variety of the game is ensured by randomly determining the effect ball to be newly set.

<Effects of CZ>
The pachislot 1 has a CZ of a complete run type as an ART chance zone. In this CZ, although the transition lottery performed in the middle of the CZ performed at the time of the pressing order bell winning is maintained, even if the transition lottery is performed, if the stop operation is performed in the correct pushing order to the pressing order bell even if the transition lottery is performed. , The transfer lottery becomes invalid, and CZ continues. In such a CZ, since it is possible to receive a lottery transition to the ART not only at the time of the pressing order bell winning but also at the time of CZ completion, even if the pressing order bell is not won at all during the CZ, the player Will be given a chance to move to ART, so that the interest in CZ can be improved.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, a more advantageous privilege is given (transition to an advantageous ART) at the time of CZ completion, so that the player cancels the transition lottery in the middle of the CZ performed at the time of the push order bell winning. As a result, the player becomes interested in the combination of the displayed symbols, and the interest in each game in the CZ can be improved. In addition, since the player wants to complete the CZ more advantageously, it is possible to maintain the interest in the CZ to the end.

  In the pachislot 1, an invalid point is given during CZ, and as long as the invalid point remains, the transfer lottery in the middle of CZ is invalidated. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of receiving a shift lottery at the time of CZ completion, which is more advantageous, and it is possible to improve the interest during CZ.

  Further, the pachislot 1 includes a plurality of CZ modes having different degrees of expectation to win the transfer lottery in the middle of the CZ, and only upgrades the CZ mode according to the number of continuous games in the CZ. As a result, in the pachislot 1, the degree of expectation of ART transition increases as the CZ continues, so that the player has a strong interest in the combination of the symbols displayed in the CZ, and the interest in the CZ increases. Can be improved.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, when an invalid point remains, an effect of suggesting or notifying the current CZ mode is performed. As a result, the player can grasp or guess to what degree the CZ has continued as a result of the continuation, and can enhance the interest in the CZ. The effect of suggesting or notifying the current CZ mode may be performed regardless of the invalid point. That is, the pachi-slot 1 may perform a predetermined effect by comparing the number of games to be shifted from the CZ mode 0 to the CA mode 1 specified in CZ_MAP with the number of CZ continuous games up to the present.

  In the case where the lottery in the CZ is performed in the shift lottery in the middle of the CZ, which is performed at the time of the pressing order bell during the CZ, the lottery result may be maintained regardless of whether or not there is a correct answer in the pressing order. Then, if the winning in the transfer lottery in the middle of the CZ is maintained, and if the answer is correct in the order of the pressing, the CZ is continued while granting the ART right by the number according to the lottery result. On the other hand, in the case where the winning in the transfer lottery in the middle of the CZ is maintained, if the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing, although the CZ ends, the ART right is granted based on the lottery result.

  By doing in this way, it is possible to expect that the lottery to be transferred to the ART during the CZ will be won a plurality of times. It does not make the player feel. Further, from the viewpoint of the player, if the stop operation can be performed so that the CZ does not end when the transfer lottery in the middle of the CZ is performed, then the transfer lottery in the middle of the CZ or the transfer lottery in the CZ complete run is further received. Since an opportunity can be obtained, the player has a strong interest in the stop operation during CZ, and the interest in the game during CZ can be improved.

<Effect of BB mode during bonus state>
The pachislot 1 includes a plurality of BB modes having different degrees of expectation for winning the lottery transition to the ART during the bonus state, and promotes the BB mode based on the internal winning combination during the bonus state. As described above, the probability of winning the lottery transition to the ART based on the internal winning combination in the bonus state is changed, so that the player has a strong interest in the internal winning combination in each game in the bonus state. , The interest during the bonus state can be enhanced.

  In particular, in the pachislot 1, in the BB mode with a low expectation of winning the transfer lottery, the BB mode is upgraded with many winning combinations, whereas in the BB mode with a high expectation of winning the transfer lottery, a small number of types of winning combinations are raised. BB mode can only be upgraded. As a result, as the BB mode is upgraded, the types of winning combinations to be promoted to the higher BB mode are reduced, but as the BB mode is promoted, the degree of expectation to win the shift lottery is increased. It is possible to create a game form that is upgraded to. For the player, instead of being interested in one game result in the bonus state, he will be interested in a series of game results in the bonus state, and to increase interest in the bonus state Can be.

  The upgrade of the BB mode may be performed only one stage at a time, or a plurality of stages may be upgraded at a time. In the case where control is performed such that the upgrade can be performed only one step at a time, the degree of expectation during staying in the BB mode having a low degree of expectation to win the shift lottery is reduced as compared with the case where the upgrade can be performed in a plurality of steps at once. Since it is easy to upgrade from the mode, it is easy to create a game mode in which the gaming state is gradually upgraded.

  In the pachislot 1, if a JAC2 replay or a JAC3 replay is determined as an internal winning combination during the bonus state, it is handled as “chan lip” according to the type of the carryover combination carried over as the internal winning combination. In some cases, it is treated as a replay (see FIG. 96). Then, the BB mode is promoted when treated as “chan lip”, and the BB mode is not promoted when treated as “replay”. As a result, the games in the bonus state can be diversified, and the interest in the bonus state can be enhanced.

<Start control of the enemy decision ART after the bonus ends>
In the pachislot 1, if the combination related to JACIN is determined as an internal winning combination (carryover) during the bonus state, the state shifts to the high RT state (RT4 game state), and a combination of symbols according to the combination related to JACIN is displayed. And a low RT state (RT2 game state). Since this RT state is maintained even after the bonus state ends, if the bonus state ends in the low RT state, the state becomes the low RT state even in the bonus non-winning state.

  From the player's point of view, it is sufficient to perform the stop operation while avoiding the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the role related to JACIN, but a player with little knowledge of the pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment does not necessarily have to do so. It is not always possible to perform a simple stop operation, and the player may be disadvantaged. Here, in the case of the low RT state, the control of preparing the ART without executing the ART is often performed. If the state of preparing the ART continues, the player is likely to feel dissatisfied, and the interest is reduced. In addition, the time efficiency is reduced by the period of preparation. The disadvantage to the player may be, for example, a decrease in interest during preparation or a decrease in time efficiency.

  In this regard, in the pachislot 1, when the bonus state ends with the ART being won, regardless of the type of the RT gaming state, the ART (more specifically, AT) is executed to reduce the disadvantage to the player. I do. Specifically, the pachislot 1 has an enemy-determined ART and a battle ART as ART game states, and determines whether the ART game state is continued in the battle ART performed after the enemy-determined ART. A game in which the continuation expectation degree of the ART gaming state is increased, such as an increase in the HP of the character. Therefore, even if the ART is executed in the low RT state after the bonus state ends, the enemy-determining ART, which is a chance section for increasing the degree of continuation expectation, can be executed first. It is possible to alleviate a decrease in interest (detriment) without becoming a problem. In addition, since the period during the preparation is not provided in the first place, the time efficiency is not reduced, and the disadvantage to the player can be reduced.

<Effect of enemy-determined ART>
In the pachislot 1, a boss ball is set in the apocalypse during the enemy determination ART, and an enemy character to compete in the battle ART is determined according to the type of the boss ball set at the time of winning the push order bell. During the battle ART, the reduction amount of the HP of the ally character and the reduction amount of the HP of the enemy character are changed according to the type of the enemy character. As a result, the result of the game during the enemy-determined ART affects the continuation of the ART gaming state, and thus the player's interest in the continuation of the ART gaming state can be maintained over a plurality of games. it can.

  In the pachislot 1, both the attack power and the defense power are set for the enemy character. Therefore, both the reduction amount of the HP of the ally character and the reduction amount of the HP of the enemy character are individually set for each enemy character. Can be set. As a result, various types of enemy characters such as an enemy character having high attack power and defense power, an enemy character having only high one of them, and an enemy character having low one of both can be employed. The game during the battle ART can be diversified according to the result of the game.

  In the pachislot 1, a speed is also set for the enemy character, and the frequency at which the enemy character attacks during the battle ART is determined based on the speed set for the enemy character. Thereby, the game during the battle ART can be further diversified according to the result of the game during the enemy determination ART.

  In the pachislot 1, the HP of the ally character is added during the enemy determination ART. As a result, when a lot of additions are made, it becomes easy to avoid that the HP of the ally character becomes 0 during the battle ART, and the degree of expectation that the ART gaming state is continued increases. Become. As a result, not only the game during the battle ART but also the game during the enemy-determined ART affects the continuation of the ART gaming state, and thus the player's interest in the continuation of the ART gaming state is determined by a plurality of games. Can last for a long time.

  In the pachislot 1, when the HP of the ally character is less than the initial value during the enemy determination ART, the HP of the ally character is set to the initial value. As a result, the HP of the ally character becomes at least the initial value in the subsequent battle ART, so that it is possible to prevent the HP of the ally character from immediately becoming 0 during the battle ART, and as a result, the continued ART advantageous state is immediately obtained. The termination can be prevented.

  In the pachislot 1, the HP of the ally character during the enemy-determining ART is added according to the type of the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. Thereby, for example, when the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the additional amount can be increased, so that the rare combination is not wasted and the interest during the enemy-determining ART is improved. Can be.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, when the rare role is determined as the internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, the stock lottery of the friend ball is performed, and when the stock lottery is won, the boss ball set in the apocalypse is changed to the friend ball. rewrite. The enemy-determining ART ends with a bell win in a game in which a boss ball is set in the area 113A of the apocalypse, so that the boss ball is replaced with a friend ball, so that the enemy-determining ART can be expected to continue, An increase in the HP of the ally character triggered by the ally ball can also be expected, and as a result, the degree of expectation to continue the battle ART also increases. In this case, by removing the boss balls 7 and 8 for which the continuation of the battle ART is determined from the boss ball to be rewritten, the battle ART is more easily continued, which is preferable.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, during the enemy determination ART, every time the effect ball to be set in the apocalypse is determined, the boss MAP (lottery information) defining the boss MAP data for determining the effect ball is updated. In the pachislot 1, this boss MAP is provided with a ceiling function, and when the boss MAP on the ceiling is reached, the HP of the boss ball 7, 8 for which the continuation of the battle ART is determined, or the HP of the ally character is increased. Only the friendly ball is determined as the production ball to be set in the apocalypse. From the player's point of view, if the enemy-determining ART continues for a long time, only the boss ball 7, 8 or the ally ball will be set in the apocalypse, so that the player is interested in the current boss MAP and plays the game. In other words, the interest of the game during the enemy determination ART is improved.

<Effects of Battle ART>
In the pachislot 1, an enemy ball or an ally ball is set in the apocalypse during the battle ART, and the HP of the enemy character or the ally character is reduced depending on the type of the effect ball set at the time of the pressing order bell winning. If the HP of the enemy character becomes 0 before the HP of the ally character becomes 0, the ART is continued, and if the HP of the ally character becomes 0 first, the ART is terminated. Here, since the internal winning combination is determined according to the player's start operation, the player actively participates in the game during the battle ART, and the motivation for the game can be improved. .

  Also, the target for decreasing the HP according to the bell in the order of pressing differs depending on the effect ball set in the apocalypse. Here, in the apocalypse, the effect ball up to the game of a plurality of destinations is set, so the player can play the game after grasping the set effect ball, a timing advantageous to the player side With this, you want to win the push order bell. This makes it possible to strongly associate the effect ball with the player's start operation, and to make the player play a game with a sense of tension, thereby improving the interest during the battle ART.

  Further, since the pushing sequence for decreasing the HP is the winning combination of the notification object during the battle ART, the determination of the pressing sequence bell as the internal winning combination affects the profit given during the battle ART. Will be. For example, depending on the gaming machine, the winning combination that reduces the HP of the ally character may be set as the replay, and the winning combination that decreases the HP of the enemy character may be set as the pressing order bell. However, in such a gaming machine, the presence or absence of the winning combination that affects the profit is directly connected to the continuation of the ART, and the game becomes monotonous. In this regard, the playability during the battle ART is diversified by making the winning of the push order bell that affects the profit, like the pachislot 1, advantageous or disadvantageous according to the set effect ball. It is possible to enhance interest during the battle ART.

  In the pachislot 1, when the so-called rare combination is won, the HP of the enemy character is reduced regardless of the set effect ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rare role from being wasted, and the player expects that the rare role is determined as the internal winning combination during the battle ART, thereby increasing the interest during the battle ART. Can be.

  In the pachi-slot 1, if four enemy balls are continuously set during the battle ART, a friend ball is always set next. This can prevent a situation that is disadvantageous for the player from continuing for a long period of time, so that the player can play the game during the battle ART with confidence.

<Sound when ART continuation is confirmed>
In addition, in the pachislo 1, when the continuation of the ART is determined, a special sound is output to notify the player that the ART will be continued. At this time, since the player may not be able to grasp the change only by changing the music in the ART, the pachislot 1 outputs a sound effect (siren) that is output only when the ART is continued before the change of the music. . Thereby, in the pachislo 1, the player can easily recognize that the ART is continued.

<Control of character during ART>
In the pachislot 1, during the ART, the rotating accessory 200 is driven in various modes, thereby performing a special effect during the ART and enlivening the game during the ART. In this case, when the player leaves the seat during the ART, the pachislo 1 stops driving the rotating accessory 200 and returns the movable portion of the rotating accessory 200 to the initial position (for example, closing the cover member 198). ). This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary consumption of the rotating auditors 200 while encouraging a game during the ART using the rotating auditors 200, thereby extending the life of the gaming machine.

<Switching production>
In the pachislot 1, the effects in the pachislot 1 are classified and set as a layer switching type effect and an effect switching type effect, the progress of the game such as a stop operation, and the operation of a predetermined operation button (for example, a chance button). At the moment, the effect is switched. Layer switching type effects are suitable for suppressing flickering of images, and by setting effects that cause flickering easily before and after switching and give the player discomfort as layer switching type effects, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, since the effect switching type effect requires a small processing load, it is possible to prevent the processing from being dropped in response to the effect switching.

  Further, in the pachislo 1, the player is prompted to perform an operation irrelevant to the progress of the game, such as a chance button, and the effect to be switched is different depending on whether the promoted predetermined operation is performed or not. As a result, the game characteristics are diversified, and the interest of the game is improved. Also in this case, by setting a preferable switching method for each effect, the effect can be appropriately switched according to the progress of the game.

<Panel control when calling non-production images>
In the pachislot 1, a so-called illuminator array (panel device 400) is provided on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 11, and a high effect effect can be performed by linking the display of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the display of the panel device 400. At this time, if a non-production image such as a menu screen or an error screen is called on the liquid crystal display device 11 during the production display on the panel device 400, the production display on the panel device 400 is overlaid on the non-production image, and the non-production image is visually recognized. Properties are significantly reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachislot 1, when a non-production image is called during the production in the panel device 400, the final output of the LED 403 that causes the panel device 400 to emit light is suppressed, so that the production in the panel device 400 becomes non-production image. The display is prevented from being covered. As described above, only the final output of the LED 403 is suppressed, and processing such as error processing is not added to the execution processing of the effect data itself, so that the processing at the time of calling the non-effect image can be simplified, and a bug Occurrence can be reduced.

  In addition, since only the final output of the LED 403 is suppressed and the light emission animation of the LED 403 continues internally, when the display of the non-production image is completed, the production on the panel device 400 is restarted from the middle. . Also in this case, since there is no need to add a process of interrupting or resuming the effect in the panel device 400, the process can be simplified and the occurrence of bugs can be reduced.

<Processing when a sequence error occurs>
The sub control circuit 101 of the pachislot 1 checks whether the order of the commands transmitted from the main control circuit 91 is normal, and performs a predetermined sequence error process when the order of the commands is abnormal. When a part of the game state is managed on the sub-control circuit 101 side, it is necessary to appropriately acquire various information in accordance with the progress of the game on the sub-control circuit 101 side. In some cases, the player may get unreasonable profits.

  Therefore, in the pachislo 1, when a sequence error occurs, a favorable state for the player is forcibly terminated, thereby preventing the player from gaining an unfair advantage. Specifically, if the sub-control circuit 101 cannot grasp that the bell spilled eye is displayed during the CZ, the player unfairly obtains the benefit of continuing the CZ. Therefore, in the pachislo 1, when a sequence error occurs during CZ, CZ is forcibly terminated, thereby preventing a player from gaining unfair profits due to fraud.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, if the sub control circuit 101 cannot grasp that the bell spilled eye or the RT1 transition lip is displayed during the high-probability game state, the player unreasonably takes advantage of the continuation of the high-probability game state. I get it. Therefore, in the pachislo 1, when a sequence error occurs during the high-probability game state, the high-probability game state is forcibly terminated, thereby preventing the player from gaining unfair profits due to fraud.

[Second embodiment]
The pachislo 1 of the first embodiment has been described above. Next, the pachislot 1 of the second embodiment will be described. In the pachi-slot 1 of the second embodiment, a description will be given of a control in a case where a transition is made to a bonus state during an enemy-determining ART. Specifically, management of the effect ball used in the enemy-determining ART after the bonus state shifted during the enemy-determining ART will be described.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the second embodiment, if the combination relating to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination during the enemy-determining ART, the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 is rewritten to a new effect ball. Here, the effect ball to be rewritten may be all of the six effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 or may be a part thereof. In the case of rewriting only a part of the effect balls, priority may be given to the boss balls 1 to 8 and the ally balls, and the effect ball to be rewritten may be determined according to the priority order. The number of effect balls to be rewritten may be determined by lottery. In other words, when the winning combination relating to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, a predetermined lottery may be performed to determine how many of the six rendering balls to rewrite.

  Further, since the boss balls 7, 8 and the friendly ball are advantageous effect balls for the player, these effect balls may be maintained without being rewritten. In the case where the boss balls 7, 8 and the friendly ball are effect balls that are not being displayed (that is, effect balls stored in the storage area “6” of the sub RAM 103), the player can grasp. Since the player does not feel dissatisfied even after rewriting, the non-displayed boss balls 7 and 8 and allied balls may be rewritten to new effect balls.

  The new effect ball can be determined based on the boss MAP by lottery and the boss MAP data defined in the boss MAP (see FIGS. 105 to 108). Here, as described above, the boss MAP is provided with a ceiling function, and when the boss MAP is updated to “52” or “53”, thereafter, only the boss balls 7, 8 and allied balls are determined as effect balls. Will be done. In the pachislot 1 of the second embodiment, when the role related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP for determining a new effect ball is updated to the advantageous boss MAP. Is also good.

  That is, in the pachi-slot 1 of the second embodiment, when the role related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination during the enemy-determining ART, the boss MAP used during the enemy-determining ART is updated so as to approach the ceiling. It may be that. Specifically, in a boss MAP that reaches the ceiling when updated to a predetermined value, a specific value may be added to the boss MAP used during the enemy-determining ART. For example, if the boss MAP used during the enemy-determining ART is the boss MAP "30" and the role related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, "10" is added to the boss MAP and the boss MAP is added. A new effect ball may be determined based on MAP “40”.

  As another specific example, instead of adding to the boss MAP used during the enemy-determining ART, if the role related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the specific boss MAP is updated. You may do it. For example, when the role related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination during the enemy-determining ART, the boss MAP “40” is set uniformly regardless of the boss MAP used during the enemy-determining ART, and a new effect ball is set. May be determined. Of course, without making the specific boss MAP uniform, for example, if the boss MAP used during the enemy-determining ART is in the first range (for example, the boss MAP “0” to “10”), 1 If a specific boss MAP (for example, boss MAP “20”) is used and the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART is in the second range (for example, boss MAP “11” to “20”), The second specific boss MAP (for example, boss MAP “30”) may be used.

As described above, in the pachislo 1 of the second embodiment, when the bonus state is entered during the enemy-determining ART, the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 is rewritten to a new effect ball. That is, in the second embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a profit state rewriting means, and when the combination relating to the bonus (BB) is determined as the internal winning combination during the enemy-determining ART, it is stored in the sub RAM 103. Rewrite all or part of the six effect balls.
In the ART gaming state, easiness of continuation is managed based on the effect ball, so that the enemy-determining ART after the bonus ends proceeds based on the new effect ball, thereby controlling the period of the ART gaming state. It can be rich in sex. In this case, the effect balls such as the boss balls 7 and 8 and the friendly balls, which are advantageous for the player, are maintained without being rewritten, so that the player can play the subsequent game with expectation, and Interestingness improves.

[Third embodiment]
Next, the pachislo 1 of the third embodiment will be described. In the pachi-slot 1 of the third embodiment, a method of determining an effect ball during a battle ART will be described. Here, in the pachislot 1 of the first embodiment, the effect ball (friend ball or enemy ball) is determined according to the type of the enemy character of the opponent during the battle ART (see FIGS. 113 to 115). In this regard, in the pachislo 1 of the third embodiment, the effect ball is determined in consideration of the remaining HP of the ally character.

  FIG. 156 is a battle MAP lottery table that is referred to when the opponent enemy character is the boss 1 and the remaining HP of the ally character is 20 or less. FIG. This is a battle MAP lottery table referred to when the remaining HP of the ally character is 10 or less.

  In the pachislot 1 of the third embodiment, when the opponent enemy character is the boss 1 and the remaining HP of the ally character is 21 or more, the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. When the remaining HP is 20 or less, the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 156 is referred to. Similarly, when the enemy character of the opponent is the boss 5 and the remaining HP of the ally character is 11 or more, the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 115 is referred to, and the remaining HP of the ally character is 10 or less. In some cases, the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 157 is referred to. The description of the battle MAP lottery table when the other boss is the opponent's enemy character is omitted.

  Comparing FIG. 113 with FIG. 156, it can be seen that even when the opponent enemy character is the boss 1, the probability that the battle MAP of the transition destination is randomly determined according to the remaining HP of the ally character is different. . More specifically, compared to the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 113 when the remaining HP of the ally character is large, the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 156 when the remaining HP of the ally character is small. Has a high probability that "6", "7", "13", "14", "20", "21", "27", and "28" are determined as the battle MAP of the transfer destination.

  As described above, the battle MAPs “6”, “7”, “13”, “14”, “20”, “21”, “27”, and “28” are battle MAPs in which an ally ball or an awakening ball is always drawn randomly as an effect ball. Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1 of the third embodiment, as the remaining HP of the ally character decreases, the attack frequency of the ally character increases. When FIG. 115 is compared with FIG. 157, similarly, when the opponent enemy character is the boss 5, the attack frequency of the ally character increases as the remaining HP of the ally character decreases.

  On the other hand, comparing FIG. 156 with FIG. 157, the rate of increase in the attack frequency of the ally character and the remaining HP of the ally character that triggers an increase in the attack frequency of the ally character differ depending on the type of the enemy character of the opponent.

  For example, referring to the source battle MAP “1” in which the opponent's enemy character is the boss 1, the battle MAP in which the ally ball or the awakening ball is randomly drawn is about 60% or more depending on the remaining HP of the ally character. It has risen to about 80%. On the other hand, referring to the transfer source battle MAP “1” in which the opponent enemy character is the boss 5, the battle MAP in which the ally ball or the awakening ball is randomly drawn is approximately 22% or more depending on the remaining HP of the ally character. It has risen to about 48%. Therefore, it can be seen that the increase rate of the attack frequency of the ally character differs depending on the type of the enemy character of the opponent.

  When the opponent enemy character is the boss 1 as shown in FIG. 156, the battle MAP lottery table is changed when the remaining HP of the ally character is 20 or less, as shown in FIG. 157. When the opponent enemy character is the boss 5, the battle MAP lottery table is changed when the remaining HP of the ally character is 10 or less. Therefore, it can be seen that the remaining HP of the ally character that triggers an increase in the attack frequency of the ally character differs depending on the type of the enemy character of the opponent. That is, in the third embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a probability changing unit, and the HP of the ally character is less than the change threshold (for example, when the opponent enemy character is the boss 1, the HP is “20” or less, When the boss is HP “10” or less), the MAP lottery is changed, and the frequency at which friendly characters attack is changed.

  As described above, in the pachislo 1 of the third embodiment, as the remaining HP of the ally character decreases, the attack frequency of the ally character can be increased, so that an effect such as reversing from a pinch can be performed, and the game during the battle ART can be performed. It can be something you can hold in your hand. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability of whether or not the ART gaming state continues, and the interest of the game in the ART gaming state is improved.

  Also, by making the increase rate of the attack frequency of the ally character and the remaining HP of the ally character that triggers the increase of the attack frequency of the ally character different depending on the type of the enemy character, a game for determining whether or not the ART gaming state is continued. The character can be further diversified, and the interest of the game in the ART game state is improved.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 156 and FIG. 157, the number of times that the attack frequency of the ally character is increased only once, in other words, the remaining HP of the ally character that triggers the increase in the attack frequency of the ally character is determined for each enemy character. Although only one is set, it is not limited to this. Specifically, when the HP of the ally character is equal to or less than the first value, the attack frequency of the ally character is increased by one step, and when the HP of the ally character is equal to or less than the second value that is less than the first value, the attack frequency of the ally character is increased. The attack frequency of the ally character may be increased a plurality of times, for example, ascending another level.

  In this case, the number of times of increasing the attack frequency of the ally character may be made different depending on the type of the enemy character. By doing so, for example, an enemy character whose attack frequency of the ally character gradually increases as the HP of the ally character decreases, or an enemy whose attack frequency of the ally character sharply increases when the HP of the ally character becomes slightly low A character can be created, and as a result, the playability of whether or not the ART game state is continued can be further diversified, and the interest of the game in the ART game state is improved.

[Fourth embodiment]
Next, the pachislo 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachislo 1 of the fourth embodiment, an effect control method at the time of ending the bonus state will be described. In the pachislo 1 of the fourth embodiment, a bonus end effect is set at the start of a game in which the bonus state may end, and the bonus end is performed when the bonus state is actually ended as a result of the game. If the bonus effect is not terminated while the time effect is executed, the effect for ending the bonus is rewritten to the effect for continuation of the bonus, and the effect for continuation of the bonus is executed.

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of the BB ART random determination process executed by the pachislot 1 of the fourth embodiment, instead of the ART random determination process performed by the pachislot 1 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 145). . The BB ART random determination process shown in FIG. 158 is performed when a start command is received during the bonus state (see S431 in FIG. 139).

  145. When comparing the ART-in-BB lottery process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 145 with the ART-in-BB lottery process of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. The processing is the same as the processing of S501 to S504 of the ART lottery processing of the first embodiment, and thus detailed description is omitted.

  In FIG. 158, following the processing of S604, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is equal to or less than “9” (S605). When the value of the bonus end number counter is equal to or smaller than “9” (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently registers a bonus end effect and ends the BB ART lottery process. Conversely, if the value of the bonus end number counter is not equal to or less than “9” (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB ART lottery process. The bonus end effect is an effect performed at the end of the current game. For example, a screen notifying the number of medals paid out during the bonus state and the result of the ART lottery performed during the bonus state is displayed. This is an effect to be displayed.

  Here, in the pachislot 1, the maximum payout number per game in the bonus state is 10, so if the value of the bonus end number counter is “9” or less, the bonus state may end. is there. The processing of S604 and S605 is processing for registering a bonus end effect at the start of a game in which the bonus state may end. The bonus end number counter may be independently managed on the sub side, or information (see FIG. 124) managed on the main side may be acquired through various commands.

  Next, FIG. 159 is a flow of the processing at the time of receiving a winning operation command executed by the pachislot 1 of the fourth embodiment, instead of the processing at the time of receiving a winning operation command (see FIG. 149) executed by the pachislot 1 of the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows. The processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command shown in FIG. 159 is performed when the command received from the main side is the winning operation command (see S408 in FIG. 138).

  A comparison between the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 149 and the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 159 shows that the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command of the fourth embodiment is S611. The processing of S618 to S618 is the same as the processing of S541 to S548 of the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command of the first embodiment, and thus detailed description is omitted.

  In FIG. 159, following the processing of S618, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not BB is being performed (S619). If it is during BB (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently executes a BB effect control process described later in S160 (S620), and ends the winning operation command receiving process. On the other hand, if it is not during BB (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command.

  Subsequently, FIG. 160 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of the BB effect production control process executed by the pachi-slot 1 of the fourth embodiment. The during-BB effect control process shown in FIG. 160 is performed when a winning operation command is received during the bonus state (see S620 in FIG. 159).

  As shown in FIG. 160, first, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bonus end effect is registered (S631). If the bonus end effect has not been registered (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB effect control process.

  On the other hand, if the bonus end effect is registered, the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (S632). If the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently executes the registered effect (effect at the time of bonus end) (S634), and performs the BB effect control process. To end.

  On the other hand, when the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than “0” (NO), the sub CPU 102 rewrites the registered bonus end effect to the bonus continuous effect (S633), and subsequently rewrites the rewritten bonus. A continuous effect is executed (S634), and the BB effect control process ends.

  As described above, in the pachislo 1 of the fourth embodiment, at the start of the game in which the bonus state may end, the effect for the end of the bonus is set once, and based on the result of the game, Change the effect to be executed at the end of the game. Thus, it is possible to prevent the effect at the end of the bonus state from being executed even though the bonus state has not ended, and as a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the end of the bonus state. That is, in the fourth embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes an effect control means, sets an effect for a bonus end at the start of a game in which the bonus state may end, and sets a game result (bonus end). Based on the value of the number-of-sheets counter), it is controlled whether to execute the bonus end effect set at the start of the game or to execute the bonus continuous effect by rewriting the bonus continuous effect.

  Further, even if the number of medals paid out during the bonus state is diversified, it is possible to appropriately notify the end of the bonus state, which is preferable. That is, depending on the gaming machine, the number of medals paid out during the bonus state may be fixed. In such a gaming machine, the timing at which the bonus state ends is fixed, so that the effect at the time of the end is not erroneously executed, but the game during the bonus state becomes monotonous.

  In this regard, in the pachislo 1 of the fourth embodiment, the number of medals paid out during the bonus state differs according to the result of the game, so that the game during the bonus state is prevented from becoming monotonous, The end of the state can be properly notified.

[Modification]
As described above, the pachislo 1 according to the present embodiment has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  In the pachislot of the above embodiment, when the effect ball is set in the apocalypse, it is set on condition that the internal winning combination is "bell winning" or more, or the combination of displayed symbols is "bell winning" or more. Lottery or the like based on the effect ball being performed. In this regard, when an effect ball is set in the apocalypse, lottery or the like based on the effect ball may be performed irrespective of the internal winning combination or the combination of the displayed symbols. In such a pachislot, the game balance can be adjusted by adjusting the frequency of setting a blank (empty) in the apocalypse.

  In the pachislo of the above-described embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 manages the transition control to the advantageous state (for example, the “ART state”), the duration of the advantageous state, and the notification (navigation) performed during the advantageous state. Although the management is performed, one or all of these controls may be performed by the main control circuit 91.

  Note that the transition control to the advantageous state includes, for example, control (transition lottery) relating to transition to / not to transition to the advantageous state. In addition, for example, in the case of the pachislot 1 in which a plurality of states having different winning probabilities are provided in the lottery transition to the advantageous state, control relating to transition between the states can be included in the transition control to the advantageous state.

  Further, the management of the duration of the advantageous state is control relating to the increase or decrease of the HP of the enemy character and the ally character in the above-described embodiment, and in the case of other pachislots, for example, the initial game number of the advantageous state is reduced. Determination and additional control of the number of AT games. Further, for example, in the case of the pachislot 1 in which the advantageous state continues with a predetermined probability, a lottery as to whether or not to continue can be included in the management of the duration of the advantageous state.

  In addition, as the duration of the advantageous state, the number of unit games in the advantageous state, the number of times of notifying the player of advantageous information during the advantageous state, the number of medals awarded in the advantageous state, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine An arbitrary period such as the number of sets when the predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) is one set can be included.

  At this time, as the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state, a net increase in number obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out in the same game may be used. Further, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state may be calculated based on medals actually increased during the advantageous state (calculation based on actual values), and regardless of whether the number has actually increased. Alternatively, the calculation may be performed based on the number of medals that are to be increased when following the navigation (calculation using an ideal value). Further, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state may not be increased depending on the type of the internal winning combination. For example, with respect to some of the combinations that have a low probability of being determined as an internal winning combination, or a combination in which the display / non-display of a combination of symbols is switched according to the timing of the stop operation, the combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Alternatively, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state may not be increased or decreased.

  In addition, the management of the notification (navigation) performed during the advantageous state includes control for notifying the stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player by the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like.

  Further, the mode of the stop operation to be notified to the player may be a stop operation order (push order) in which a combination of symbols advantageous for the player is displayed, or the combination of the symbols is displayed. It may be the timing of the stop operation necessary for this (a design to be aimed at).

  In addition, as an advantageous state, a winning operation mode of an internal winning combination related to a re-game is not changed (or is changed within a range that does not affect the playability), and a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is set. It is also possible to use a so-called "AT" for notifying, and to activate a replay high probability state (replay time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the replay is increased, and to perform a stop operation advantageous to the player. A so-called “ART” for notifying the above mode may be used.

  Further, in the pachislo of the embodiment or the various modified examples, the effect determined with a predetermined probability according to the internal winning combination determined by the main control circuit 91, that is, one or a plurality of effects for one internal winning combination. I am going to do. In this regard, a display (notification) uniquely corresponding to the internal winning combination determined by the main control circuit 91 may be performed together with the effect. Specifically, the display corresponding to the determined internal winning combination on a one-to-one basis may be performed on the 7-segment display 28 or a display unit (not shown) for displaying the internal winning combination. The display of the internal winning combination is preferably performed under the control of the main control circuit 91. By notifying the internal winning combination determined by the main control circuit 91 in this way, the main control circuit 91 itself can provide a gaming machine in which fairness is ensured.

[Appendix 1]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 1 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). According to the gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation. The number of navigation games).

  In recent years, a predetermined condition triggers a high-probability replay state (RT) in which a probability that a replay (re-game) that can be played without inserting medals is determined as an internal winning combination is increased. Gaming machines that operate are also known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-204875 discloses a gaming machine that activates a high-probability re-game state when a bonus state ends.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to the gaming machine disclosed in the patent document, the high-probability re-game state operates after the bonus ends, so that the game can be performed without reducing the medal after the bonus ends, but the high-probability re-game state always occurs after the bonus ends. There is a possibility that the game during the bonus may become monotonous. Therefore, there is a need for a gaming machine that operates in the high-probability re-game state after the bonus ends, so that the game during the bonus does not become monotonous.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of a game in a special game state.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels). , Display window 4), start operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a start operation by the player, and rotating the reel based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Symbol variation means (for example, the main control circuit 91, a stepping motor) for varying the symbol, and a special game state (for example, a bonus state) that is a normal state and a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal state. And a switching means (for example, main control) for switching a game state in response to a predetermined condition. Path 91) and an internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination from among a plurality of combinations by referring to an internal lottery table corresponding to the current gaming state based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. (For example, a main control circuit 91), stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels, and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel; A change in the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the role determination means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means. Reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the symbol display, and when the symbol change is stopped by the reel stop control means, the symbol display means Winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the activated pay line. The internal lottery table provided corresponding to the special gaming state is determined by the internal winning combination determining means as an internal winning combination, and during the special gaming state, a prize is won by the winning determining means. Any of a plurality of carryover combinations (for example, F_JACIN1 to 3) that can be carried over as an internal winning combination until it is determined that the internal winning combination has been determined, and in the special game state, the plurality of carryover combinations can be determined. When the first carryover combination (for example, F_JACIN1) is carried over as an internal winning combination, the internal winning combination determination means determines a predetermined combination (for example, F_J1). When the upper 7 rep to the F_J1 cross 7 lip) is determined as the internal winning combination, a privilege (for example, a winning in ART transfer lottery) is given, and a second carryover combination (for example, F_JACIN2) different from the first carryover combination When the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination when the is carried over as the internal winning combination, a privilege providing means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that does not provide the privilege is further provided.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention can carry over any of a plurality of carryover combinations as an internal winning combination during the special gaming state. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the privilege is given when the first carryover is carried over, and the privilege is not given when the second carryover is carried over. . With this, even if the predetermined combination is internally won, it is possible to vary whether or not to grant the privilege according to the type of the carryover combination, and it is possible to diversify the game in the special game state. This can enhance the interest of the game during the special game state.

[Appendix 2]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 2 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, information that is advantageous to the player is notified by a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is made high. ) Is generally performed to achieve an advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  By the way, in the gaming machine having the ART function, even in the case where the transition to the advantageous state has not been determined, the operation of the high-probability re-game state may be performed by the stop operation of the player. In this regard, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-233721), if the transition to the advantageous state is not determined, information that is advantageous to the player during the high-probability re-game state is not notified, It is described that control to fall from the probability replay state to the normal state is performed.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Here, the control of falling from the high-probability replay state to the normal state when the transition to the advantageous state has not been determined is used as a so-called penalty, and the stop operation of the player accidentally causes the high-probability replay state. In general, when the operation is performed, the lottery itself for shifting to the advantageous state is not performed.

  However, even if the gaming state is the high-probability re-game state, if the transition to the advantageous state is not performed by lottery, the high-probability re-game state in which the privilege is not provided (for example, the RT during the non-winning ART state). It lacks the fun of (middle).

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest in games to which no privilege is given.

[Means for solving the problem]

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the normal state (for example, the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state) where the replay related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination and the probability that the replay is determined as the internal winning combination are determined. A gaming machine having a high RT state (for example, an RT4 gaming state) higher than the normal state, wherein a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and Symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the displayed symbols, start operation detection means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a start operation by the player, A symbol changing unit (for example, a main control circuit 91, a step control unit) that changes the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting unit. Motor) and a first symbol combination (for example, RT4 shift lip) or a second symbol in accordance with the order of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. A third symbol combination (for example, RT1 shift lip) that can be stopped and displayed, and a third symbol combination (for example, push order lip) according to the order of the stop operation when it is determined as an internal winning combination , A bell spilled eye) or a second symbol combination (for example, a bell in a pushing order) in which a fourth symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination displayed when the pushing order is correct) can be stopped and displayed. And an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability, and a stop for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel provided for the plurality of reels. Operation detection The rotation of the reel is stopped based on a stage (for example, the main control circuit 91), an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit, and a timing at which a stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting unit. The reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol fluctuation is stopped by the reel stop control means. A determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for determining a combination of symbols stopped on an activated line provided in the symbol displaying means; and the determining means responding to the first pressing in the normal state. When it is determined that the first symbol combination of the first symbol combination and the second symbol combination has stopped, the game is changed from the normal state to the high RT state. RT start means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for shifting a state, and the third symbol combination and the fourth symbol combination according to the second pushing sequence by the determination means during the high RT state. When it is determined that the third symbol combination has stopped, the game state is shifted from the high RT state to the normal state, and when it is determined that the fourth symbol combination has stopped, the high symbol state is determined. When an RT ending means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for maintaining the RT state and a predetermined lottery (for example, a shift to ART) performed in the normal state or the high RT state are won, an effect state relating to a game is established. A special effect state transition means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for transitioning to a specific effect state (for example, an ART gaming state) for notifying information of an advantageous stop operation, and a state in which the predetermined lottery is not won. When the RT start means shifts the gaming state to the high RT state, information on a stop operation required to stop the fourth symbol combination when the second pressing combination is determined as an internal winning combination ( For example, the number-of-reports determining means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for determining the number of notifications (for example, the number of guarantees) for notifying the pressing order bell of the order of correct answers; When the first state is determined to be the internal winning combination during the normal state, information of a stop operation required to stop the first symbol combination is notified, and The information of the advantageous stop operation is notified during the RT state, and when the second pressing combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the high RT state in which the predetermined lottery is not won, the notification count determining means is provided. Decided Informing means for informing information advantageous stop operation only serial notice frequency (e.g., sub-control circuit 101, a liquid crystal display device 11) and, characterized in that it comprises a.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state in which the replay relating to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low and a high RT state in which the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high. By notifying the information of the advantageous stop operation in the specific effect state inside, a gaming state (so-called ART) advantageous to the player can be realized. Here, the transition to the specific effect state is performed not only by a predetermined lottery performed during the normal state but also by a predetermined lottery performed during the high RT state. Even if the state shifts to the high RT state in the absence state, the shift to the specific effect state can be expected thereafter. As a result, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, a high RT state in which a predetermined lottery has not been won can be set as a transition chance section to a favorable gaming state (so-called ART), and a privilege is provided. It is possible to enhance interest during a high RT state where no (the predetermined lottery is not won).

  In addition, since the predetermined lottery is performed during the high RT state, the strategy for the stop operation during the normal state is increased, and the interest during the normal state can be enhanced. That is, in the gaming ability in which a penalty is imposed during the high RT state in which the privilege is not provided as in the conventional gaming machine, the stop operation during the normal state is simple (for example, the first stop operation is performed so as not to receive the penalty). Must be done for the left reel). In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the predetermined lottery is performed without imposing a penalty during the high RT state, the player can freely perform the stop operation during the normal state, and can perform the stop operation during the normal state. The operability as well as the playability can be improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the third symbol combination corresponding to the second pushing role is stopped during the high RT state, the high RT state is ended and the gaming state is shifted to the normal state. If a transition is made to the high RT state in a state in which the lottery has not been won, information on advantageous stop operations (for example, necessary to stop the fourth symbol combination when the second pressing combination is determined as the internal winning combination) Is notified a predetermined number of times. Thus, when the player accidentally shifts to the high RT state by the stop operation, the player does not immediately shift from the high RT state to the normal state, and receives a predetermined lottery in a state where the replay winning probability is high. be able to.

[Appendix 3]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 3 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, information that is advantageous to the player is notified by a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is made high. ) Is generally performed to achieve an advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  By the way, in a gaming machine having an ART function, a chance zone having a high degree of expectation of transition to the ART state is provided, and control is performed to transition to the ART state with a high probability when a specific condition is satisfied in this chance zone. . For example, in Patent Literature (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-048945), a specific symbol combination (RT operation symbol 1) is aimed at in the chance zone (CZ), and when a specific symbol combination is displayed, replay is internally performed. A gaming machine that performs control to shift to a high RT with a high probability as a winning combination is disclosed.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In such a gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document, the player's interest in the chance zone concentrates on whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed. By the way, whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed depends on the result of the internal lottery. Therefore, depending on the player, there is a chance that the specific symbol combination may be displayed in the chance zone. May not be obtained at all, or the chances of such a possibility may be significantly reduced. In such a case, for the player, no chance is obtained even though the player has shifted to the chance zone, and the interest of the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period that is a trigger for shifting to an advantageous state advantageous to a player. The purpose is to:

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a starting operation by the player; and rotating the reel based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. (For example, the main control circuit 91, a stepping motor) for changing the symbol and a start operation detected by the start operation detecting means, and is determined as an internal winning combination. The first symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols displayed when the pressing order is correct) or the second symbol combination (for example, bell spilled eyes) can be stopped and displayed in accordance with the order of the stop operation when the button is pressed. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of roles including a role (for example, a pressing order bell), provided in correspondence with the plurality of reels A stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel (for example, the main control circuit 91); an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means; and a stop operation by the stop operation detecting means. Reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 9) which stops the rotation of the reel based on the detected timing and thereby stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. ), When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control unit, the internal winning combination determination unit determines the combination based on the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display unit. Winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination has won, and an advantageous state lottery for performing a shift lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous state in response to a predetermined condition. A lottery state starting means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for starting a state (for example, CZ); and the internal winning combination determining means determining the pressing sequence as an internal winning combination in the advantageous state lottery state. A first transition lottery (for example, a transition lottery to ART performed in the middle of CZ) that determines to transition to the advantageous state with a predetermined probability is performed. Advantageous state lottery means (for example, transfer lottery to ART performed at the time of CZ completion) for determining second shift lottery (for example, transfer to ART performed at the time of CZ completion) that determines to shift to the above-mentioned advantageous state with a specific probability after the passage game (for example, 30 games) has elapsed When the first symbol combination is displayed on the activated line in the unit game in which the sub-control circuit 101) has performed the first transition lottery, the first transition is performed regardless of the transition lottery result to the advantageous state. When the lottery is invalidated and the second symbol combination is displayed on the activated line in the unit game, a lottery result management unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for maintaining the lottery result of the first shift lottery In the advantageous state lottery state, the first shift lottery is performed, and the lottery result of the first shift lottery is maintained by the lottery result management means, or When the position game elapses, it is determined that the lottery state ending means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for ending the advantageous state lottery state and to shift to the advantageous state by the first shift lottery or the second shift lottery. Then, there is provided an advantageous state shifting means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for shifting the state in which the game is played to the advantageous state, and the advantageous state shifting means shifts to the advantageous state by the second shift lottery. When it is determined that the game state is changed to the advantageous state by the first shift lottery, the game state is shifted to a more advantageous state (for example, an ART game state in the more advantageous ART state). And

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone) in which a transition to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is performed, the first pressing is determined as an internal winning combination when the first pressing combination is determined as an internal winning combination. A transfer lottery is performed. The advantageous state lottery state ends when the first transition lottery is performed and the lottery result of the first transition lottery is maintained or when a predetermined number of unit games elapse. As described above, in the gaming machine that performs the transition lottery to the advantageous state based on the internal winning combination, some players may not be able to receive the first transition lottery at all during the advantageous state lottery state. In the gaming machine, the second shift lottery is performed when a predetermined number of unit games elapse in the advantageous state lottery state. Thereby, even if the pressing sequence is not determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous state lottery state, the transition lottery to the advantageous state can be always received, and the interest in the advantageous state lottery state can be improved. .

  Further, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the first lottery is performed when the pressing sequence is determined as the internal winning combination, but the first shift lottery is performed when the first symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation. Is invalidated, and conversely, when the second symbol combination is displayed, the result of the first shift lottery is maintained. According to such control, the player is interested in the symbol combination displayed in the game in which the pushing sequence is determined as the internal winning combination, and therefore, the interest in each game in the advantageous state lottery state is increased. Can be improved. In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the advantageous state in which the transition is made via the second transition lottery is more advantageous than the advantage state in which the transition is made via the first transition lottery. It is desired that a predetermined number of unit games elapse without the combination being displayed (the first shift lottery is maintained and the advantageous state lottery state is ended), and the interest in the advantageous state lottery state is maintained to the end. it can.

[Appendix 4]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 4 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, information that is advantageous to the player is notified by a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is made high. ) Is generally performed to achieve an advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  In addition, many attempts have been made to diversify the transition to the advantageous state (ART). For example, in Patent Document (JP-A-2003-126369), a special role (7 out of BB) is provided during a bonus. There is disclosed a gaming machine which shifts to an advantageous state after the bonus ends when an internal win is made to the "match".

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by Akira]
However, in the gaming machine disclosed in the patent document, the transition to the advantageous state is performed based on the result of one internal lottery during the predetermined period (during the bonus). There was a problem that it was difficult to hold. In addition, since it is general that the winning probability of the specific combination which is a trigger to shift to the advantageous state is suppressed to a low value, it is not possible to have an expectation of winning during a predetermined period, and the opportunity to shift to the advantageous state is generated. There is also a possibility that the interest of the game for a certain predetermined period may be spoiled.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period that is a trigger for shifting to an advantageous state advantageous to a player. The purpose is to:

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a starting operation by the player; and rotating the reel based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. (For example, the main control circuit 91, a stepping motor) and a start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination with probability, and stop operation detecting means provided for each of the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel (E.g., the main control circuit 91), stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting unit. Reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display when the symbol fluctuation is stopped by the reel stop control means. It is determined whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the means. The winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and a predetermined condition (for example, the operation of BB) trigger the shift lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous state. State), and the game state control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that terminates the advantageous state lottery state when a specific condition (for example, 59 medals are paid out) in the advantageous state lottery state is triggered. ), When the gaming state control means ends the advantageous state lottery state, an advantageous state lottery means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for randomly determining whether to shift to the advantageous state, and An advantageous state starting means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for shifting the state in which the game is played to the advantageous state when the lottery is won. A first lottery state (for example, BB mode 0) having the lowest probability of winning the shift lottery by the advantageous state lottery means, and a second lottery state (for example, BB mode 1) having a higher probability than the first lottery state. ), And a plurality of lottery states (for example, BB mode) including a third lottery state (for example, BB mode 2) in which the probability is higher than the first lottery state and the second lottery state. The state lottery state further includes a lottery state transition unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that transits the plurality of lottery states based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination unit. In the first lottery state, if any of a first number of roles including the first role and the second role among the plurality of roles is determined as an internal winning combination, the second lottery state is changed from the first lottery state. Lottery In the second lottery state, any one of a plurality of the second combination including the first combination and not including the second combination is smaller than the first combination in the second combination state. A game machine that transits the lottery state from the second lottery state to the third lottery state.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a shift lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous state is performed at the end of the advantageous state lottery state. At this time, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of lottery states including a first lottery state, a second lottery state, and a third lottery state in which the probability of winning the shift lottery is different, and the inside of the advantageous state lottery state A plurality of lottery states are transited based on the winning combination. This makes it possible to change the probability of winning the shift lottery based on the internal winning combination, so that the player has a strong interest in the internal winning combination in each game in the advantageous state lottery state, and Interest during the state lottery state can be enhanced.

  In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the internal lottery of any of the first number of roles including the first role and the second role is performed in the second lottery state in which the probability of winning the transition lottery from the first lottery state is higher. A transition is made when the combination is determined, and the third lottery state where the probability of winning the transition lottery from the second lottery state is higher is a second number smaller than the first number including the first combination and not including the second combination The transition is made when any of the combinations is determined as the internal winning combination. As a result, as the lottery state transitions, the type of the role that triggers the transition to the higher-ranking lottery state decreases, but the probability of winning the transition lottery increases with the transition of the lottery state. A game form in which the state is gradually upgraded can be created. To the player, instead of being interested in one internal lottery result in the advantageous state lottery state, he is interested in a series of internal lottery results in the advantageous state lottery state. Interest during the lottery state can be increased.

[Appendix 5]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 5 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, information that is advantageous to the player is notified by a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is made high. ) Is generally performed to achieve an advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  By the way, games in the advantageous state tend to be monotonous, and in recent years, attempts to diversify the gaming properties in the advantageous state have been widely made. For example, in a patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-152165), a free game is played when a predetermined condition is established, and the number of fighter symbols stopped and displayed as a result of the free game is displayed on a liquid crystal display. A gaming machine has been disclosed in which the number of fighters on the player side of the shooting game displayed in the above is set as the remaining number of fighters, thereby giving a variety of effects and payout forms.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine disclosed in the patent document, a free game or an effect (shooting game) is configured to automatically advance under the control of the gaming machine. However, the player could not actively participate in the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving amusement of a game in an advantageous state by making a player actively participate in the game. The purpose is to:

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, a battle ART in an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A gaming machine, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Window 4), start operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a start operation by the player, and rotating the reel based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. A plurality of symbol changing means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) for changing the symbol, and a plurality of And an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. Stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91), and the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. A reel stop control unit (for example, a main control circuit 91) for stopping the rotation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit by stopping the rotation, and when the symbol change is stopped by the reel stop control unit. The internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display means is awarded. Winning determination means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not a favorable condition starts, and advantageous state starting means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state in response to a predetermined condition. When a predetermined combination (for example, a pressing order bell) is determined as an internal winning combination, a notifying means for notifying information of a stop operation advantageous to the player (for example, information for displaying a combination of symbols having a large number of payouts). Prior to the start of the advantageous state, the first numerical information (for example, the HP of the ally character) and the second numerical information (for example, the HP of the enemy character) and Numerical value determining means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for determining, and effect information (for example, performance) in a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead during the advantageous state Effect information registering means (for example, set in an apocalypse displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11) (for example, an auxiliary control circuit 101); and first effect information (for example, an enemy ball) as the effect information When the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game in which is registered, a first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical value information, and second production information (for example, an ally ball) is used as the production information. If the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game in which is registered, numerical update means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for subtracting a second predetermined value from the second numerical information, and the numerical update means As a result of the subtraction, when the first numerical information becomes less than a threshold, the advantageous state is terminated, and when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold, the advantageous state is newly started. A control circuit 101), characterized in that it comprises a.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, during the advantageous state, the first numerical information and the second numerical information are subtracted based on the effect information and the internal winning combination, and the second numerical information is reduced before the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold. If the numerical information can be reduced below the threshold, the advantageous state is continued. Here, since the internal winning combination is determined according to the start operation of the player, the player actively participates in the game in the advantageous state, and the motivation for the game can be improved. .

  Further, even when the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the target (first numerical information or second numerical information) to be subtracted differs depending on the effect information registered in the game. For the player, since the first numerical information is subtracted in a state where the first effect information is registered, the player does not want to win the predetermined combination, and conversely, when the second effect information is registered. Means that a predetermined combination is to be won. Here, the effect information is registered for a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead, the player can play the game after grasping the effect information registered in advance, This means that the player wants to win the predetermined combination at a timing advantageous to the player (the second effect information is registered). This makes it possible to strongly associate the registered production information with the player's start operation, and to make the player play a game with a sense of tension, thereby improving interest in the advantageous state. it can.

  Since the predetermined combination from which the first numerical information or the second numerical information is subtracted is a notification target combination, the determination of the predetermined combination as the internal winning combination does not affect the profit given during the advantageous state. Will give. For example, depending on the gaming machine, the combination from which the first numerical information is subtracted is a first combination (such as a replay) that does not affect the profit, and the combination from which the second numerical information is subtracted is the first combination that affects the profit. It is also conceivable to assume two roles (bell etc.) In such a gaming machine, the presence or absence of the winning of the second role that affects the profit is directly connected to the continuation of the advantageous state, and the game becomes monotonous. In this regard, as in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the winning of the predetermined combination which affects the profit is made advantageous / disadvantage according to the registered effect information, so that the gaming property in the advantageous state is improved. It can be diversified, and can enhance interest in the advantageous state.

[Appendix 6]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 6 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, information that is advantageous to the player is notified by a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is made high. ) Is generally performed to achieve an advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  By the way, in a gaming machine having a plurality of gaming states, it is common to shift the gaming state based on winning or winning of a so-called rare combination such as watermelon or cherry. For example, in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-048945), RT operation symbols 1 and 2 displayed when cherries 1, 2, and 3 are determined as an internal winning combination are displayed during a predetermined period. It is disclosed that the game state is shifted to a game state that is advantageous to the player. Here, since the internal winning combination is determined according to the start operation of the player, the operation of the player is reflected in the result of the game by shifting the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery as in the patent document. It is possible to realize a game in which the player actively participates in the game.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, since so-called rare combinations such as watermelon and cherry have a low winning probability, when the gaming state is shifted according to the presence or absence of the rare combination as in the gaming machine of Patent Document, depending on the player, even once during the period. There is a possibility that a chance may not be obtained, and the interest in the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, there is also a conceivable gaming property in which a game state is shifted regardless of a player's operation, but such a gaming machine departs from a pachislot machine's original gaming ability in which a game proceeds in accordance with a player's operation. In this case, a decision that affects the profit to be given is made, so that the game machine lacks suitability as a pachislot machine, and may impair the fairness of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of shifting a gaming state rich in gaming properties while relating the gaming state to a game result.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous for the player than the normal state, as the state in which the game is played. A gaming machine having a chance zone (for example, CZ) having a high probability of shifting to the advantageous state, wherein a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed; Symbol display means (for example, the display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the screen, start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91 and the start switch 64) for detecting a start operation by the player. A symbol changing unit that changes the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting unit (for example, the main control circuit 91, Motor) and a first symbol combination (for example, a symbol displayed when the pressing order is correct) in accordance with the order of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Combination) or a second symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols displayed when the pressing order is incorrect) is determined with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of combinations including a pressing sequence (for example, a pressing sequence bell) that can be stopped and displayed. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination, and stop operation detecting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. The main control circuit 91) stops the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. Reel change control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, A prize determining unit (for example, a main control unit) that determines whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit has won based on a combination of symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol displaying unit. When a predetermined condition (for example, winning the apocalypse lottery) is satisfied in the normal state, a CZ lottery state (for example, a normal game state during the operation of the apocalypse) in which the lottery to shift to the chance zone is started. Lottery state start means (for example, sub-control circuit 101), and effect information on a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead during the CZ lottery state (For example, an effect ball such as a lottery ball 1 to 4 and an effect ball such as a fixed ball), and an effect information registering means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101). When the first symbol combination is displayed, CZ random determination means (for example, the sub control circuit 101, the reel in FIG. 72) for performing a random determination to shift to the chance zone with a probability corresponding to the effect information registered for the game. A game state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for shifting a game state to the chance zone based on the result of the shift lottery of the CZ lottery means; A lottery state ending means (for example, a sub-control time) for terminating the CZ lottery state when the pressing sequence combination is determined a predetermined number of times as an internal winning combination (for example, when the guaranteed number of times becomes 0). 101), characterized in that it comprises a.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the gaming state is shifted from the CZ lottery state to the chance zone based on the effect information registered in advance for a predetermined number of games including the current game. Here, the production information is registered irrespective of the operation of the player, so simply shifting the gaming state based on the production information lacks suitability as a gaming machine and impairs the fairness of the game. There is a possibility that it will. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game state is shifted in consideration of not only the effect information registered for each game but also the combination of symbols displayed in the game. Thereby, the operation of the player can be interposed in the transition of the game state, and the fairness of the game can be secured.

  Here, the first symbol combination that triggers the transition of the gaming state is a symbol combination that is displayed when the pressing combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is possible to provide the player with more opportunities to have a sense of expectation regarding the transition to the gaming state as compared with the case where the opportunity is triggered. That is, in the first symbol combination requiring not only the winning as the internal winning combination but also the order of the stop operation, the winning probability can be set to be higher than that of the rare winning combination. The winning combination can be given as many as the internal winning combination, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the lottery of the transition of the gaming state is performed with a probability corresponding to the effect information registered for the game in which the first symbol combination is displayed, the operation is performed by the player. The transition of the game state can be performed in various modes while being associated with the result of the accompanying game. As a result, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to perform the transition of the gaming state in a manner that is rich in gaming properties, while being associated with the result of the game.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the CZ lottery state ends when the pressing sequence is determined as the internal winning combination a predetermined number of times during the CZ lottery state. In this way, by using the pushing sequence that is the trigger for transition of the gaming state to the end condition of the CZ lottery state, the player is given a predetermined number of opportunities to receive the transition lottery during the CZ lottery state. As a result, the player can avoid a situation in which there is no opportunity to receive the transfer lottery, and can prevent the interest of the game from being reduced.

[Appendix 7]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 7 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, information that is advantageous to the player is notified by a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is made high. ) Is generally performed to achieve an advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  By the way, in a gaming machine having an ART function, a chance zone having a high degree of expectation of transition to the ART state is provided, and control is performed to transition to the ART state with a high probability when a specific condition is satisfied in this chance zone. . For example, in Patent Literature (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-048945), a specific symbol combination (RT operation symbol 1) is aimed at in the chance zone (CZ), and when a specific symbol combination is displayed, replay is internally performed. A gaming machine that performs control to shift to a high RT with a high probability as a winning combination is disclosed.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In such a gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document, the player's interest in the chance zone concentrates on whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed. By the way, whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed depends on the result of the internal lottery. Therefore, depending on the player, there is a chance that the specific symbol combination may be displayed in the chance zone. May not be obtained at all, or the chances of such a possibility may be significantly reduced. In such a case, for the player, no chance is obtained even though the player has shifted to the chance zone, and the interest of the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period that is a trigger for shifting to an advantageous state advantageous to a player. The purpose is to:

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a starting operation by the player; and rotating the reel based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. (For example, the main control circuit 91, a stepping motor) for changing the symbol, and a predetermined combination among a plurality of roles based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination at a rate, and a stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel Stopping the rotation of the reel based on (for example, the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. The reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display when the reel change control is stopped by the reel stop control means. It is determined whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the means. Start of a lottery state (for example, CZ) which starts a winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and starts a lottery transition to determine whether or not to make a transition to the above-mentioned advantageous state upon a predetermined condition. Means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and a winning mode (for example, a CZ mode) for defining a probability of deciding to make a transition to the advantageous state in the transition lottery. When a predetermined combination (for example, a pressing order bell) is determined as an internal winning combination by the mode transition unit (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for performing transition based on the number of times and the internal winning combination determination unit in the advantageous state lottery state. An advantageous state lottery means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for performing the shift lottery based on the current winning mode, and the advantageous state lottery means When the shift lottery is performed, a lottery state ending means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that ends the advantageous state lottery state, and when it is determined to shift to the advantageous state by the shift lottery, a game is performed. An advantageous state transition means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for transitioning the state to the advantageous state, wherein the mode transition means determines the probability based on the number of unit games passed in the advantageous state lottery state. The unit mode is shifted from the lowest first mode (for example, CZ mode 0) to the second mode (for example, CZ mode 1) in which the probability is higher than the first mode, and the unit game has passed in the advantageous state lottery state. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number (for example, 30 times), the mode is shifted to a third mode (for example, CZ mode 2) with the highest probability, and When the profit state lottery state is started, the mode shifting means further includes a shift timing determining means (for example, CZ_MAP, sub-control circuit 101) for determining the number of unit games to shift from the first mode to the second mode. It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone) in which the transition to the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is performed, the transitional lottery is triggered when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination. When the transfer lottery is performed, the advantageous state lottery state ends. Here, in a gaming machine that performs transition lottery to an advantageous state based on an internal winning combination, some players may not be able to receive transition lottery at all during the advantageous state lottery state. Then, as the advantageous state lottery state continues, the winning mode that defines the probability of winning the shift lottery increases, and the shift lottery becomes easier to win. In such a gaming machine, contrary to the conventional gaming machine, it is advantageous for the player that the predetermined combination is not determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous state lottery state. It is possible to improve the amusement during the advantageous state lottery state.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, when the advantageous state lottery state starts, the number of unit games for shifting the winning mode from the first mode to the second mode is determined. As a result, the timing at which the winning mode is changed to a mode that is advantageous to the player is different for each advantageous state lottery state, so that the game during the advantageous state lottery state can be diversified, and during the advantageous state lottery state. Interest can be improved.

[Appendix 8]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 8 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (re-game) is determined as an internal winning combination is made high is sometimes referred to as an ART machine or the like.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to navigate, so that the player can control the AT or the ART. You want to have a longer period of time.

  Therefore, in recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the period of AT and ART from various viewpoints. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732) specifies a watermelon or cherry as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games when a winning combination is determined is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, the number of AT games increases in accordance with the internal winning combination, so that the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays a game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine disclosed in the patent document, the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination. He concentrated on only one game and could not maintain the player's expectation.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of maintaining a player's interest in maintaining an advantageous state (AT, ART, or the like) over a plurality of games. The purpose is to:

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a starting operation by the player; and rotating the reel based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. (For example, the main control circuit 91, a stepping motor) and a start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination with probability, and stop operation detecting means provided for each of the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel (E.g., the main control circuit 91), stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting unit. Reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display when the symbol fluctuation is stopped by the reel stop control means. It is determined whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the means. A winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91), a first advantageous state (for example, an enemy-determined ART), and a second advantageous state (for example, following the first advantageous state) triggered by a predetermined condition. Advantageous state start means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state including a battle ART) and first advantageous state control means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the first advantageous state ), And second advantageous state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the second advantageous state, wherein the first advantageous state control means is configured to switch the state during the first advantageous state. A first effect information registration unit (for example, a sub control circuit 101) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls) in a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead, and A second advantageous state starting means for ending the first advantageous state and starting the second advantageous state in a game in which any one of several types of first effect information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8) is registered. (For example, a sub-control circuit 101), the second advantageous state control means, during the second advantageous state, the effect information in a plurality of games from the current game to a predetermined number of games ahead (for example, A second effect information registering means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for registering an effect ball, and first numerical information (for example, an enemy ball) in a game in which second effect information (for example, an enemy ball) is registered as the effect information. The first numerical value corresponding to the type of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state (for example, the attack power of the enemy character) is subtracted from the HP of the ally character, and the effect information is set as the effect information. 3rd production Information (for example, an ally ball) in the game in which the first numerical information (for example, HP of the enemy character) is registered, the type of the first effect information (for example, enemy Numerical value subtracting means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for subtracting a second numerical value according to the character's defense power, and the advantageous state is set when the first numerical value information becomes smaller than a threshold value as a result of the subtraction by the numerical value subtracting means. It is characterized by comprising advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for newly starting the first advantageous state when the second numerical information is less than the threshold value when the second numerical information becomes smaller than the threshold value.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold, and continues when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold before the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical information and the second numerical information is performed based on the effect information registered for each game in the second advantageous state, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state continues for a plurality of games. Will be different depending on the game result. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the interest of the player for the continuation of the advantageous state can be maintained over a plurality of games.

  The effect information for subtracting the numerical information is registered in advance not only for the current game but also for a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead. From the viewpoint of the player, it is possible to grasp the flow of the subsequent game from the contents of the effect information registered in advance up to a plurality of games ahead, and to be interested in not only the current game but also the subsequent game It is possible to improve the interest during the advantageous state.

  At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the subtraction amount of the numerical information is made different depending on the type of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state. As a result, not only the second advantageous state but also the result of the game in the first advantageous state influences whether or not the advantageous state is continued. Can be sustained throughout the game. In addition, by separately setting the subtraction amount of the first numerical information (first numerical value) and the subtraction amount of the second numerical value (second numerical value), for example, the subtraction amounts of the first numerical information and the second numerical information can both be reduced. It is possible to set the state to be large / small, or to set the amount of subtraction of the first numerical information to be large / small, and to set the amount of subtraction of the second numerical information to be small / large. Can be As a result, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the interest in the advantageous state can be improved.

[Appendix 9]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 9 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (re-game) is determined as an internal winning combination is set to a high probability may be referred to as an ART machine or the like.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to navigate, so that the player can control the AT or the ART. You want to have a longer period of time.

  Therefore, in recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the period of AT and ART from various viewpoints. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732) specifies a watermelon or cherry as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games when a winning combination is determined is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, the number of AT games increases in accordance with the internal winning combination, so that the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays a game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine disclosed in the patent document, the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination. He concentrated on only one game and could not maintain the player's expectation.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of maintaining a player's interest in maintaining an advantageous state (AT, ART, or the like) over a plurality of games. The purpose is to:

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a starting operation by the player; and rotating the reel based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. (For example, the main control circuit 91, a stepping motor) and a start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination with probability, and stop operation detecting means provided for each of the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel (E.g., the main control circuit 91), stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting unit. Reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display when the symbol fluctuation is stopped by the reel stop control means. It is determined whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the means. A winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and a first advantageous state (for example, an enemy-determined ART) and a second advantageous state (for example, an enemy-determined ART) triggered by a predetermined condition. Advantageous state starting means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state including a battle ART, and first advantageous state control means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the first advantageous state. ), And second advantageous state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the second advantageous state, wherein the first advantageous state control means is configured to switch the state during the first advantageous state. First effect information registering means (for example, a sub control circuit 101) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls) in a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead, and Numerical value adding means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for adding a predetermined number to first numerical information (for example, HP of a friendly character) in a game in which one effect information (for example, friend ball) is registered, and the effect information In a game in which the second effect information (for example, a boss ball) is registered, the first advantageous state is ended, and the second advantageous state is started by a second advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub control circuit 101). The second advantageous state control means registers, during the second advantageous state, effect information (for example, effect balls) in a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead. Information registering means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101), and subtracting a first predetermined value from the first numerical information in a game in which third effect information (for example, an enemy ball) is registered as the effect information; Said Numerical value subtracting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for subtracting a second predetermined value from second numerical information (for example, HP of an enemy character) in a game in which fourth effect information (for example, friendly ball) is registered as output information ), And as a result of the subtraction by the numerical value subtracting means, when the first numerical information becomes less than a threshold value, the advantageous state is ended, and when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value, the first advantageous state is newly started. Advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101).

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold, and continues when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold before the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical information and the second numerical information is performed based on the effect information registered for each game in the second advantageous state, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state continues for a plurality of games. Will be different depending on the game result. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the interest of the player for the continuation of the advantageous state can be maintained over a plurality of games.

  The effect information for subtracting the numerical information is registered in advance not only for the current game but also for a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead. From the viewpoint of the player, it is possible to grasp the flow of the subsequent game from the contents of the effect information registered in advance up to a plurality of games ahead, and to be interested in not only the current game but also the subsequent game It is possible to improve the interest during the advantageous state.

  At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first numerical value information which is an end trigger of the advantageous state is added based on the first effect information registered during the first advantageous state. By adding a large amount of the first numerical information during the first advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the first numerical information from decreasing to less than the threshold value in the subsequent second advantageous state. As a result, not only the second advantageous state but also the result of the game in the first advantageous state influences the continuation of the advantageous state, so that the player's interest in the continuation of the advantageous state over a plurality of games Can last.

[Appendix 10]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 10 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (re-game) is determined as an internal winning combination is made high is sometimes referred to as an ART machine or the like.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to navigate, so that the player can control the AT or the ART. You want to have a longer period of time.

  Therefore, in recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the period of AT and ART from various viewpoints. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732) specifies a watermelon or cherry as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games when a winning combination is determined is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, the number of AT games increases in accordance with the internal winning combination, so that the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays a game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine disclosed in the patent document, the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination. He concentrated on only one game and could not maintain the player's expectation.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of maintaining a player's interest in maintaining an advantageous state (AT, ART, or the like) over a plurality of games. The purpose is to:

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, a battle ART in an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A gaming machine, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Window 4), start operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a start operation by the player, and rotating the reel based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. A plurality of symbol changing means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) for changing the symbol, and a plurality of And an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. Stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91), and the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. A reel stop control unit (for example, a main control circuit 91) for stopping the rotation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit by stopping the rotation, and when the symbol change is stopped by the reel stop control unit. The internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display means is awarded. Winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the advantageous state is started when a predetermined condition triggers the advantageous state (for example, the sub-control circuit 101); Prior to the start, determining means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for determining first numerical information (for example, HP of an ally character) and second numerical information (for example, HP of an enemy character), Effect information registration means (for example, a sub control circuit 101) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls) in a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead, and first effect information (for example, sub-control circuit 101). For example, in a game in which an enemy ball is registered, a first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical information, and a game in which second effect information (for example, an ally ball) is registered as the effect information. A numerical value updating means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for subtracting a second predetermined value from the second numerical value information in a technique; And an advantageous state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for newly starting the advantageous state when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value, wherein the effect information registration means In the case where the first effect information is consecutively registered as the effect information in the game of a specific number of times (for example, four times), the second effect information is used as the effect information following the first effect information which is continuous for the specific number of times. It is characterized by registering.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold, and continues when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold before the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical information and the second numerical information is performed based on the effect information registered for each game, whether or not the advantageous state is continued depends on the game results of a plurality of games. Will be different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the interest of the player for the continuation of the advantageous state can be maintained over a plurality of games.

  The effect information for subtracting the numerical information is registered in advance not only for the current game but also for a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead. From the viewpoint of the player, it is possible to grasp the flow of the subsequent game from the contents of the effect information registered in advance up to a plurality of games ahead, and to be interested in not only the current game but also the subsequent game It is possible to improve the interest during the advantageous state.

  At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the case where the first effect information, which is a trigger for ending the advantageous state, is registered continuously for a specific number of times, the second effect, which is a trigger for continuation of the advantageous state, as subsequent effect information. Register information. This can prevent a situation that is disadvantageous for the player from continuing for a long period of time, so that the player can play the game in the advantageous state with peace of mind.

[Appendix 11]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 11 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In the pachislot machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and a stepping motor is driven to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the drive of the stepping motor is controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In such a gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that notifies information advantageous to a player so as not to miss a combination determined as an internal winning combination. For example, in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057538), when a bonus combination carried over as an internal winning combination is carried over when the power is turned off until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed, the power supply after the power supply is turned off is described. There is disclosed a gaming machine for notifying that a bonus combination has been carried over at the time of restart by re-insertion.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine described in the patent document, the bonus starts immediately when the power is turned on, and thus there is a problem that fairness among players is impaired. Also, in the case of gaming machines, it is common practice to clear information about the game once when the setting is changed.For example, the game is ended with the bonus hand carried over the previous day, and a notification is made the next day. By confirming whether or not the setting value has been changed, the player can know whether or not the set value has changed from the previous day or not. Being able to ascertain whether or not the set value has been changed in this way not only impairs fairness among players, but may also detract from the interest of the player when the player determines that the setting is low. There is.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that guarantees fairness among players.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels). , Display window 4), start operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a start operation by the player, and rotating the reel based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. The internal winning combination is determined at a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations based on a symbol variation unit (for example, the main control circuit 91) that varies the symbol by causing the start operation detection unit to detect the start operation. Internal winning combination determination means (for example, main control circuit 91) and stop operation detection means (e.g., a main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel For example, the main control circuit 91) stops the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. A reel stop control unit (for example, a main control circuit 91) for stopping the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit; and a symbol display unit when the symbol change is stopped by the reel stop control unit. Winning determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line provided in And effect information registration for registering effect information (for example, effect balls such as lottery balls 1 to 4 and confirmed balls) in a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead. Means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101), when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed on the activated line in a game in which the effect information is registered, based on the effect information registered for the game. Privilege providing means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for providing a privilege, power-on detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, sub-control circuit 101, power supply board 44b) for detecting power-on, and power-on detection Acquisition means (for example, main control circuit 91, sub-control circuit 101, power supply board 44b) for acquiring the date and time at which the means has detected power-on, and the effect information registration means based on the date and time acquired by the acquisition means The registered effect information is discarded, and effect information for a plurality of games is newly registered.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the registered effect information is rewritten with new effect information based on the date and time when the power is turned on. From the date and time when the power is turned on, for example, it can be known that the time is before the business at the game store, and by comparing with the date and time when the power is turned off, the business is before the next day. Therefore, by rewriting the effect information based on the date and time when the power was turned on, the effect information registered when the power was turned off the previous day and the effect information registered when the power was turned on the next day would always be different. In addition, the player cannot know whether the set value has been changed from the registered effect information, and does not impair the fairness among the players.

  Here, the effect information is used for the transition lottery to the advantageous state by the transition lottery means, so that the fairness among the players can be further secured. That is, for example, even if the production information with a high (or low) expectation of transition to the advantageous state is registered when the power is turned off the previous day, it is rewritten with new production information when the power is turned on the next day. Can be prevented from being unfairly treated between a player who knows and a player who does not.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, based on the date and time when the power is turned on, to control the rewriting of the effect information, for example, when the power must be temporarily turned off during business hours, before and after the power is turned off The status of the gaming machine can be maintained. For the player, even if the power is temporarily cut off when advantageous effect information for himself is registered, the advantageous effect information will be maintained after the power is turned on again. You can play without feeling.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes a power-off detection unit (for example, a main control circuit 91, a sub-control circuit 101, a power supply board 44b) for detecting a power-off, and the acquisition unit includes the power-off detection Acquiring the date and time when the means has detected the power-off, and from the date and time when the power-off has been detected and the date and time when the power-on has been detected, obtains the time from power-off until power-on, When the time acquired by the acquisition means is less than a predetermined time (for example, 4 hours), the effect information registration means maintains the registered effect information, and the time acquired by the acquisition means is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. In this case, the registered effect information is discarded, and effect information for a plurality of games is newly registered.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, if the time from turning off the power to turning on the power again is a predetermined time or more, the registered effect information is rewritten with new effect information. As a result, the player who plays the next day cannot know whether the set value has been changed from the registered effect information, and does not impair fairness among the players. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, if the time from turning off the power to turning on the power again is less than a predetermined time, the registered effect information is maintained without being rewritten. Thereby, even if the power is temporarily cut off when advantageous effect information for the player is registered, the advantageous effect information will be maintained after the power is turned on again. You can play games without feeling dissatisfied.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the effect information registration unit discards the registered effect information and newly registers effect information for a plurality of games, the effect information determined by lottery is newly added. It is characterized in that it is registered as special effect information.

  As a method of making it difficult to determine whether or not the setting value has been changed, a method of setting the effect information to an initial state when the power is turned on the next day can be considered, but in such a method, the situation becomes the same in a plurality of gaming machines. As a result, the diversity of the game is reduced. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, new effect information is registered by lottery when the power is turned on the next day, so that the diversity of the game can be secured, which is preferable.

[Supplementary Note 12]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 12 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In the pachislot machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and a stepping motor is driven to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the drive of the stepping motor is controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine for notifying a player of information for establishing an internal winning combination and the like so as not to miss a combination determined as an internal winning combination. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, information that is advantageous to the player is notified by a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is made high. ) Is generally performed to realize a gaming state (ART) that is advantageous to the player.

  Here, among gaming machines having a plurality of gaming states, gaming machines that vary the combination of symbols displayed according to a player's stop operation are widely known, and a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination. For example, when the first symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation, AT or ART is executed, and when the second symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation, AT or ART is executed. Gaming machines that do not do so are also known.

  In a gaming machine that controls a gaming state according to a combination of symbols displayed in this way, the player can avoid grasping that a combination of symbols that is disadvantageous for the player is displayed by the sub-control board. There are known fraudulent activities such as spilling commands that give unfair advantage. For example, in the case of the gaming machine described above, when a combination of symbols disadvantageous to the player is displayed, by preventing the command including information on the displayed combination of symbols from being acquired on the sub-control board side, It can be avoided that the player is disadvantaged, and as a result, the player obtains an unfair advantage.

  Therefore, when a misconduct by a player is performed during a game and a communication error (sequence error) occurs at the time of communication between the main control board and the sub control board, a gaming machine for notifying that the error has occurred is provided. It is already known (see, for example, Patent Document (JP-A-2013-059616)). In such a gaming machine, a liquid crystal display device, a sound, and a decorative lamp (LED) are used to notify that a sequence error has occurred, and to notify the clerk of the game hall that the misconduct has been carried out. Can be terminated, a fraudulent action that induces a sequence error is executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from illegally gaining the profit of the game.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine, a game is performed by performing a stop operation three times following an operation of a start lever, so that the order of commands transmitted from the main control board to the sub-control board is determined. By confirming the order of the commands obtained by the sub-control board, it is possible to specify whether or not a sequence error has occurred.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-described gaming machine, when the sequence error is notified by the sound and the decoration lamp when the liquid crystal display device is not mounted, the effect of the other gaming machine in the gaming arcade is lost even if the notification of the sequence error is executed. As a result, the effect of notifying the clerk of the sequence error is not transmitted, and there has been a problem that the player can illegally obtain the profit of the game by cheating.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent illegal gain of a game from being illegally obtained.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. A start operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a start operation by the player; and rotating the reel on condition that the start operation is detected by the start operation detecting means. The symbol change means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for changing the symbol by performing the above operation, and a predetermined certainty among a plurality of roles based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. The internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination, and a stop operation detecting means provided for the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel ( For example, by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting unit. A reel stop control unit (for example, a main control circuit 91) for stopping the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit; and a symbol display unit when the symbol change is stopped by the reel stop control unit. It is determined whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line provided in Winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and a lottery state start means for starting an advantageous state lottery state (for example, CZ) for performing a shift lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous state in response to a predetermined condition (For example, the sub-control circuit 101) and an advantageous state lottery for performing a transitional lottery to determine, with a predetermined probability, to shift to the advantageous state after a predetermined number of unit games (for example, 30 games) have elapsed in the advantageous state lottery state. Means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101), and a lottery state ending means (for example, a sub-control circuit) for terminating the advantageous state lottery state when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed on the activated line in the advantageous state lottery state. Circuit 101) and game state control means (for example, a sub control circuit) for shifting a game state to the advantageous state based on the result of the shift lottery of the advantageous state lottery means. 101), and a game order determining means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for determining a progress order of one game, wherein the lottery state ending means is such that the game progresses in a predetermined order. When it is determined that there is no such condition (for example, when a sequence error occurs), the advantageous state lottery state is terminated.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone) which starts upon the occurrence of a predetermined condition, the predetermined number of unit games that end the advantageous state lottery state are executed. Since the two right grant lottery is performed, it is possible to realize a so-called perfect run type chance zone in which a lottery to an advantageous state is performed when the run is completed. This advantageous state lottery state ends when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed, so that the player performs a stop operation in hope of not displaying the predetermined symbol combination in order to avoid the end.

  Also, if a predetermined symbol combination is displayed during the advantageous state lottery state, the advantageous state lottery state ends, but if the displayed symbol combination is zeroed out (cannot be grasped) due to fraud or the like, The advantageous state lottery state is temporarily maintained. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is determined whether or not the progress of one game has progressed in a predetermined order, and if the progress has not progressed in the predetermined order, the advantageous state lottery state is terminated. Even if the progress result (e.g., the displayed symbol combination) has been reduced to zero, the advantageous state lottery state is not unduly maintained, and the player obtains an unfair profit by cheating. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the internal winning combination determining means determines a winning combination capable of displaying the predetermined symbol combination as an internal winning combination, the advantageous state lottery means shifts to the advantageous state. A shift lottery determined with a specific probability is further performed.

  In a game in which a combination capable of displaying a predetermined symbol combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the display of the predetermined symbol combination may end the advantageous state lottery state, but shift to the advantageous state. A lottery can be further received. This shift lottery is performed when the relevant combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and thus the more the advantageous state lottery state continues, the more the lottery is performed. Therefore, if the game progress result is reduced to zero and the displayed symbol combination cannot be grasped, it is possible to receive an unreasonably large number of lotteries for shifting to the advantageous state triggered by the combination. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the progress of the game is not appropriate, the advantageous state lottery state is ended regardless of the symbol combination, so that the player may obtain an unfair advantage due to cheating. Can be prevented.

[Appendix 13]
The pachislo 1 in Appendix 13 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. Then, when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is drive-controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (re-game) is determined as an internal winning combination is set to a high probability may be referred to as an ART machine or the like.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to navigate, so that the player can control the AT or the ART. You want to have a longer period of time. Therefore, in recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the period of AT and ART from various viewpoints. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147803) discloses an AT method in accordance with an internal winning combination including a bonus. And a gaming machine for determining the ART period (the number of assist games).

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, if the number of assist games is simply determined based on the internal winning combination as in the patent document, the game may be monotonous and the player may get bored. For this reason, there is a demand for a new method for determining the period of the AT or the like, which has not existed before.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of controlling the period of an AT or the like by a method rich in gaming.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a starting operation by the player; and rotating the reel based on detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. And an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection unit and a symbol changing unit (for example, the main control circuit 91) for changing the symbol. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91), and stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. 91) and stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting unit. Reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the change of the displayed symbol, and an effective means provided on the symbol display means when the symbol change is stopped by the reel stop control means. A prize determining means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the line; For example, the main control circuit 91) includes a first advantageous state (for example, an enemy-determining ART) and a second advantageous state (for example, a battle ART) that is performed following the first advantageous state, triggered by a predetermined condition. An advantageous state start means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state, a first advantageous state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of a game in the first advantageous state, A second advantageous state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the two advantageous states, wherein the first advantageous state control means is provided with first effect information (for example, an ally ball) A predetermined number (for example, six) of a plurality of types of effect information (for example, effect balls) including a plurality of types of second effect information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8) having different degrees of expected state continuity. Determine the production information and Effect information registering means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) stored in the effect information storing means (for example, sub RAM 103), and identification of less than a predetermined number of effect information of a predetermined number of effect information stored in the effect information storing means A display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11) that displays a number (for example, five) of pieces of effect information as effect information in a specific number of games including the current game, and a first effect information as effect information in the current game. In the displayed game, a numerical value adding means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for adding a first predetermined value to first numerical information (for example, HP of a friendly character) and the internal winning combination determining means are a specific combination (for example, , A rare combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, and a specific combination rewriting unit (for example, a sub-control unit) for rewriting the second production information stored in the production information storage unit to the first production information. Circuit 101) and a second advantage in which the first advantageous state is ended and the second advantageous state is started in a game in which any of a plurality of types of second effect information is registered as effect information in the current game. State starting means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101), wherein the second advantageous state controlling means is configured to register the second advantageous state information registered at the end of the first advantageous state from the first numerical information according to a first condition. The second effect registered at the end of the first advantageous state from the second numerical information (for example, the HP of the enemy character) according to the second condition by subtracting the first specific value corresponding to the type of the effect information. A numerical value subtracting means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for subtracting a second specific value corresponding to the type of information; , The second numerical information is Continuation control means for continuing a beneficial state goes below serial threshold (e.g., sub-control circuit 101) and, characterized in that it comprises a.

  In such a gaming machine, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information of the first numerical information and the second numerical information first becomes smaller than the threshold in the second advantageous state, and the second numerical information is first set to the threshold. If the value of the first numerical information is greater, the advantageous state is more likely to continue, and the period of the advantageous state is extended. The value of the first numerical information is added in a game in which the first effect information is displayed during the first advantageous state. On the other hand, when the second effect information is displayed during the first advantageous state, the first advantageous state in which the addition of the first numerical information is performed ends, and the second advantageous state in which the first numerical information is subtracted is performed. State. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, instead of simply controlling the period of the advantageous state based on the internal winning combination, the period of the advantageous state is controlled based on the effect information displayed in the current game. The player pays attention not only to the internal winning combination but also to the currently displayed effect information, so that the control of the advantageous state period can be made rich in gaming.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the first advantageous state, the second effect information for ending the first advantageous state is rewritten to the first effect information. By rewriting the second effect information to the first effect information, the player can have an expectation that the first numerical value information will be added thereafter. Therefore, the player can not only display the effect information displayed, Attention will also be paid to the internal winning combination. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the control of the period of the advantageous state can be made more rich in gaming.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific role rewriting means may include, among the effect information in the game for the specific number of games displayed on the display means, the specific second recreation means in which the degree of expectation of continuation of the advantageous state is equal to or more than a predetermined value The effect information is maintained without being rewritten to the first effect information.

  As described above, the larger the first numerical information, the easier the advantageous state is to continue, while the plurality of types of second effect information have different expectations for the continuation of the advantageous state. When the two advantageous state starts, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the advantageous state will continue thereafter. If the first effect information is rewritten to the second effect information in which such an advantageous state is likely to continue, the advantageous state may be difficult to continue. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific second effect information in which the expected degree of continuation of the advantageous state is equal to or more than a predetermined value is maintained without being rewritten to the first effect information. Thereby, the determination of the period of the advantageous state can be made more rich in gaming.

  Also, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific role rewriting means, the specific second effect information stored in the effect information storage means without being displayed on the display means, the first effect information It is characterized by rewriting to:

  In such a gaming machine, the specific second effect information that is maintained without being rewritten to the first effect information is limited to the one that is being displayed on the display means, and the only one that is simply stored without being displayed is the second effect information. 1 Rewrite with production information. Since the production information that is not displayed cannot be grasped by the player, by rewriting such production information into the first production information, the profit obtained by the player can be obtained without giving the player dissatisfaction. Balance can be achieved.

[Appendix 14]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 14 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (re-game) is determined as an internal winning combination is set to a high probability may be referred to as an ART machine or the like.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to navigate, so that the player can control the AT or the ART. You want to have a longer period of time. Therefore, in recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the period of AT and ART from various viewpoints. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147803) discloses an AT in accordance with an internal winning combination including a bonus. And a gaming machine for determining the ART period (the number of assist games).

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, if the number of assist games is simply determined based on the internal winning combination as in the patent document, the game may be monotonous and the player may get bored. For this reason, there is a demand for a new method for determining the period of the AT or the like, which has not existed before.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of controlling the period of an AT or the like by a method rich in gaming.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a starting operation by the player; and rotating the reel based on detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. And an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection unit and a symbol changing unit (for example, the main control circuit 91) for changing the symbol. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91), and stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. 91) and stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting unit. Reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the change of the displayed symbol, and an effective means provided on the symbol display means when the symbol change is stopped by the reel stop control means. A prize determining means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the line; For example, the main control circuit 91) includes a first advantageous state (for example, an enemy-determining ART) and a second advantageous state (for example, a battle ART) performed following the first advantageous state, triggered by a predetermined condition. An advantageous state start means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state, a first advantageous state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of a game in the first advantageous state, (2) second advantageous state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the advantageous state, wherein the first advantageous state control means comprises a plurality of types of effects having different degrees of expectation of continuation of the advantageous state. From a plurality of pieces of information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8), a predetermined number (for example, six) of pieces of effect information (for example, effect balls) are determined, and effect information to be stored in effect information storage means (for example, sub RAM 103). Climb Recording means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and a specific number (for example, five) of pieces of effect information smaller than a predetermined number among the predetermined number of pieces of effect information stored in the effect information storage means. When the display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for displaying as effect information in the game for the specified number of games and the internal winning combination determining means determines a specific combination (for example, a combination relating to BB) as an internal winning combination, Profit state rewriting means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for rewriting one or more pieces of effect information stored in the storage means to new effect information, and a game in which predetermined effect information is displayed as effect information in the current game When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the pressing order bell is determined as an internal winning combination), the first advantageous state is terminated, and the second advantageous state starting means for starting the second advantageous state is started. (For example, a sub-control circuit 101), and the second advantageous state control means converts the first numerical information to the first numerical information in accordance with a first condition (for example, when a pressing order bell is won when an enemy ball is set). The first specific value corresponding to the type of the effect information registered at the end of the advantageous state is subtracted, and the second numerical information is set according to the second condition (for example, at the time of winning the pushing order at the time of setting the ally ball). Subtracting a second specific value corresponding to the type of the effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state from the second subtraction means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101); And a continuation control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for terminating the advantageous state when the numerical information becomes less than the threshold value and continuing the advantageous state when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value.

  In such a gaming machine, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information of the first numerical information and the second numerical information first becomes smaller than the threshold in the second advantageous state, and the second numerical information is first set to the threshold. If less than, continue. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical information and the second numerical information is performed according to the type of the effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state, the effect information displayed during the first advantageous state is: This will affect the duration of the favorable state. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, instead of simply controlling the period of the advantageous state based on the internal winning combination, the period of the advantageous state is controlled based on the effect information displayed in the current game. In addition, the player pays attention not only to the internal winning combination but also to the currently displayed effect information, so that the control of the advantageous state period can be made rich in gaming.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the first advantageous state, one or a plurality of pieces of effect information stored in the effect information storage unit are rewritten with new effect information. . As a result, when the effect information is rewritten to the effect information having a high expectation for the continuation of the advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player. Since the situation is disadvantageous for the player, the player pays attention not only to the displayed effect information but also to the internal winning combination. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the control of the period of the advantageous state can be further enhanced in gaming.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the profit state rewriting means may include, among the effect information of the specific number of games displayed on the display means, specific effect information in which the degree of expectation of the continuation of the advantageous state is equal to or more than a predetermined value. Is maintained without being rewritten with new effect information.

  According to such a gaming machine, even if the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the specific effect information having the continuation expectation degree equal to or higher than a predetermined value is maintained without being rewritten to another effect information. With this, when the specific effect information is included in the displayed specific number of effect information, the player is given an opportunity to benefit from the specific effect information. The player can play the game afterwards, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the profit state rewriting means rewrites the specific effect information stored in the effect information storage means to new effect information without being displayed on the display means. It is characterized by.

  In such a gaming machine, the special effect information that is maintained without being rewritten to another effect information is limited to the one that is being displayed on the display means. Rewrite with information. Since the production information that is not displayed cannot be grasped by the player, by rewriting such production information with another production information, the profit obtained by the player can be obtained without dissatisfaction with the player. Balance can be achieved.

[Appendix 15]
The pachislo 1 in Appendix 15 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (re-game) is determined as an internal winning combination is set to a high probability may be referred to as an ART machine or the like.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to navigate, so that the player can control the AT or the ART. You want to have a longer period of time. Therefore, in recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the period of AT and ART from various viewpoints. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147803) discloses an AT method in accordance with an internal winning combination including a bonus. And a gaming machine for determining the ART period (the number of assist games).

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, if the number of assist games is simply determined based on the internal winning combination as in the patent document, the game may be monotonous and the player may get bored. For this reason, there is a demand for a new method for determining the period of the AT or the like, which has not existed before.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of controlling the period of an AT or the like by a method rich in gaming.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a starting operation by the player; and rotating the reel based on detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. And an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection unit and a symbol changing unit (for example, the main control circuit 91) for changing the symbol. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91), and stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. 91) and stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting unit. Reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the change of the displayed symbol, and an effective means provided on the symbol display means when the symbol change is stopped by the reel stop control means. A prize determining means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the line; For example, the main control circuit 91) includes a first advantageous state (for example, an enemy-determining ART) and a second advantageous state (for example, a battle ART) that is performed following the first advantageous state, triggered by a predetermined condition. An advantageous state starting means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state, a first advantageous state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the first advantageous state, A second advantageous state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the two advantageous states, wherein the first advantageous state control means comprises a plurality of kinds of second advantageous states having different expected degrees of continuation of the advantageous state. Lottery that specifies information (for example, boss MAP data) of a lottery value for determining production information from a plurality of types of production information (for example, production balls) including one production information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8). Emotion Information (for example, boss MAP), a lottery information storage unit (for example, a ROM cartridge substrate 76) that stores a plurality of pieces of lottery information, and one piece of lottery information among the plurality of lottery information stored in the lottery information storage unit. Is determined as the lottery information for determining the game, and when the production information is determined based on the one lottery information, the lottery information for determining the production information is updated from the one lottery information to the other lottery information. Based on the lottery information determining means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101, the boss MAP lottery table) and the lottery information determined by the lottery information determining means, an effect in a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead. Effect information registration means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for determining information, and any one of a plurality of types of first effect information registered as the effect information in the current game When a specific condition is satisfied in the game being played (for example, when the pressing order bell is determined as an internal winning combination), the first advantageous state ends, and the second advantageous state starts to start the second advantageous state. The means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and the second advantageous state control means continue the advantageous state based on the type of the first effect information determined for the game at the end of the first advantageous state. Continuation control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for controlling whether or not the lottery information is determined as the information of the lottery value for determining the first effect information. Stores special lottery information (for example, boss MAP52) that defines only special first effect information (for example, boss balls 7 and 8) that is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, and the lottery information determining means determines the lottery for determining the effect information. As information When determining the special lottery information, without updating from the special lottery information to other lottery information, and maintains a special lottery information.

  Such a gaming machine has a plurality of types of first effect information having different degrees of expectation of continuation of the advantageous state, and the first effect information determined for the game at the end of the first advantageous state is different from the type of the first effect information. The presence or absence of the continuation of the advantageous state is controlled based on this. From the viewpoint of the player, the player has a strong interest in the type of presentation information that is currently displayed, as compared to a conventional gaming machine in which the period of the advantageous state is controlled simply based on the internal winning combination. The control of the period of the advantageous state can be made rich in gaming.

  Here, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect information to be registered for the predetermined game is determined based on the lottery information from among the plurality of types of effect information, and the lottery information is updated every time the effect information is determined. Is updated to appropriate lottery information. The lottery information includes special lottery information that determines only special first effect information having a degree of expectation of continuation of the advantageous state being equal to or more than a predetermined value as the first effect information that triggers the end of the first advantageous state. Once the lottery information is updated to the special lottery information, the special lottery information is maintained without being updated from this special lottery information to other lottery information. As a result, once the special lottery information is updated, only the special first effect information having a high degree of expectation of the continuation of the advantageous state is determined as the first effect information. Attention is also paid to the lottery information for determining, and the control of the period of the advantageous state can be made more rich in gaming.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the continuation control means of the second advantageous state control means controls the first numerical information (e.g., at the time of pressing the bell in the pressing order when setting the enemy ball). , The first specific value corresponding to the type of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state from the HP of the ally character, and the second condition (for example, the pressing order when the ally ball is set). Numerical subtraction means for subtracting the second specific value corresponding to the type of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state from the second numerical information (for example, HP of the enemy character) in response to the bell win). For example, as a result of the subtraction by the sub-control circuit 101) and the numerical value subtracting means, the advantageous state is ended when the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold, and the advantageous state is continued when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold. Continuation control means (for example, The special lottery information (for example, the bosses MAP52 and 53) includes the special first effect information and the second effect information (for example, friend balls) among a plurality of types of effect information. The first advantageous state control means adds the first predetermined value to the first numerical information in the game in which the second effect information is determined as the effect information in the current game. It is characterized by further including a numerical value adding means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101).

  In such a gaming machine, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information of the first numerical information and the second numerical information first becomes smaller than the threshold in the second advantageous state, and the second numerical information is first set to the threshold. If less than, continue. In this case, by defining the information of the lottery value of the second effect information in which the first numerical information is added to the above-described special lottery information, once the special lottery information is updated, it is advantageous. Only the special first effect information having the high degree of expectation of continuation of the state or the second effect information to which the first numerical information is added is determined. As a result, when the special first effect information is determined, the degree of expectation of the continuation of the advantageous state increases as described above, and when the second effect information is determined, the second numerical information is increased along with the first numerical information. (1) Since it is difficult for the numerical information to be reduced below the threshold value, the degree of expectation to continue the advantageous state is similarly increased. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, once the special lottery information has been updated, the player can expect that the advantageous state will continue, so the player determines the effect information. Attention is also paid to the lottery information for performing, and the control of the period of the advantageous state can be made rich in gaming.

[Appendix 16]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 16 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (re-game) is determined as an internal winning combination is set to a high probability may be referred to as an ART machine or the like.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to navigate, so that the player can control the AT or the ART. You want to have a longer period of time. Therefore, in recent years, various devices have been devised to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the continuation of AT and ART. For example, Patent Documents (JP-A-2014-045992) disclose that AT and ART There has been proposed a gaming machine in which whether or not a game is to be performed is notified based on a result of a battle effect to maintain a sense of expectation over a plurality of games.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in a battle effect in a conventional gaming machine such as a patent document, a result of a win or loss is determined in advance by a continuous lottery performed at the start of the battle effect or the like. Without paying attention, only the result of the game is paid attention, and there is a possibility that the battle performance itself may not be attractive.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of controlling a period of an AT or the like by a method rich in gaming.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a starting operation by the player; and rotating the reel based on detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. And an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection unit and a symbol changing unit (for example, the main control circuit 91) for changing the symbol. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91), and stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. 91) and stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting unit. Reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the change of the displayed symbol, and an effective means provided on the symbol display means when the symbol change is stopped by the reel stop control means. A prize determining means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the line; For example, the main control circuit 91), an advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state in response to predetermined conditions, the first effect information (for example, an enemy ball), and the second effect Out of a plurality of types of effect information (for example, effect balls) including information (for example, allied balls), effect information to be registered for a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead with a predetermined probability. The effect information registering means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) to be determined, and the first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical information (for example, HP of the ally character) in the game in which the first effect information is registered as the effect information. In addition, in a game in which the second effect information is registered as the effect information, numerical value subtracting means (for example, the sub control circuit 10) for subtracting a second predetermined value from second numerical information (for example, HP of an enemy character). 1) and when the subtraction of the numerical value subtraction means results in that the first numerical information becomes less than a threshold, the advantageous state is ended, and when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold, the advantageous state is newly started. When the result of the subtraction by the state control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and the numerical value subtraction means is such that the first numerical information becomes less than a change threshold, the effect information registration means registers the effect information for registering the first effect information. And a probability changing means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for changing the probability determined as.

  In such a gaming machine, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information of the first numerical information and the second numerical information first falls below the threshold, and continues when the second numerical information falls below the threshold first. . Here, the subtraction of the first numerical information and the second numerical information is performed based on the type of the registered effect information. In the game in which the first effect information is registered, the first numerical information is subtracted. In a game in which 2 effect information is registered, the second numerical value information is subtracted. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the continuation of the advantageous state is controlled based on the type of the effect information to be registered. Thus, unlike a conventional gaming machine in which the presence or absence of continuation is determined in advance, the gaming machine according to the present invention differs in the presence or absence of continuation according to the flow of the game in the advantageous state, so that the advantageous state Can be made rich in gaming.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first numerical value information is less than the change threshold, the probability of determining the first effect information as the effect information to be registered is changed. Thus, for example, the first effect information is less likely to be determined, and thereafter, the first numerical value information is less likely to be subtracted, and the advantageous state is more likely to be continued. Conversely, for example, when the first effect information is easily determined, the first numerical information is easily subtracted thereafter, and it is difficult to maintain the advantageous state. As described above, by changing the probability of determining the effect information based on the value of the first numerical information, the control of the period of the advantageous state can be further enhanced in gaming.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, an opponent determining means (for example, an auxiliary character determining unit) for determining one attribute information from among a plurality of types of attribute information (for example, types of enemy characters) associated with the second numerical information. A control circuit 101), wherein the probability changing unit changes the probability to the first probability when the attribute information determined by the opponent determining unit is the first attribute information, and the opponent determining unit determines When the determined attribute information is the second attribute information, the probability is changed to a second probability different from the first probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, the probability after the change for determining the effect information is different depending on the type of the attribute information associated with the second numerical value information. For example, according to the opponent in the battle effect, The probability after the change can be made different. Thereby, even if the first numerical information decreases to the change threshold value and the advantageous state is about to end, it is possible to perform an effect such that it is easy to reverse depending on an opponent in the battle effect, so that the control of the period of the advantageous state Can be made more entertaining.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the change threshold, which triggers the probability changing unit to change the probability, differs according to the attribute information determined by the opponent determining unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the change threshold value differs depending on the type of the attribute information associated with the second numerical information, for example, the probability of determining the production information according to the opponent in the battle production The timing of making the change can be made different. Thereby, for example, the timing at which the reversal is likely to occur in the battle effect can be set to various timings, so that the control of the period in the advantageous state can be further enhanced in gaming.

[Appendix 17]
The pachislot 1 in Supplementary Note 17 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In the pachislot machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and a stepping motor is driven to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the drive of the stepping motor is controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  Further, in recent years, there have been known gaming machines in which various decoration members (for example, movable accessories) are provided in the gaming machine, and the decoration members are moved in accordance with the progress of the game so as to enhance the gaming performance. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-237715 discloses a gaming machine that notifies a player of an internal winning combination by operating a movable combination based on a result of an internal lottery. I have.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine disclosed in the patent document, the movable accessory is merely operated in order to inform the result of the internal lottery. From the viewpoint of the player, the content of the notification is too easy to understand and gradually gets tired. There was a possibility that interest in the role of the character might be reduced. When the interest of the player decreases, the operating rate of the gaming machine also decreases. Therefore, in a gaming machine having a movable accessory, a device that does not reduce the interest in the movable accessory is required.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of continuing a game without getting the player bored.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state (for example, a normal game state) and a advantageous state (for example, a CZ or ART game state) which is more advantageous for the player than the normal state as a state in which the game is played. An effect of registering effect information used in a predetermined game from among a plurality of effect information (for example, effect balls such as lottery balls 1 to 4 and fixed balls) having different degrees of expectation regarding the transition to the advantageous state. Information registration means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for displaying the registered effect information when a predetermined condition (for example, operation of apocalypse) is satisfied in the normal state. In a game in which the display means displays the effect information, a transfer lottery means (for example, a sub lottery) for performing a transfer random determination to the advantageous state based on the displayed effect information. Control circuit 101), a game state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for shifting a game state to the advantageous state based on the result of the shift lottery of the shift lottery means, and a movable type capable of performing a predetermined operation. An accessory (for example, a rotating accessory 200), an accessory control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101, a rotating accessory control board 78) for controlling the operation of the movable accessory, and the movable accessory is illuminated. Light-emitting device (for example, an LED provided behind the eyeball body 203), and light-emission control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101, which controls the LED provided behind the eyeball body 203) A movable board lottery means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for determining whether or not to operate the movable handpiece in a game in which the display means does not display the effect information; Movable When the lottery means determines that the movable character is to be operated, a promotion lottery means for performing a promotion lottery as to whether or not the registered effect information is to be rewritten to effect information having a higher degree of expectation regarding the transition to the advantageous state. (For example, a sub-control circuit 101), wherein the effect information registering means rewrites the registered effect information based on a result of the promotion lottery of the promotion lottery means. When the accessory movable lottery means determines that the movable accessory is to be operated, the movable accessory is operated, and the light emission control means determines that the accessory control means is based on the determination result of the accessory movable lottery means. When the movable accessory is operated, the light emission of the light emitting device is controlled based on the result of the promotion lottery of the promotion lottery means.

  In such a gaming machine, when the movable accessory is operated, promotion lottery of the effect information used for the shift lottery of the advantageous state is performed. Here, in the game in which the display means displays the effect information, since the lottery for shifting to the advantageous state is performed based on the displayed effect information, the player is strongly interested in the promotion information of the effect information. Will hold you. On the other hand, since the movable character is operated based on the determination result of the movable item lottery means when the display means is not displaying the effect information, the promotion lottery is not displayed on the display means. It will be performed on the information that has been given. By using the movable character to notify that the promotion lottery for the hidden information is being performed, the situation becomes advantageous to the player (winning the promotion lottery) for the player. The expectation about what you are doing will be maintained, and the game will be continued without getting tired. Also, by controlling the light emission of the light emitting device in accordance with the result of the promotion lottery, it is possible to infer from the light emission (for example, color) of the movable role the expectation that the situation is advantageous. If it can be guessed that it is advantageous, the player will have a strong interest in the later game, so that the player can continue the game without getting bored.

[Appendix 18]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 18 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In the pachislot machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and a stepping motor is driven to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the drive of the stepping motor is controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (re-game) is determined as an internal winning combination is set to a high probability may be referred to as an ART machine or the like.

  In a gaming machine equipped with such an AT (ART) function, an AT lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to perform an AT during a bonus game, and the result of the AT lottery may be announced at the end of the bonus game. For example, a patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-183284) states that if the number of remaining payouts becomes 16 to 30 during the bonus game, the bonus game may be completed in the remaining two games, and the bonus game screen is displayed. There has been proposed a gaming machine for switching an image display to a challenge notification screen for notifying whether or not an AT (ART) has been won.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, the number of medals to be awarded during the bonus game varies depending on the internal winning combination. Therefore, depending on the internal winning combination after the video display is switched to the challenge notification screen, the number of medals to be awarded is the remaining payout number. May not be reached. In such a case, if notification of the presence or absence of the AT is notified as in Patent Literature 1, the processing at the time of ending the bonus game will be executed even though the bonus game is not ended. This will give the player distrust.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying a player of the end of an advantageous state such as a bonus to a player. I do.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine in which the maximum number of game media provided in a unit game is a predetermined number, and a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reel, and start operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91) for detecting a start operation by the player. , A start switch 64), a symbol changing means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for changing the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, and a start operation detecting means. And an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations based on detection of a start operation by the plurality of reels. A stop operation detecting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel; an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means; and a stop by the stop operation detecting means. A reel stop control unit (for example, a main control circuit 91) that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which the operation is detected, thereby stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit; When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line provided in the symbol display means. Prize determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not a prize has been won; When it is determined that the given internal winning combination has been won, a profit providing means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for providing a number of game media according to the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line, and a predetermined condition Profit state start means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for starting a profit state (for example, a bonus state) as a trigger, and counting means (for example, for counting the number of game media provided by the profit provision means during the profit state) A main control circuit 91), and a profit state ending means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that ends the profit state when the number of game media counted by the counting means exceeds a threshold value (for example, 59). An effect control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for controlling an effect executed during the profit state, wherein the effect control means detects the start operation by the start operation detecting means, When the number of game media counted by the counting means at the timing of detection exceeds a value obtained by subtracting a predetermined number from the threshold, a profit state end effect as an effect at the end of the game according to the detected start operation. Is registered, and in the game according to the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means, as a result of the game medium being provided by the profit providing means, the number of game media counted by the counting means exceeds the threshold. In this case, the registered profit state end effect is executed, and if the number of game media counted by the counting means is equal to or less than the threshold, the registered profit state end effect is changed to the profit state. It is characterized by changing to a continuous effect and executing the profit state continuous effect.

  In such a gaming machine, at the timing when the start operation is detected, if there is a possibility that the number of game media provided in the profit state may exceed the threshold, a profit state end effect is performed as an end effect of the game. Register. At this time, depending on the number of game media actually provided in the game, the number of game media provided in the profit state may not exceed the threshold value. The registered profit state end effect is changed to the profit state continuation effect based on the result of providing the game medium. That is, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, at the start of a game in which the profit state may end, the profit state end effect is registered once, but if the profit state does not end as a result of the game, The profit state continuation effect is executed without executing the profit state end effect. Thus, it is possible to prevent the effect at the end of the profit state from being executed even though the profit state has not ended, and as a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the end time of the profit state to the player. .

[Appendix 19]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 19 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  Also, gaming machines having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used in the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay are widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 discloses a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes referred to as a flag-to-flag RT, and a game can be played with a high replay winning probability until a bonus determined (carried over) as an internal winning combination wins.

  Also, there is known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, together with the replay time. Informing the player of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). A gaming machine that performs AT during the replay time may be called an ART machine or the like.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In recent years, gaming machines that perform AT during the above-described RT between flags have been known. In such a gaming machine, if a bonus determined as an internal winning combination wins, the RT between flags ends, so that the player performs a stop operation so that the bonus does not win while playing the game. Will be performed. By the way, since the knowledge about the gaming machine differs depending on the player, in the gaming machine that requires a predetermined stop operation during the RT between the flags, a player with little knowledge about the gaming machine may be disadvantaged. For example, for a player who has knowledge of a gaming machine, a player who has no knowledge of a gaming machine can perform a game while maintaining the RT between flags by performing a stop operation so as not to win a bonus. However, there is a possibility that a bonus may be won without performing the stop operation. In this case, the RT between the flags ends, and the player may be disadvantaged.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce disadvantages to a player who does not have knowledge of the gaming machine.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels). , Display window 4), start operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a start operation by the player, and rotating the reel based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. The internal winning combination is determined at a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations based on a symbol variation unit (for example, the main control circuit 91) that varies the symbol by causing the start operation detection unit to detect the start operation. Internal winning combination determination means (for example, main control circuit 91) and stop operation detection means (e.g., a main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel For example, the main control circuit 91) stops the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting unit. Reel stop control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for stopping the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means; and the symbol display means when the symbol change is stopped by the reel stop control means. Winning determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line provided in If the winning combination is determined by the winning determination means, the profit state is started, and if the end condition is satisfied in the profit state, the profit state ends. Profit control means (for example, the main control circuit 91), a low RT state (for example, RT2) where the probability that replays relating to replays are determined as the internal winning combination is low, and the replay is determined as the internal winning combination. RT control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for controlling the transition of the game state between a high RT state (for example, RT4) where the probability of the game being played is higher than the low RT state, and a predetermined condition (for example, ART) Triggered by a lottery), a first advantageous state (for example, an enemy-determined ART) and a second advantageous state (for example, a battle ART) performed subsequent to the first advantageous state are included. Advantageous state start means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for shifting an effect state relating to a game to an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) in which information of a stop operation is notified, and the first advantageous state First advantageous state control means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the state, and second advantageous state control means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the second advantageous state When a predetermined combination (for example, a combination related to JACIN) is determined as an internal winning combination during the profit state, the RT control means shifts the gaming state to the high RT state, and When the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined combination (for example, C_JACIN1 to C_JACIN3) is displayed by the symbol display means, the gaming state is shifted to the low RT state, and the advantageous state starting means is configured to output the profit state. If the predetermined condition is satisfied at the end of the profit state, the effect state is shifted to the advantageous state after the end of the profit state, and the first advantageous state control unit controls the first advantageous state. During the state, first effect information registration means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls) in a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead, as the effect information A numerical value adding means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for adding a predetermined number to first numerical information (for example, HP of a friendly character) in a game in which first rendering information (for example, friendly ball) is registered; In a game in which second effect information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8) is registered as information, the first advantageous state is ended and the second advantageous state is started by the second advantageous state starting means (for example, sub-control) Circuit 101), wherein the second advantageous state control means registers, during the second advantageous state, effect information for a plurality of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ahead. Means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101), and subtracting a first predetermined value from the first numerical information in a game in which third effect information (for example, an enemy ball) is registered as the effect information; Numerical subtraction means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for subtracting a second predetermined value from second numerical information in a game in which fourth effect information (for example, friend ball) is registered as information, and subtraction of the numerical subtraction means As a result, when the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold value, the advantageous state is terminated, and when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value, the first advantageous state is newly started by a continuous control means (for example, a sub control circuit). 101).

  In such a gaming machine, when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the profit state, the game machine shifts to the high RT state, but shifts to the low RT state when the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed. Would. Therefore, a player having knowledge of the gaming machine can maintain the high RT state by playing the game while avoiding the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined combination, but has no knowledge of the gaming machine. The player may display a combination of symbols according to the predetermined combination, and may fall from the high RT state to the low RT state.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the present invention executes the advantageous state in which the information of the advantageous stop operation regarding the provision of the game medium is notified. This advantageous state ends when the first numerical information of the first numerical information and the second numerical information first falls below the threshold, and continues when the second numerical information falls first below the threshold. Therefore, the value of the first numerical information has an influence on the duration of the advantageous state, and the first advantageous state in which the addition of the first numerical information is performed extends the duration of the advantageous state. It can be said that this is a chance period.

  Here, the advantageous state is executed in accordance with whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. When the predetermined condition is satisfied at the end of the profit state, the state (low RT state or high RT state) is satisfied. (Regardless of whether it is in the RT state). Therefore, even if a player who has no knowledge of the gaming machine falls down to the low RT state during the profit state, after the profit state ends, there is a chance period (first advantageous state) for extending the duration of the advantageous state. ) Can be performed, and the disadvantage to a player who has no knowledge of the gaming machine can be reduced.

[Appendix 20]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 20 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In the pachislot machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and a stepping motor is driven to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the drive of the stepping motor is controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information advantageous to the player so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, information that is advantageous to the player is notified by a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is made high. ) Is generally performed to realize a gaming state (ART) that is advantageous to the player.

  Here, among gaming machines having a plurality of gaming states, gaming machines that vary the combination of symbols displayed according to a player's stop operation are widely known, and a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination. For example, when the first symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation, AT or ART is executed, and when the second symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation, AT or ART is executed. Gaming machines that do not do so are also known.

  In a gaming machine that controls a gaming state according to a combination of symbols displayed in this way, the player can avoid grasping that a combination of symbols that is disadvantageous for the player is displayed by the sub-control board. There are known fraudulent activities such as spilling commands that give unfair advantage. For example, in the case of the gaming machine described above, when a combination of symbols disadvantageous to the player is displayed, by preventing the command including information on the displayed combination of symbols from being acquired on the sub-control board side, It can be avoided that the player is disadvantaged, and as a result, the player obtains an unfair advantage.

  Therefore, when a misconduct by a player is performed during a game and a communication error (sequence error) occurs at the time of communication between the main control board and the sub control board, a gaming machine for notifying that the error has occurred is provided. It is already known (see, for example, Patent Document (JP-A-2013-059616)). In such a gaming machine, a liquid crystal display device, a sound, and a decorative lamp (LED) are used to notify that a sequence error has occurred, and to notify the clerk of the game hall that the misconduct has been carried out. Can be terminated, a fraudulent action that induces a sequence error is executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from illegally gaining the profit of the game.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine, a game is performed by performing a stop operation three times following an operation of a start lever, so that the order of commands transmitted from the main control board to the sub-control board is determined. By confirming the order of the commands obtained by the sub-control board, it is possible to specify whether or not a sequence error has occurred.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-described gaming machine, when the sequence error is notified by the sound and the decoration lamp when the liquid crystal display device is not mounted, the effect of the other gaming machine in the gaming arcade is lost even if the notification of the sequence error is executed. As a result, the effect of notifying the clerk of the sequence error is not transmitted, and there has been a problem that the player can illegally obtain the profit of the game by cheating.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent illegal gain of a game from being illegally obtained.

[Means for solving the problem]
In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the normal state (for example, the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state) in which the replay related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and the probability that the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is determined. A gaming machine having a higher RT state (for example, an RT4 gaming state) higher than the normal state, wherein a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and Symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the displayed symbols, start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by the player (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 16S), On the condition that the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit, a symbol change unit (for example, a main control circuit) that changes the symbol by rotating the reel. 1) an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means; And a stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, stop switch 64) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and an internal determined by the internal winning combination determining means. Reel stop control means for stopping the rotation of the reel based on the winning combination and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means to stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means ( For example, based on the fact that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the main control circuit 91) and the reel stop control means, an effective symbol provided in the symbol display means is provided. A determination unit (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining a combination of symbols stopped on the inside, and if a predetermined condition is satisfied during the normal state (for example, when an RT4 shift lip is displayed), the normal state RT start means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for shifting the gaming state from the high RT state to the high RT state, and when it is determined that the predetermined symbol combination has stopped during the high RT state, The game state is shifted to the normal state, and when it is determined that the specific symbol combination has stopped, RT ending means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for maintaining the high RT state, the normal state or the high state When a first lottery performed during the RT state (for example, a lottery for transition to ART) is won, the effect state related to the game is changed to a specific effect state that informs advantageous stop operation information (for example, the ART game state). And the probability of winning the first lottery when the second lottery (for example, avoidance point lottery) performed during the high RT state is won. High probability state transition means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for transitioning to a high probability state (for example, a high probability game state), and when it is determined that the predetermined symbol combination has stopped during the high probability state A low-probability state transition unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for transitioning to a low-probability state in which the probability of winning the first lottery is low, and a game order determination unit (for example, a sub-control Circuit 101), wherein the low-probability state shifting means determines that the game has not progressed in a predetermined order during the high-probability state (for example, when a sequence error occurs). In time), and wherein the shifting from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first lottery performed in the normal state or the high RT state is won, the game machine shifts to a specific effect state (so-called ART) for notifying information of an advantageous stop operation. In addition, if the second lottery is won during the high RT state, the state shifts to the high probability state in which the probability of winning the first lottery is high. Therefore, the high RT state is set as a transition chance section to the specific effect state (ART). be able to.

  Here, when a predetermined symbol combination is stopped during the high RT state (= high probability state), the RT end means shifts from the high RT state to the normal state, but the symbol combination displayed due to cheating is reduced to zero. If this happens (cannot be grasped), the high-probability state is temporarily maintained. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is determined whether or not the progress of one game has progressed in a predetermined order, and if the progress has not progressed in the predetermined order, the game machine shifts to a low probability state, thereby enabling Even if the progress result (for example, the displayed symbol combination) is reduced to zero, the high probability state is not unduly maintained, and the player gains an unfair advantage by cheating. Can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the low-probability state, the first lottery is performed on condition that a predetermined combination (for example, a rare combination or more) is determined as an internal combination by the internal combination combination determination means. In the high probability state, the first lottery is performed on condition that any one of a plurality of combinations (for example, all combinations) including a predetermined combination is determined as the internal combination by the internal combination combination determination means. It is characterized by the following.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the high probability state, the first lottery is performed based on more types of combinations than in the low probability state, and the high probability state is incorrectly maintained. And the player gets an unfair advantage. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the progress of the game is not appropriate, the high-probability state is improperly maintained because the state is shifted from the high-probability state to the low-probability state regardless of the symbol combination. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from gaining an unfair advantage due to an illegal act.

[Appendix 21]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 21 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In the pachislot machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and a stepping motor is driven to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the drive of the stepping motor is controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In such a gaming machine, various effects are generally performed according to the progress of the game. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-144940 discloses a staging effect (vibration). When performing (display), there is disclosed a gaming machine capable of appropriately oscillating the screen display while preventing an increase in the data capacity by arranging different image data on a plurality of layers and overlapping them. .

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the effect in the gaming machine, it is required to switch the effect according to the progress of the game such as when the rotation of the reel is started or when the reel is stopped. Is not disclosed at all, and further ingenuity is required.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately switching effects in accordance with the progress of a game.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11) for displaying an effect, and a first effect and a second effect capable of switching from an effect before switching to an effect after switching according to the progress of the game. Effect selection means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for selecting an effect to be displayed in a predetermined game from among a plurality of effects, and display control means (for controlling the display means based on the effect selected by the effect selection means ( For example, a sub-control circuit 101) and a detecting unit (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for detecting a request for switching the effect being displayed on the display unit (for example, a start command or a reel stop command) according to the progress of the game. The display control means, when the detection means detects a switching request, when the first effect is selected by the effect selecting means, the display pre-switching effect Is switched from one layer for executing the effect to another layer for executing the effect after the switching, so that the effect to be displayed on the display means is switched, and when the second effect is selected by the effect selecting means, The effect to be displayed on the display means is switched by switching the effect to be executed in the first layer from the effect before switching to the effect after switching.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a first effect for switching an effect according to the progress of a game by switching a layer in which an effect is being executed, and a second effect for switching an effect according to the progress of a game in the same layer. , And selects an effect to be displayed from a plurality of effects including the first effect and the second effect. Here, when the effect is switched by switching the layers as in the first effect, although it is possible to suppress the occurrence of flickering of the image before and after the effect is switched, since the effect must be performed in each layer, Processing load increases. On the other hand, when switching the effects performed on the same layer as in the second effect, the processing load can be reduced, but flickering of the image may occur before and after switching the effects.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, a preferable switching method is set in advance for each effect in accordance with the connection between the effects before and after the switching and the processing load of each effect. Thus, for example, a method of switching layers can be set for an effect (first effect) in which a flicker easily occurs before and after the switching and gives an uncomfortable feeling to the player. For an effect that is not bothersome (second effect), a method of switching the effect on the same layer can be set. As a result, according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the flicker at the time of switching the effect, to reduce the processing load, and to cause the processing to drop according to the effect switching. As a result, the effect can be appropriately switched in accordance with the progress of the game.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes a notifying unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11) for prompting the player to perform a predetermined operation, and the detecting unit performs a first operation in response to the operation prompted by the informing unit. (1) a switching request is detected, and a second switching request is detected in response to the progress of the game without performing the operation prompted by the notification means, and the display control means determines that the first switching is When a request is detected, the effect to be displayed on the display means is switched from the effect before switching to the effect after first switching in response to the first switching request, and when the detecting means detects the second switching request, Is characterized by switching the effect displayed on the display means from the effect before switching to the effect after the second switching in response to the second switching request.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine or a pachinko machine, a player may be prompted to operate a button such as a chance button, and the effect may be switched when the button operation is performed. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect to be switched can be made different depending on whether the button operation is performed or not, so that the game characteristics are diversified and the interest of the game is improved. Also in this case, since a preferable switching method is set for each effect, the effect can be appropriately switched in accordance with the progress of the game.

[Supplementary Note 22]
The pachislot 1 in Appendix 22 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In the pachislot machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and a stepping motor is driven to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the drive of the stepping motor is controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In such a gaming machine, various effects are generally performed in accordance with the progress of the game. In particular, in recent years, not only a display device but also other devices (for example, Gaming machines that perform effects using (government) are also known. For example, a patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200614) discloses a gaming machine that performs effects and displays in conjunction with a display device and a movable body that can move to a position that partially overlaps the display device. I have.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In such a gaming machine, during the performance of the effect, the display device and the other devices are linked to each other, so that no inconvenience occurs. In addition, the presence of another device makes it difficult to visually recognize the display contents (for example, notification of an error or display of a menu screen) on the display device, and the presence of the other device may become an obstacle.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that does not disturb the display of a display device.

[Means for solving the problem]
A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a display device (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 11) for displaying an image, and a concave portion provided on a front surface of the display device and having a reflecting surface for reflecting light along a plate surface to a player side. A transmissive panel (for example, light guide plate 401) on which a latent image (for example, latent image 402) is formed by (for example, reflective concave portion 402a), and a light-emitting device (for example, LED 403) that emits light along the plate surface of the transmissive panel. Display control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for controlling display of the display device, light-emission control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101, a panel control board 79) for controlling light emission of the light-emitting device, Detecting means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for detecting a request for calling an effect image (for example, a screen for notifying an error, a menu screen); An effect execution unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for making a light emission output request, and a light emission output control unit (for example, a panel control board 79) for causing the light emitting device to emit light in response to the output request of the effect execution unit. Including, the light emission output control means, when the detection means detects a call request when receiving an output request from the effect execution means, turns off the light emitting device giving priority to the call request over the output request, Irrespective of whether or not the detection means detects a non-effect image calling request, the effect execution means makes a light emission output request based on the effect data, and the display control means determines that the detection means Upon detecting a call request for an image, a non-effect image is displayed on the display device.

  According to such a gaming machine, the light emitting device emits light rays to the transmission panel provided on the front surface of the display device, so that the image corresponding to the latent image formed on the transmission panel on the front surface of the display device. Is displayed, so that an effect can be performed in cooperation with the display device and the transmissive panel, and an effect more effective than the case where the effect is simply performed on the display device can be performed. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, when there is a request for calling a non-effect image such as an error notification screen or a menu screen, the non-effect image is displayed on the display device and the light emitting device is turned off. Thereby, when displaying the non-effect image on the display device, the display of the display device is not disturbed, and the visibility of the non-effect image is not impaired.

  In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since a call request for a non-effect image is prioritized over a light emission output request, even when a call request is made during execution of an effect using the transparent panel, the transparent panel Is interrupted, and the visibility of the non-effect image is not impaired. Further, since the light emission output request from the effect execution means to the light emission output control means is performed irrespective of the non-effect image call request, there is a case where there is a call request during execution of the effect using the transparent panel. Also, it is not necessary to add processing such as error processing to the rendering processing itself, so that the processing can be simplified and the occurrence of bugs can be suppressed. In other words, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when there is a calling request during the execution of the effect using the transparent panel, the output of the light emission is suppressed while the animation of the light emission based on the effect data is continued internally. . Thus, it is possible to prevent the display of the non-effect image from being disturbed, and at the end of the display of the non-effect image, it is possible to restart the effect using the transparent panel from the continuation of the processing that has been internally continued. Thus, an effective effect using the display device and the transmissive panel can be performed.

[Appendix 23]
Supplementary note 23, pachislo 1 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine provided with a decoration portion corresponding to the model of the gaming machine has been known in order to enhance the gaming performance. As the decorative part, there is, for example, one that performs a mechanical operation, light emission, or both, and such a decorative part is generally called a “main part (movable part)”. As a gaming machine using an accessory, for example, Patent Document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-042691) discloses a gaming machine in which a rotating movable accessory is installed above a front door.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the movable role, the motor and the gear mechanism are worn out by the load associated with the continuous operation for a long time, and in some cases, the effect peculiar to the movable role cannot be performed due to the occurrence of a failure. This will cause discomfort to the player. Therefore, there is a need for a device capable of reducing the consumption of movable movable objects.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the consumption of movable movable objects.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. The movable portion (for example, the cover member 198) includes an initial position (for example, a position at which the eyeball body 203 becomes invisible to a player) and a predetermined position (for example, a position at which the eyeball body 203 is exposed). A movable accessory (for example, a rotating accessory 200) that can be moved to the position of (1), and an accessory control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101, a rotating accessory control board 78) for controlling the operation of the movable accessory. A time-measuring means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for measuring a non-operation time indicating a period during which a player's operation is not accepted. Ceremony The moving part is moved from the initial position to a predetermined position (for example, a position where the cover member 198 is in a semi-open state), and the time measuring means sets a non-operation time when the movable part of the movable accessory moves to the predetermined position. Starts, and when the no-operation time measured by the timer reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes), the accessory control means returns the movable portion of the movable accessory to the initial position. A gaming machine characterized by:

  If the no-operation time has reached the predetermined time, there is a high possibility that the player has not performed any operation and is not playing the game. In this way, if the unique effect of the movable accessory is continued even when the game is not being played, the movable accessory will be consumed. When the time has elapsed, the movable portion of the movable accessory is returned to the initial position, and the consumption of the movable accessory is reduced. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the unnecessary use of the movable accessory while improving the interest of the game by a unique effect using the movable accessory.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined condition is that a state in which a game is played is the advantageous state and a game start operation is performed.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is performed during the advantageous state, the movable portion of the movable accessory is located at a predetermined position, and a unique effect using the movable accessory during the advantageous state is provided. Can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix 24]
The pachislot 1 in Supplementary Note 24 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively formed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and a combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine which notifies a player of information advantageous to the player so as not to miss a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, information that is advantageous to the player is notified by a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is made high. ) Is generally performed to achieve an advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  In a gaming machine having such an ART function, a chance zone having a high degree of expectation of transition to the ART state is provided, and when a specific condition is satisfied in the chance zone, control for transition to the ART state with a high probability is performed. I have. For example, in Patent Literature (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-048945), a specific symbol combination (RT operation symbol 1) is aimed at in the chance zone (CZ), and when a specific symbol combination is displayed, replay is internally performed. A gaming machine that performs control to shift to a high RT with a high probability as a winning combination is disclosed.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In a gaming machine using a chance zone, there is also known a so-called perfect-run type chance zone in which the game machine always transitions to the ART state when a predetermined number of games are played in the chance zone. However, in such a complete run type chance zone, the player simply desires to continue until the chance zone is completed, and there is a problem that the playability in the chance zone becomes monotonous. .

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period that is a trigger for shifting to an advantageous state advantageous to a player. The purpose is to:

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a starting operation by the player; and rotating the reel based on detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. And an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection unit and a symbol changing unit (for example, the main control circuit 91) for changing the symbol. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91), and stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. 91) and stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting unit. Reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the change of the displayed symbol, and an effective means provided on the symbol display means when the symbol change is stopped by the reel stop control means. A prize determining means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the line; For example, a main control circuit 91) and a lottery state start means (for example, a sub-routine) for starting an advantageous state lottery state (for example, CZ) for performing a right granting lottery for granting a right to perform the advantageous state in response to a predetermined condition. A control circuit 101) and a first right granting lottery for granting a right to perform the advantageous state with a predetermined probability when the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous state lottery state (for example, The second right granting lottery for granting the right to perform the advantageous state with a specific probability when a predetermined number (for example, 30 games) of unit games elapse in the advantageous state lottery state. (For example, a lottery means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for performing a lottery transition to an ART performed at the time of CZ completion) and a predetermined symbol combination are displayed on the activated line. When indicated, or when the predetermined number of unit games elapse in the advantageous state lottery state, the lottery state ending means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for ending the advantageous state lottery state, and the advantageous state lottery means Right count management means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for counting the total number of times of the right to perform the advantageous state granted as a result of the performed first right grant lottery and the second right grant lottery; When the lottery state is completed, there is provided an advantageous state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for executing the advantageous state for the total number counted by the right number management means.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone), the second right granting lottery is performed when a predetermined number of unit games that end the advantageous state lottery state are performed. Thus, a so-called perfect running type chance zone in which a lottery to an advantageous state is performed when the running is completed can be realized. At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first right granting lottery is performed not only at the time of completion of running but also when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous state lottery state. In addition to simply wishing the state lottery state to continue, the user will also be interested in the first right granting lottery during the advantageous state lottery state. As a result, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the game in the advantageous state lottery state, which triggers the transition to the advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state lottery state. it can.

  Further, the advantageous state lottery state may end when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed. However, when the display of the predetermined symbol combination can be avoided, the advantageous state lottery state does not end. Therefore, the advantageous state lottery state can be continued in response to the player's stop operation, and the player has a strong interest in the stop operation during the advantageous state lottery state, and during the advantageous state lottery state. The interest of the game can be improved.

  Also, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the advantageous state lottery state ends, the advantageous state is executed by the total number of times of the right to perform the advantageous state granted as a result of the right granting lottery performed during the advantageous state lottery state. I do. Here, depending on the gaming machine, for example, there are gaming machines that only grant one right to perform the advantageous state during the advantageous state lottery state, but with such a gaming machine, the player is likely to feel dissatisfied, In the case of a complete run type chance zone (advantageous lottery state), only one right is obtained even if the run is continued for a long time until the run is completed, so that the satisfaction of the player is reduced by half. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the right granting lottery is won a plurality of times during the advantageous state lottery state, the player is given the right to perform the plurality of advantageous states, No complaints to the player. Also, for the player, if the stop operation can be performed so that the advantageous state lottery state does not end when the first right grant lottery is performed, then the first right grant lottery or the second right grant lottery is performed. Further, since an opportunity to receive the game can be obtained, the player has a strong interest in the stop operation during the advantageous state lottery state, and the interest of the game during the advantageous state lottery state can be improved.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the probability of granting the right to perform the advantageous state in the first right granting lottery based on the number of unit games passed in the advantageous state lottery state is higher than the second mode. A first mode (for example, CZ mode 0) that shifts to (for example, CZ mode 1) and a second mode that does not shift to the first mode in which the probability is higher than the first mode and the probability is lower than the first mode. And a mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, the transition from the first mode to the second mode during the advantageous state lottery state does not cause the subsequent transition from the second mode to the first mode. As the number of unit games increases, the probability of winning the first right grant lottery increases. From the viewpoint of the player, it is desirable that the advantageous state lottery state be continued for a long time, so that the player will be strongly interested in the stop operation during the advantageous state lottery state, and the interest during the advantageous state lottery state will be improved. it can.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the lottery state start means starts the advantageous state lottery state, the number of times of transition determining the number of unit games to transition from the first mode to the second mode is determined. Means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101 for determining CZ_MAP) and effect means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101, the liquid crystal display device 11) for effecting an effect in a mode different from that of the first mode in the second mode. It is further characterized by being provided.

  According to such a gaming machine, the player can grasp or presume that the mode has shifted from the first mode to the second mode from the effect mode of the effect means. Since the second mode is a mode in which the right to perform the advantageous state is highly likely to be given, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation for shifting to the advantageous state in the subsequent game. Interest during the state lottery state can be improved.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachislot, 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4 ... Display window, 17L ... Left stop button, 17C ... Middle stop button, 17R ... Right stop button, 200 ... Rotating role (movable 9) Main control circuit, 101: Sub control circuit, 93: Main CPU, 102: Sub CPU

Claims (2)

Display means for displaying the effect,
And effect selecting means for selecting an effect of displaying the predetermined game from the effect of the number of double switchable to the effect after switching from the pre-switching effect in accordance with the progress of the game,
Display control means for controlling the display means based on the effect selected by the effect selection means,
Detecting means for detecting a request to switch the effect being displayed on the display means in accordance with the progress of the game,
The plurality of effects, when selected by the effect selection means, by switching the layer performing the effect to a layer different from the layer performing the pre-switching effect, a layer switching effect to switch the effect, or Effect setting means for setting any of effect switching type effects for performing an effect in the same layer as the layer for performing the effect before switching,
With
The display control means, when the detection means detects a switching request,
When the effect of the layer switching type is selected by the effect selecting means, the display is performed on the display means by switching from one layer performing the effect before switching to another layer performing the effect after switching. Switch the production,
When the effect switching type of effect is selected by the effect selecting means, by switching the effect to be executed in the same layer from the effect before switching to the effect after switching, to switch the effect displayed on the display means,
A gaming machine , wherein the effect setting means changes contents set for the plurality of effects in accordance with a continuation state of a game. The said effect setting means changes the setting content with respect to the effect set as the said effect switching type effect among the said several effects, to the said layer switching type effect, when game time becomes long. A gaming machine according to claim 1.